Project: Client

PROJECT
Design & Build of ETS Room – Aspire Main Works
TECHNICAL SUBMITTAL - PLC & INSTRUMENTATION
Client
__________________________________________________________
Main Contractor
__________________________________________________________
System Integrator
SOLUTIONS FOR CONTROL AND AUTOMATION

P.O. BOX 37240
Doha, Qatar
Project Name: Document No: Main Contractor:
Client: Design & Build of ETS Room – xx-xxx-xx-xx-xx-xx-
Aspire Main Works 000
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
Document Title: Material submittal – ETS
Rooms Date: 06-Jan-2020
Contents
1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 1
2. Specification & Compliance Statement .......................................................................................... 2
2.1 Compliance Statement to QCS 2014 Specification ................................................................. 2
3. Material Schedule ........................................................................................................................... 3
3.1 Instruments BOQ .................................................................................................................... 3
3.2 PLC BOQ .................................................................................................................................. 4
4. Catalogues....................................................................................................................................... 5
4.1 Instruments Catalogues .......................................................................................................... 5
4.1.1 Pressure Transmitter....................................................................................................... 5
4.1.2 Differential pressure transmitter .................................................................................... 6
4.1.3 Temperature Transmitter ............................................................................................... 7
4.1.4 Temperature Element for Energy meter......................................................................... 8
4.1.5 Flow Meter for Energy Meter ......................................................................................... 9
4.1.6 Energy Meter ................................................................................................................ 10
4.2 PLC Catalogues ...................................................................................................................... 11
4.2.1 CPU ................................................................................................................................ 11
4.2.2 DI, DO, AI & AO ............................................................................................................. 12
4.2.3 SM2 ............................................................................................................................... 13
4.2.4 PB2, PB4 ........................................................................................................................ 14
4.2.5 ECL ................................................................................................................................. 15
4.2.6 CRR3 .............................................................................................................................. 16
4.2.7 HMI................................................................................................................................ 17
4.2.8 Ethernet Switch ............................................................................................................. 18
4.2.9 Fibre Trransreceiver ...................................................................................................... 19
4.2.10 UPS ................................................................................................................................ 20
4.2.11 Battery........................................................................................................................... 21
5. Data Points Schedule .................................................................................................................... 22
5.1 Data Points Schedule ETS 01 ................................................................................................. 22
System Integrator:
Rev: 00

6. Typical Control Schedule............................................................................................................... 25
7. System Architecture ...................................................................................................................... 26
8. Country of Origin........................................................................................................................... 27
9. Authorization Letter ...................................................................................................................... 28
10. Warranty Letters ....................................................................................................................... 29
11. Major Project List ...................................................................................................................... 30
12. Major Project Approvals ........................................................................................................... 31
13. Other’s –If Any .......................................................................................................................... 32
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
1. Introduction
The purpose of this document is to furnish the detailed Material Submittal for
Design & Build of ETS Room – Aspire Main Works at Aspire Zone Foundation.
1
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
2. Specification & Compliance Statement

2.1 Compliance Statement to QCS 2014 Specification
2
Section 10: Instrumentation Control
Part 01: General
Requirement Clause Requirement Compliance Comments/ Remarks
PART-1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
This Part covers the general requirements for design, supply, installation and commissioning of all instrumentation,
Noted & Our scope is pertain to control
control and automation (ICA) systems complete in every detail as specified in the other Parts of Section 10.
Complied system
The complete ICA system, shall be furnished by a single ICA Subcontractor to ensure system uniformity, subsystem
compatibility and co-ordination of all system interfaces. Deviations shall be as specified in the Project Specification or Complied
approved by the Engineer.
1.1.2 SCOPE
Provide all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and perform all labour required to complete the supply and
installation, including all instrumentation signal and power conduit and wiring not specifically shown on the electrical
Complied
drawings, validation, start-up and commissioning of a complete and operable ICA system as indicated in the Project
Specification.
Provide all the necessary equipment components and interconnections and the services of the manufacturers, engineering
Noted&
representatives for the engineering, implementation, commissioning, operation, and instruction, to ensure that the Owner
Complied
receives a completely integrated and operational ICA system as herein specified.
Related Sections and Parts
This Section
Part 2, General Telemetry/SCADA
Part 3, Primary Elements
Part 4, Panel Mounted and Miscellaneous Field Instruments Complied
Part 5, Panel and Control Room Hardware
Section 8, Sewerage
Section 9, Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
Section 21, Electrical Works
1.1.3 REFERENCES STANDARDS
The standards referred to for Manufacturers quality procedures and documentation are: ASTM A123, A386......Galvanizing Complied
1.1.4 SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY
Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that the ICA system as specified in these ICA Parts of Section 10 is an
integrated system, and therefore shall be provided by a single competent, qualified instrumentation Subcontractor
Supply, installation and
(hereinafter referred to in these ICA Sections as the ICA subcontractor) who shall have total responsibility for the ICA
commissioning of ETS PLC
work of this Section. Entire system installation including calibration, validation, commissioning, operational
Complied control system are in solutions
testing, and training shall be performed by qualified personnel, possessing all the necessary equipment and who have had
scope.Signal provision of the
experience performing similar installations. The system shall be integrated using the most modern and proven design and
integration shall be provided.
shall, as far as practical, be of one manufacturer. Overall system performance shall be guaranteed by the ICA
Subcontractor
The Contractor shall appoint a qualified ICA Subcontractor who shall perform the work under this ICA Section, the
Contractor shall be fully responsible at all times for the conduct and performance of the appointed ICA Subcontractor.
Although many references made herein are to work requirements and responsibilities of the ICA Subcontractor such Complied
references shall only mean that responsibility shall pass through the ICA Subcontractor but in the final analysis shall rest
with the Contractor
The ICA Subcontractor shall be responsible for the correct installation of all hardware and systems specified in this ICA
Section. Certain primary elements, final control elements, etc., although provided as part of this Section, shall be
Complied
installed in the process lines under other Sections of these Specifications; however, this installation shall be under the
direct supervision of the ICA Subcontractor.
Digital Input,Analog Input

The ICA Subcontractor shall be responsible to see that all components of the instrumentation system, including primary
Analog Output and Modbus
measuring, indicating, transmitting, receiving, recording, totalising, controlling, and alarming devices and all
Complied RTU(RS-485) Modules are
appurtenances, are completely compatible and shall function as outlined and he shall furnish and install such additional
considered.4-20mA modules are
equipment, accessories, etc. as are necessary to meet
considered for analog signals
1.1.5 PRESUBMITTAL MEETING

The Contractor shall arrange a meeting between the ICA Subcontractor and the Engineer within sixty (60) days after
award of the Contract for a detailed discussion and verification of the ICA Subcontractor's system engineering methods
Complied
and equipment and to generally provide a framework for communication and co-ordination. This meeting shall be
attended by ICA Subcontractor, Contractor and the Engineer.
1.1.6 SUBMITTALS
Submittals and approvals schedule shall generally be as specified under Section 9, Part 1, Clause 1.1.4. All items
proposed for this section shall be listed. Items shall be identified by tag number, description, function, manufacturer,
model number, descriptive literature and statement as to whether items is “as specified or equivalent”. Logic diagrams Complied
and flow charts illustrating the process control philosophy, shall be provided.
Shop Drawings. Before proceeding with any manufacturing, submit shop drawings for approval in complete bound sets
indexed by specification number. Describe the items being submitted. Manufacturer's specification or data sheets shall
be clearly marked to delineate the options or styles to be furnished. Submit only complete systems, not pieces of Complied
equipment from various systems.
(a) show dimensions, physical configurations, loop diagrams and cable termination schedules
(b) submit fabrication drawings, nameplate legends, and control panel internal wiring and piping schematic drawings
clearly showing all equipment and tag numbers on all panels
Complied
(c) submit panel graphic drawings where applicable. Include material specifications lists where applicable. Include a
draft of the theory of operation for all relay or PLC logic circuits and analogue control loops
(d) Process and Instrumentation Diagrams. Prepare and submit instrumentation loop diagrams for all work included in
the ICA Sections in accordance with BS 1646.
Within 90 days from the start of the Contract, submit an "Equipment Specification Data" form for each item of equipment
which shall summarise the specification features as called for in these Specifications and include such other necessary
data as would provide a complete and adequate specification for reordering an exact duplicate of the original item from
the manufacturer at some future date. The assigned tag numbers and manufacturer's part numbers shall be included Complied
but will not be considered as a substitute for any of the required statement of specifications. More than one tag numbered
item may be included on a sheet.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Instructions. Furnish instruction manuals and part lists for instrumentation
equipment provided under the ICA sections. Obtain distribution method instructions from the Engineer.
(a) schedule. Deliver two (2) copies of manuals 60 days before commencing the Site Acceptance Tests. After
installation is complete, update the manuals to reflect any changes which occurred during installation and deliver the
remaining three copies of manuals to the Engineer immediately after the Site Acceptance Test. The manuals shall be in
English.
(b) manuals shall be contract specific, and be fully indexed and sectioned, for allocation and distribution to the
specialist staff involved on the particular plant and equipment
(c) where several sub-contractors and manufacturers have supplied equipment the Contractor shall, if required by the
Engineer provide a complete integrated manual which clearly demonstrates the inter-relation of the equipment
(d) manuals shall be provided in durable hard cover backed A4 sized loose-leaf four ring binders. Lever arch binders
are not acceptable. The full project title shall appear on the cover and spine
(e) the manuals shall enable the client to safely operate and maintain all parts of the works
(f) Original copies of leaflets and instructions provided by the specialist manufacturers shall be provided.
Superfluous information shall be clearly deleted and relevant information referred to separately in the text
(g) all instructions and manuals shall be written in accordance with BS 4884, IEC 278, and in accordance with other
recognised guidelines on technical manual writing. Complied
(h)
(vii) contents.
schematicsinclude, in the
and wiring manuals,
diagrams notcharts
or flow less than the following information, as applicable, for each
(viii) detailed circuit operational description including annotated programmable controller ladder diagrams or flow
charts
(ix) parts list and spare parts recommendations as specified in Section 9.

(x) material, test and calibration certificates
(xi) copies of final approved equipment specification data forms.
(i) format. Use drawings and pictorials to illustrate the text to the extent necessary to ensure a clear, concise
presentation. If manuals have been written to cover a family of similar instruments or equipment, strike out inapplicable
information in a neat fashion or emphasise applicable portion by heavily weighted arrows, circles or boxes; whichever
provides the clearest and neatest presentation. Where identical instruments are used in more than one control
loop or subsystem, include only one instruction manual, however, an index by tag number for all instruments shall
identify its location in that manual
(j) control loop and/or subsystem operational descriptions shall identify the function of each instrument and its
relation to the other instruments in the loop
(k) binding. Bind each manual in a cover which indicates the system name, manufacturer's name, local
address and telephone number, and year of purchase. Punch and bind manuals in standard three ring binders and include
system name and ICA Subcontractor's name on binding.
Further to the above Clause 1.1.5.4, the Contractor shall ensure that the structure of the operation and maintenance
manual meets the conditions specified in Section 1 Clause Complied
7.12.2 or otherwise agreed with the Engineer.
Record Drawings:
The Contractor shall submit complete schematics, wiring diagrams and installation drawings to include all installed field
and panel conduit and piping/tubing runs and routing, tray systems, supports, mounting details, point to point diagrams
with a cable, wire, tube and termination numbers. One copy of applicable schematics and diagrams Complied
shall be placed in each control panel in a protective envelope or binder
the above are to be supplied to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide the Owner prints of each
on thick paper and one ISO size A1 negative of each. All drawings shall be prepared on a CAD system
and printed on ISO standard sized paper A3 unless specifically requested otherwise. One set of
drawings shall also be submitted in Windows based AutoCAD System software version and storage media shall be as
approved by the Engineer. Each drawing shall be marked with the Owner‟s, Consultant‟s, Contractor‟s and Complied
manufacturer‟s names and references, drawing number, title, scales, date of completion and a full description and
date of all amendments, and shall be certified „as-built‟. The project title shall be included in a box at the bottom right
hand corner of each drawing.
ICA Subcontractor's System Validation Report. The ICA Subcontractor, shall submit a report for each control system,
panel and associated field instruments certifying that the equipment:
(a) had been properly installed under his supervision
(b) is in accurate calibration
(c) was placed in operation in his presence
(d) has been checked, inspected, calibrated and adjusted as necessary Complied
(e) has been operated under maximum power variation conditions and operated satisfactorily, and
(f) fully covered under the terms of the guarantee
This report shall indicate calculated system tolerances, data verifying that the system meets these tolerances, and any
provisional settings made to devices. Data sheets shall be similar to those used for Calibration.
Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) and Site Acceptance Test (SAT). Submit for approval at least 30 days prior to the test
demonstration, a written plan for demonstrating that each system of equipment provided under the ICA Sections
meets the specified operational requirements. The plan shall include procedures to be used in final operation testing of
entire systems including a description for each system of test methods and materials, testing instruments and recorders,
Complied
a list of the equipment involved with the functional parameters to be recorded on each item, and shop drawings of
required temporary by-passes and like facilities.
Final Acceptance Report. Submit three copies of certified test results and records. Complied
1.1.7 QUALITY STANDARDS
Qualification and Manufacturers. The ICA Subcontractor shall be an approved systems integrator, a panel fabricator, and
installer of field instruments. The ICA Subcontractor shall have a minimum of 5 years documented experience in providing
ICA equipment on a single system responsibility basis, of which at least 3 years shall be for municipal water and
wastewater pumping stations and sewage treatment works. The personnel employed for system engineering, supervision, Complied
start-up, operational testing and training shall be regular employees of the ICA Subcontractor. The ICA Subcontractor
shall be fully responsible for the technical supervision of the installation to ensure that it is proper in all respects
Certification by Single ICA Subcontractor. At the time of quoting to prospective contractors prior to tender opening, each
prospective single ICA Subcontractor shall execute and submit a written certification of intent to assume full responsibility
for the complete requirements of the ICA Section including deputation of qualified personnel for instructing operating Complied
personnel and preparing technical documentation. A certificate of compliance with the ICA specifications shall also be
provided.
Standard of Quality. Furnish equipment of the types and sizes specified which has been demonstrated to operate
successfully. Wherever, in the Project Specification and in these specifications, materials or equipment have been
specified by using the name of products or manufacturers, the term "or equal and approved" is always understood to
follow immediately. Material and equipment, so specified, has been selected as being most suitable and is regarded as a Complied
standard and is not intended to eliminate others of equal quality and performance. Workmanship for the installation of
instruments, wiring, piping, painting and labelling shall be equal to the best industrial standards for instrumentation and
control work
All equipment shall be suitable for installation and continuous services in the climatic conditions prevailing in
Qatar. Complied
All electrical equipment and materials, including their installation, shall conform to the standards specified for
each equipment, unless specified otherwise in this Section. NA
All equipment of a similar type shall be supplied from a single manufacturer to ensure common spares, operation and
maintenance procedures. Complied
1.1.8 MANUFACTURES EXPERIENCE
The ICA manufacturers shall demonstrate a successful track record of having complete similar ICA installation works. The
ICA Subcontractor shall provide a reference list from the instrumentation manufacturers for having installed and Complied
commissioned instruments operating under process and ambient conditions similar to the specified works.
1.1.9 FACTORY INSPECTION
Factory Inspection. The Engineer or his representative may inspect fabricated equipment at the factory. Notify the
Engineer at least 30 days prior to shipment, so that factory inspection can be arranged. Factory inspection shall be made
only after manufacturer has performed satisfactory checks, adjustments, tests and operations. Tests shall be made using Complied
simulated inputs and output loads. Approval of equipment at the factory only allows the manufacturer to ship the
equipment to the site, and does not constitute final acceptance by the Engineer
The Engineer reserves the right to inspect the ICA equipment at the factory. The Engineer will indicate on return of the
Complied
approved submittal, each item requiring factory inspection.
1.1.10 FACTORY TESTS AND TEST CERTIFICATES
Factory test carried out for primary elements shall include pressure and calibration tests Certificates shall be provided
for pressure test, calibration test and conformity to specifications. Material certificates shall be furnished if it is so Complied
specified.
Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) shall be carried out for the control and automation equipment such as control panels. FAT
procedure shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. FAT based on the approved test procedure shall be witnessed Complied
by the Engineer or his authorized representative at expense of the Contractor.
If after examining or testing any equipment the Engineer, or his representative, shall decide that such equipment or any
part thereof is defective or, not in accordance with the specification, he may reject the said equipment or part thereof. He
Complied
shall notify the Contractor in writing within 7 calendar days of the rejection, stating the grounds on which the rejection is
based.
1.1.11 SHIPMENT, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Box, crate, or otherwise enclose and protect instruments and equipment during shipment, handling, and storage. Keep
all equipment dry and covered from exposure to weather, moisture, corrosive liquids, and gases or any element which
Complied
could degrade the equipment. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Repair
any damage or replace defective equipment, as directed and approved by the Engineer.
1.1.12 GUARANTEE
1 The Contractor shall provide a guarantee during the maintenance period for all the equipment in accordance with the
Complied
General Conditions of the Contract.
2 Equipment warranty shall cover defects in materials or workmanship for 400 days from date of satisfactory completion
Complied
of Site performance test and issue of Practical Completion Certificate.
3 Individual warranties by component manufacturer in lieu of single source responsibility shall not be acceptable. Complied
4 Items which fail during the warranty period, excluding expendable items, shall be replaced without cost to the Owner.
Complied
1.1.13 JOB CONDITIONS

Drawings are diagrammatic and show the intended arrangement for system operation, piping, and appurtenances.
Conform to Drawings as closely as possible and exercise care to secure neat arrangement of piping, valves, conduit,
Complied
and like items, and to overcome structural interferences. Verify dimensions and conditions at the place of work, and
install materials and equipment in the available spaces.
1.1.14 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
The ICA equipment shall be provided by approved, prequalified system manufacturers and suppliers designated in the
Complied
Project Specification.
1.1.15 APPROVED INSTALLATION SUBCONTRACTORS
Installation Subcontractor shall be approved, prequalified and designated in the Project
Specification. Complied
1.1.16 SPARE PARTS & TOOLS
1 Furnish the following items as specified herein. Provide the Engineer, with an itemised list in a letter of transmittal
accompanying each shipment.
2 Special Tools and Accessories. Furnish special tools, instruments, and accessories for maintaining instruments and
equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment as specified elsewhere in this Section. Also, furnish special lifting and
handling devices for equipment requiring such devices.
3 Maintenance Materials and Spare Parts. Deliver in manufacturer's original containers labelled to completely
describe contents and equipment for which it is furnished.
4 Spare parts shall be sufficient for 2 years of normal service from completion of the maintenance period, and
shall include, as a minimum, the following basic items: Complied as Recommended Spare Parts List
Noted Shall be provided.
(a) five (5) percent but not less than one (1) minimum of each type of plug-in unit, etched or printed circuit board
assembly
(b) ten (10) percent but not less than one (1) of each type relay and timer used
(c) ten (10) percent but not less than one (1) of each type switch used
(d) twenty (20) percent but not less than ten (10) of each type light bulb and fuse used
(e) 2 years supply of expendable items, diskettes, toner cartridges etc.
1.1.17 SOFTWARE
Development of the logic and
The ICA Subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining all software user licences for development and runtime systems
HMI Screen will be in ICA
as necessary. Application software written specifically for the Owner under this contract shall remain the property of the Complied as
subcontractor scope.HMI
Owner and shall not be disclosed, copied or distributed at any time to a third party without the Owners explicit written Noted
module deos not required the
consent.
runtime license.
1.2 PRODUCTS
1.2.1 MATERIALS
The ICA Subcontractor shall provide instruments, equipment and materials suitable for service conditions and meeting
the appropriate British Standards. The intent of this Specification is to secure instruments and equipment of a uniform
quality and manufacture throughout the plant; i.e., all instruments in the site, i.e., all instruments supplied by the ICA Complied
Subcontractor, of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer. This allows the stocking of the minimum number of
spare parts.
1.2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FABRICATIONS
The ICA Subcontractor shall design all fabrications for dynamic and vibratory loading. Use structural steel shapes
conforming to ASTM A36, A500, A501, A570, A618, or equal and approved, as applicable. Conform welding to AWS D2.0
Code. Galvanize specific items in accordance with ASTM A123 or A386 as applicable; use galvanized bolts and fasteners NA
with galvanized assemblies. Use minimum 6 mm thickness for steel entirely or partially submerged during
equipment operation. Submit design calculations showing adequate structural integrity for the intended purpose.
1.2.3 MOUNTINGS
1. The ICA Subcontractor shall mount and install equipment as indicated in the Project Specification. Where not
shown, mount site instruments according to best standard practice on pipe mounts, pedestal mounts, or other similar
Complied
means in accordance with suppliers recommendation. Where mounted in control panels, mount according to
requirements of Part 4 of this Section.
2. Equipment specified for Site mounting shall be suitable for direct pipe mounting, pedestal
mounting, or surface mounting and non in-line indicators and equipment with calibration
adjustments or requiring periodic inspection shall be mounted not lower than 900 mm nor higher
than 1500 mm above walkways, platforms, catwalks, etc. so as to provide easy access. All such
equipment shall be weather and splash proof, and electrical equipment shall be in IP 66 NA
enclosures. External equipment shall be protected from direct sunlight by a well ventilated cabinet,
canopy or other type of sunshade. If mounted in a designated hazardous area, the equipment shall
be explosion proof or rated intrinsically safe, whether so specified herein or not.
3. The equipment shall be guaranteed suitable for operation under the climatic conditions specified
and shall be designed:-
a. such that routine and occasional maintenance throughout its life shall be a practical minimum Complied
compatible with the preservation of maximum reliability
b. to withstand the electrical, mechanical, thermal and atmospheric stresses to which it may be
Complied
subjected under operational conditions, without deterioration or failure
c. constructed to the highest available standards of manufacture, reliability, accuracy and
Complied
repeatability
d. the degree of protection for equipment enclosures shall be in accordance with BS EN 60529 Complied
4. Provide protection from direct sun light for all ICA equipment installed outdoors. NA
1.2.4 INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION
Instrument Identification: All instrumentation and equipment items or systems specified in the
Project Specification shall be identified by system and tag numbers. This same number shall
appear in the tag number designations on the Drawings and on the schedules of the Project
Specification. Nameplates for panels and panel mounted equipment shall be as shall be black
lamacoid with engraved white characters. Field equipment shall be tagged with assigned
instrumentation tag number and function. Tags shall be black lamacoid with engraved white
characters of 5 mm minimum height. Tags shall be attached to equipment with a commercial
tag holder using a stainless steel band with a worm screw clamping device or by a holder Complied
fabricated with standard hose clamps and meeting the same description. In some cases where
this would be impractical, use 0.5 mm2 stainless steel wires. For field panels or large
equipment cases use stainless steel screws, however, such permanent attachment shall not be
on an ordinarily replaceable part. In all cases the tag shall be plainly visible to a standing
observer. In addition to tags, field mounted control stations, recorders or indicators shall have
a nameplate indicating their function and the variable controlled or displayed. Nameplate shall
be attached by one of the above methods.
1.2.5 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
Electronic Equipment: If the equipment is electronic in nature, provide solid state equipment
to the extent practicable. Select components of construction for their suitability and reliability.
Employ adequate component derating to preclude failures because of transients and
Complied
momentary overloads reasonably expected in normal operation. Provide units for operation
without forced cooling, unless such cooling is an integral part of the device. Provide protection
on all relevant circuits and equipment against the effects of lightning and other induced voltages.
1.2.6 EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS
1. All equipment shall be rated for normal operating performance with varying operating conditions over the
following minimum ranges. Complied
2 Power:
(a) electrical. 240 V a.c. ± 5 %, 50 Hz ± 1 Hz except where specifically stated otherwise on the drawings or in the Complied
specifications
(b) air. 1.4 bars.
3 Field Instruments:
(a) all the ICA equipment supplied shall be suitable for operation in the tropical climate prevalent in Qatar. All ICA
equipment shall be designed and constructed to operate satisfactorily and without any deleterious effect for prolonged
Complied
and continuous periods at the following maximum ambient temperature conditions:
(i) indoors in normally air-conditioned environment - 50 oC
(ii) indoors in a ventilated environment - 55 oC
(iii) outdoors under direct sunlight - 85 oC
1.2.7 POWER SUPPLIES
1 The ICA Subcontractor shall provide electrical instruments, transmitter power supplies and control devices for operation UPS is considered for the PLC
on 110 V a.c., 50 Hz. Transmitter power supplies shall be provided for individual transmitters. Where designated in the control system.230 V AC power
Project Specification, process critical instruments shall receive power from a UPS, as specified in Section 21. supply is considered for the
Complied as
Flow Meter and Energy
Noted
Calculator. Supply for PICV UPS
power shall be provided by Main
contractor
1.2.8 Signal Isolators, Converters and Conditioners
The ICA Subcontractor shall ensure that input-output signals of all instruments and control devices (whether supplied
by the ICA Subcontractor or not) are compatible. Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specification, signals
between field and panels shall be volt free contacts or 4 to 20 mAdc, unless specifically approved otherwise. Granting
Complied
such approval does not relieve the ICA Subcontractor from the compatibility requirement above. Provide signal isolators
and converters as necessary to obtain the required system performance. Mount the devices behind control panels or
in the Site at the point of application.
1.2.9 Auxiliary Contacts by Others
The ICA Subcontractor shall provide instruments and equipment to interface with auxiliary contacts provided under other
Contracts, for alarms, status of equipment, interlocking, and other functions as indicated and as specified in Project Complied
Specification.
1.2.10 Air Supply Valves
The ICA Subcontractor shall provide 316S12 valves for instrument air supply shutoff, regulating, switching,
metering, valve manifolds, etc. Provide a separate isolation valve for each instrument or actuator feed line. NA
1.2.11 Instrument Piping

The ICA Subcontractor shall provide instrument air header and instrument pneumatic piping, as specified in the Project
Specifications and as necessary and/or as specified herein. Connect to main instrument air header at a point not more
than 3 m distant from air consuming device(s). Use 10 mm minimum 316S12 tubing. All connections to equipment
NA
shall be made with separable or union type fittings and shall include shut-off valves. All hydraulic and/or pneumatic
piping shall be tested for leaks prior to placing the system in operation. All instrument pneumatic air fittings, shall be
double compression type.
1.2.12 Filter Regulator
The ICA Subcontractor shall provide a filter-regulator and discharge pressure gauge with a dripwell assembly for each
NA
point of use where regulated instrument air is required. Separate regulators shall be used for each control loop.
1.2.13 Manifolds
The ICA Subcontractor shall furnish an integral three-valve manifold for each differential pressure transmitter on a flow
application. Complied
1.2.14 Painting and Protective Coatings

The ICA Subcontractor shall provide factory paint for all instruments and equipment except where in pipelines. Provide
paint as required for structural supports, brackets, etc. Painting and protective coatings shall generally comply with the Complied
requirements specified in Part 8 of Section 8.
1.2.15 Electrical
The ICA Subcontractor shall provide all the power supply wiring, instrumentation wiring, interconnecting wiring and
Complied
equipment grounding as indicated, specified and required
Wiring installations shall include cables, conductors, terminals connectors, wire markers, conduits, conduit fittings,
supports, hardware and all other required materials not specifically included in the work of other Sections. Complied
Provide the materials and complete all the required installations for equipment grounding as specified in Section 21 of
these Specifications indicated on the Electrical Drawings or necessary to complete the Work. Complied
Incidental items, not specifically included in the Contract Documents, that can legitimately and reasonably be inferred to
belong to the instrumentation work shall be provided by the ICA Subcontractor. NA
Field Wiring. Ring out signal wiring prior to termination. Provide wire number tags marked in indelible waterproof form of
slip-on type or equal for each termination. Provide preinsulated crimp-on connectors for wire terminations and splices.
Use ratchet type crimping tool which does not release until proper crimp pressure has been applied. NA
1.2.16 Process Connections

Piping, tubing, and capillary tubing shall be of stainless steel. If this material is unsuitable for ambient or process
conditions, piping and tubing shall be of a material approved by the Engineer. Slope lines according to service to promote
self draining or venting back to the process. Terminate connection to process lines or vessels in a service rated block
valve, that will permit closing off the sense line or removal of the element without requiring shut down of the process.
Include drip legs and blow-down valves for terminations of sense lines at the instruments when mounted such that Complied
condensation can accumulate. Process vessels, line penetrations, connecting fittings, and block valves shall be furnished
and installed under other Sections of these Specifications but coordinated by the ICA Parts. Instrument process taps shall
be a minimum 18 mm BSP except flowmeter taps which shall be 12 mm BSP
1.3 INSTALLATION
1.3.1 Inspection
Inspect each instrument and piece of equipment for damage, defects, completeness, and correct operation before
installing. Inspect previously installed related work and verify that it is ready for installation of instruments and Complied
equipment.
1.3.2 Preparation of Installation Areas
Ensure that installation areas are clean and that concrete or masonry operations are completed prior to installing
Noted
instruments and equipment. Maintain the areas in a clean condition during installation operations.
1.3.3 Installation and Supervision

Provide the services of suitably trained and experienced personnel in the installation of the equipment to:
(a) complete the installation in accordance with the manufacturers instruction manual
Factory Calibration certificate
Complied as will be submitted. Calibration is
(b) inspect, check, adjust as necessary, and prepare the equipment for system validation
Noted not in System Integrator's
Scope of work.
(c) calibrate the instruments, in accordance with the specifications herein, until all trouble or defects are corrected and
the installation and operation are acceptable
1.3.4 Instrument Calibration
The Contractor shall provide the services of trained and experienced instrumentation technicians, tools and
equipment to site calibrate each instrument to its specified accuracy in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications NA
and instructions for calibration.
Each instrument shall be calibrated at 10 percent, 50 percent and 90 percent of span using test instruments to simulate
inputs and read outputs that are rated to an accuracy of at least NA
5 times greater than the specified accuracy of the instrument being calibrated.
Test instruments shall hold a valid calibration certificate from a NAMAS accredited calibration centre or alternative,
NA
subject to the approval of the Engineer
Provide a list and basic specifications for instruments used. Certify to the Engineer that each instrument has been
calibrated to its published specified accuracy. The calibration certificate shall include all applicable data as listed below
plus any defects noted, correction action required, and correction made. Data shall be recorded on separate proformas
attached to the certificate and shall include not less than the following items:
(a) facility identification (name, location, etc.)
(b) loop identification (name or function)
(c) equipment tag and serial numbers
(d) scale ranges and units (e) test mode or type of test NA
(f) input values or settings
(g) expected outputs and tolerances
(h) actual readings
(i) explanations or special notes as applicable
(j) tester's certification with name and signature

1.3.5 System Validation
Provide the services of trained and field experienced instrumentation engineer(s) to validate each system to verify that
each system is operational and performing its intended function within system tolerance. System tolerance is defined as Complied
the root-mean-square sum of the system component published specified accuracies from input to output.
Validate each system by simulating inputs at the first element in loop (i.e. sensor) of 10 percent, 50 percent and 90
percent of span, or on/off and verifying loop output devices (i.e. recorder, indicator, alarm, etc. except controllers).
During system validation, make provisional settings on levels, alarms, etc. Verify controllers by observing that the Complied
final control element moves in the proper direction to correct the process variable as compared to the set point. Verify
that all logic sequences operate in accordance with the specifications
Cause malfunctions to sound alarms or switch to standby to check system operation. Check all systems thoroughly for
Complied
correct operation. Test equipment shall comply with Clause 1.3.4
Immediately correct all defects and malfunctions‟ disclosed by tests. Use new parts and
materials as required and retest. Complied
System validation report. Provide a report certifying completion of validation of each instrument system. Complied
1.3.6 Commissioning
Upon completion of instrument calibration and system validation, test all systems under process conditions. The intent
of this test is to demonstrate and verify the operational interrelationship of the instrumentation systems. This testing
Complied
shall include, but not be limited to, all specified operational modes, taking process variables to their limits (simulated or
process) to verify all alarms, failure interlocks, and operational interlocks between systems and/or mechanical equipment
1.3.7 Final Acceptance
Final acceptance report. Immediately correct defects and malfunctions with approved methods and materials in
each case and repeat the testing. Upon completion of final operational testing, submit certified report, with
Complied
substantiating data sheets, indicating that total ICA System meets all the functional requirements specified herein. The
Engineer will countersign this report and it shall constitute final acceptance of the ICA System.
Final Operational Testing shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing a minimum of
48 h prior to the proposed date for commencing the test. Upon completion of this test the Contractor shall begin or have Complied
begun system start-up. The Owner reserves the right to set the schedule.
1.3.8 Commissioning Assistance
When specified elsewhere in this section or designed in the Project Specification, provide the services of a factory trained
and field experienced instrumentation engineer to assist the Owner‟s personnel during commissioning of the system. Complied
Purpose of this assistance is to support in making final adjustments of settings on the instrument systems.
1.3.9 Instruction and Training of The Owner's Personnel
After the ICA equipment has been calibrated, installed, tested and placed in satisfactory operation the Contractor shall
provide the services of qualified staff approved by the Engineer, or if specified in the Project Specification, of the
manufacturer‟s representatives, to instruct and train the Owner‟s personnel in the use and maintenance of the ICA
equipment. An instruction and training programme shall be conducted for up to six personnel designated by the Owner.
The Contractor shall give the Owner at least one month‟s written notice of the proposed instruction and training
Complied
programme. Instruction and training covering basic system operation theory, routine maintenance and repair, and “hands
on” operation of the ICA equipment shall be included. Each trainee shall be provided with a training manual covering
operation and maintenance of the ICA equipment. The duration of the programme shall be based on the complexity of
equipment involved, and the Engineer‟s approval of instruction adequacy obtained before terminating the programme.
Instruction and training periods shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
1.3.10 Specialised Training Programme for Owner’s Personnel

Where designated in the Project Specification the Contractor shall provide a specialised training programme and manual
for the Owner‟s key personnel in the equipment, electrical systems and instrumentation systems, to be conducted by the
supplier/manufacturer and held at locations outside Qatar. The training programme and manual shall be submitted to the
Owner for approval and shall be designed to:
(a) provide in depth information and familiarisation of the equipment installed in the Complied
Project
(b) receive specialised training in the design, proper operation, maintenance and replacement of the equipment
and components
The Contractor shall provide whatever assistance is requested by the Owner to develop meaningful itineraries for the
training programme. The Contractor shall provide hotel accommodation, travelling expenses by air, land transport and Complied
per diem allowance as per the Ministry of Education guidelines.
END OF PART
Section 10: Instrumentation Control and Automation
Part 02: Telemetry/SCADA
PART-2 TELEMETRY/SCADA
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 SCOPE
This Part includes the hardware manufacture, system software, factory testing, installation, site testing and training of
Owner‟s personnel in Telemetry/SCADA Complied
This Section
Part 1, General Complied
Part 4, Panel Mounted and Miscellaneous Field Instruments
Part 5, Panels and Control Room Hardware
2.1.2 References
1. The following standards are referred to in this Part:
BS 1646......................Symbolic representation for process measurement control functions and instrumentation.

BS EN 60073..............Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identification. Coding
principles for indicators and actuators
BS EN 60255-22-5 .....Surge protection Complied
BS EN 61000-6 ..........Electromagnetic Compatibility
BS EN 61131-3 ..........Programming Languages for Programmable Controllers.
BS EN ISO 9000-3 .....Recommendation for achievement of quality in software
BS ISO/IEC 6592 .......Documentation of computer based systems
BS ISO/IEC 9075 .......Structured Query Language (SQL)
ISO 3511 ....................Process measurement control functions - instrumentation symbolic representation
2.1.3 Submittals
Submittals shall generally be in accordance with Part 1 of this Section. Complied
Functional Design Specification (FDS). FDS shall be submitted to the Engineer and approved before manufacture
and purchasing commences. The ICA Subcontractor shall include the following information as a minimum :
(a) design concept and criteria
(a) details of associated equipment
(b) functional design description including VDU mimics and report format.
(c) details of data archiving and trend configuration.
(d) quality plan
Complied
(e) outline of acceptance test procedures
(f) implementation program for manufacture, installation and commissioning with Particular
reference to interface with existing equipment
(g) manufacturers literature for each item of equipment supplied
(h) name of the specialist Subcontractor
Drawings and Documentation. All drawings of telemetry and ICA equipment shall be on A3 or A4 size sheets with title
blocks approved by the Engineer. The signature of the Contractors authorised representative shall appear on each Complied
drawing to indicate the drawing has been checked prior to submission.
Subcontractor‟s Drawings. The ICA Subcontractor shall submit four (4) reproducible copies plus two photocopies of
general and detailed dimensioned arrangement drawings, schematics and wiring diagrams of all major items of
equipment for the Engineer‟s approval. Manufacture of an item of equipment shall not commence until the associated
drawings have been approved in writing by the Engineer. All modifications or revisions to drawings shall be clearly
indicated and the revision reference changed. Drawings affecting work by other disciplines shall be provided to the
Engineer within 6 weeks from the date of placing of the order for the works. Drawings for electrical equipment shall
include:
(a) Contractor‟s general arrangement drawings for all items showing clearly the position of all cable glands and main
components including, where appropriate, foundation plans showing the position of all required holes and cutouts
(b) manufacturers‟ schematic diagrams and connection diagrams for all items showing all internal wiring and
terminal connections suitably referenced. Connection diagrams shall include existing and proposed outgoing cable
connections Complied
(c) general layout of equipment showing cable routing
(d) block diagram showing all equipment, cable runs and cable reference numbers
(e) cable schedules giving full details of use, destinations, size and number of conductors, grade and class
(f) layout of grounding facilities
(g) proposed arrangements for cables laid below and above ground showing identification references, voltage,
depth of laying or cable rack size , route and length, crossings with other services, location of any joints and position of
ducts with cross Sectional arrangements.
Where modifications to existing systems are involved, the Contractor shall modify existing drawings to show the
modifications. If suitable existing drawings are not available the Contractor shall provide drawings showing the
modifications
As built Drawings. Comply with Part 1 of this Section Complied
Instruction Manuals. Comply with Part 1 of this Section and provide the following additional information:
(a) configuration of data base, reports, logs and screen displays Complied
(b) data communication interface standards and protocols.
The submittal shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit the final documentation based on
the Engineer‟s comments. The Engineer‟s comments/approval shall be issued to the Contractor within 21 calendar days Complied
of the submittal.
2.1.4 Quality Assurance

All hardware and software proposed shall have been successfully proven in a similar wastewater application for a
period of at least three years, and be from established and reputable suppliers. A single hardware vendor for each
Complied
functional component of the system shall be used exclusively on a given site. If this is not possible full compatibility
shall be demonstrated.
Upgrades and improvements to the manufacturers standard system that are released before the expiration of the
warranty period shall be supplied, installed and commissioned at no additional cost. These shall include all hardware and Complied
software necessary to implement the upgrade.
2.1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling
Complied as Off loading & site storage by the
The Contractor shall arrange for the delivery to Site, off loading, temporary storage in a suitable environment.
noted Main Contractor
2.1.6 Site Conditions
Temperature and Humidity Range. The equipment shall be installed in an environment having a temperature range of 0
°C to 55 °C and a maximum relative humidity of 100 % (non condensing). The Contractor shall use, where required,
fans, heaters, and air conditioning units to maintain a correct working temperature for his equipment. All Parts of the
equipment shall be constructed of materials or treated to prevent the formation of mould, fungus or any corrosion over
the temperature and relative humidity ranges specified.
EMI/RFI Noise Immunity. The equipment to be provided shall be adequately protected against interference from the use
of the radio transmitters, at any point external to the equipment housings, and no malfunction of the equipment shall
result from this cause. Responsibility for the correct and reliable operation of the equipment shall rest with the
Contractor, who must ensure that the equipment is adequately protected against the ingress of radiated, mains-borne
signal-borne interference
Complied
Generated Interference. The Contractor shall ensure that the computer, instrumentation and communications equipment
conforms to BS EN 50081-1 for noise emissions.
Sequencing. The Contractor shall make applications to Qatar Telecom (Q-TEL) for provision of communications and Qatar
General Electricity & Water Corporation (QGEWC) for power supply services. Applications shall be made in time`qw to
ensure services are available for installation and commissioning of the telemetry equipment
Coordination. The Contractor shall check with other trades to ensure equipment and material can be installed in space
provided. Provide other trades with information necessary for them to execute their work. Details on Drawings which are
specific regarding dimensions and locations, are for information purposes. Coordinate with other trades to ensure work
can be installed as indicated.
2.1.7 Commissioning
The Contractor, the Engineer and any appropriate personnel of the Owner shall be present when the equipment or
Complied
installation is commissioned.
Commissioning shall include operating the equipment in a variety of modes and sequences to prove its satisfactory
Complied
operation, prior to initialising the formal site inspection and testing
2.2 DESIGN
2.2.1 Pre-Design Documentation
Prior to design of the system the following documentation shall be submitted: (a) operational functional requirements
including MIS functional description;
(b) process description, including interlocks and alarms;
(c) process flow diagrams (PFDs)
(d) process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) (e) SCADA I/Os data base (Instrument data base) (f) Complied
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) listing
(g) process control strategies
(h) process monitoring requirements (manual & automatic)
2.2.2 Hardware Design
Programmable logic controllers shall be used as the basic SCADA hardware. Complied
PLCs shall be installed at strategic locations throughout the plant areas to make optimal use of the LAN and to minimize
hardwiring of I/O‟s. Man machine interfaces (MMIs) shall be strategically located and installed within each nominated
Complied
process area. These installations shall form the nodes of a supervisory and distributed control and monitoring system
PLC nodes and MMI nodes shall be connected via the selected PLC/network communication system to form a Local Area
Complied
Network (LAN) for the site
Loss of the communication shall not impact on the internal control strategy Complied
All system shall be capable of redundant communication. The failure of either of these links shall not result in loss of
Complied as FO port for the communication
system communication functionality and response. The failure shall cause an alarm to the operator and to remote
Noted shall be provided
monitoring systems where required
Plant areas and functional groups shall not be split across PLC‟s unless reliability benefits are demonstrated. Any PLCs
Complied
failure shall not interfere with more than a maximum of one plant area.
Investigation of the surrounding environment (physical and other hardware components) shall be conducted for all
Complied
hardware components to optimize components‟ selection and location for the site
All PLCs shall be programmable via the SCADA network. Complied
For retrofit installations, PLCs used to replace conventional hard-wired process system control/starter controls shall be
Complied
compatible to existing SCADA system and standards.
2.2.3 Software Design
PLCs software shall support higher-level languages such as ladder logic or any other language (Function Block
Complied
concept etc) and should comply with the intent of relevant British Standard and International Standards.
Machine coded program segment shall not be offered nor accepted as solutions for control implementation Complied
Higher-level programming shall be in structured English statements Complied
Communication protocols shall be able to communication with PLC manufacturer‟s

Complied
equipment currently in use and any new PLCs
Application software shall be selected from packages with ample support and market base, proven in the industrial field to
which it is applied. They shall have adequate local resources for support and program development. Provision for
Complied
automatic upgrade from the delivered versions and future versions of software for a period of up to five years after
delivery, shall be included in the base contract.
Application software shall provide information in a clear and simple manner, at both summary and details levels. This
information shall include plant operational status, and the ability to adjust and optimize readily start/stop or isolate the
Complied
plant processes or individual items of equipment. The specific control actions required shall be as described in the
functional requirements
The system shall have provisions for an operator to intervene or select alternative predefined control strategies Complied
The software shall allow data exchange and have software to allow external application software developers to add-on to
Complied
the functionality of the software
The system shall be capable of providing additional parts for communication with the following
(a) Existing SCADA systems
Complied as Modbus RTU considered for the
(b) Radio modem where specified in the contract documents
noted Third Party instruments.
(c) Existing RTUs
(d) Future business management systems
No degradation of the plant SCADA system response times shall occur because of overhead imposed on the SCADA
Complied
operating system as a result of these interfaces
2.2.4 System Security
1 All access to the system shall be via password for operator access control functions and system configuration. A
Complied
minimum of two-step multi-level security shall be used. An automatic timed log-out shall be provided
2 Supplementary hardware-type security shall be provided where indicated in the contract documents.. NA
3 An automatic timed log-out shall be provided. Timing configuration for the log-out shall be adjustable and
Complied
determinable by the site‟s needs
4 External access to the system shall be secured in such methods as dial-back and encryption NA
5 All disk used in the system shall have scanned (including the data) labels and shall have virus protection maintenance
NA
schedules
6 The SCADA software shall provide for „Console Mode Assignment‟ features, giving the plant operational team the ability
to limit the use of the MMIs to specific levels of control and monitoring as required. NA
7 Interfaces with external systems shall be on a read-only basis. Complied

2.2.5 Operator Interface
1 Number and location of MMIs and input devices such as touch screens or keyboards shall be determined depending on
Complied
plant production needs. Full control and monitoring capability shall be available at each screen.
2 There shall be no single point of failure, i.e. the failure of one screen or its associated hardware will not compromise the
Complied
integrity of other MMIs.
3 The failure of any one screen or its associated hardware shall not compromise the integrity of other MMIs. Complied
4 For services plants a minimum one printer shall be provided for alarms/operator‟s actions.
The use of the printer shall be minimized and all alarms and operator records shall be electronically stored and shall be
periodically (and as required) printed in reporting format. NA
An additional printer shall be provided as required to satisfy report generation needs. At least one colour printer shall be
provided for serviced sites.
Process Alarm Shall be

5 MMIs shall provide a focus for such activities as alarm reports generation, events logging and the archiving of historical
Complied as generated in the MMI.Report
data. Where it can be justified operationally, remote MMI may also be installed in area equipment rooms for the control
Noted ,Events & Historical Data is the
of adjacent systems and plant items
part of SCADA programing
Report Generation is the part of

6 Where the MMI is used in an office environment, it shall be capable of generating business reports using commonly Complied as Central SCADA
used packages and shall have access to printer via LAN. Noted programming.Not in ETS system
Integrator Scope.
7 For plants with permanent staffing besides MMI, a programming console shall be provide for on-line system
NA
modifications and maintenance without disruptions to production activities.
8 For unattended (remote) plants provisions shall be made for the connection of a portable programming console and
NA
printing facility.
9 The system shall be designed so that data input shall be collected/entered only once and shall be accessible for various
Complied as Report Generation is the part of
business reports. It shall also be capable of sharing this data with external computing systems as required, to provide
Noted Central SCADA programming.
the necessary plant information to other applications in an accurate and timely manner.
10 The Plant operator/Management shall be able to access the plant from remote sites through dial-up or secured
Internet laptop MMI. Critical alarms shall be reported to the central control room as required for any emergency response Complied
during after hours.
11 A standard library of interface screens, graphics, symbols and colours shall be utilized to create uniformity between
Complied
systems. This shall be in accordance with BS 1646, BS EN 60073 unless otherwise stated in the contract documents
2.3 MASTER STATION HARDWARE
2.3.1 Computer
1. The SCADA computer shall be an Industrial type PC (personal computer) of server / workstation category
running multitasking real time operating system suitable for process control operations. These PCs shall have RAID1
implementation of mirroring and controller duplexing. . The PC shall be latest one available in the market. Unless
NA
otherwise specified in the project specification ,PC shall be minimum Intel core i7 processors with 6GB RAM ,1
Terabyte Hard disk, DVD R/W ,Sound cards and speakers ,2 numbers. Integrated 3 COM
10/100/1000 Ethernet Network Cards with other serial, USB, parallel ports, Keyboard and mouse
2. The system shall support hardware and software interconnectivity to Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) over RS
232/RS485 serial link or Ethernet over fibre/copper media using appropriate protocols, or similar, subject to the approval NA
of the Engineer
The memory capacity supplied shall be sized to accommodate an increase in inputs, outputs or Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC) of up to 50% of the original specified without replacement of the memory unit. Further memory NA
expansion shall be possible. The Contractor shall state the maximum memory capacity that may be fitted
Local HMI (Panel Mounted)
The local HMI (panel mounted) shall be an industrial type PC of server / workstation category running multitasking real
time operating system suitable for process control operations as specified in clause -2.3.1 except RAID1 implementation, NA
unless otherwise specified in the project specification
2.3.2 Redundancy
The master station shall be supplied with dual redundant computer equipment and suitable software to ensure high
system availability and to prevent loss of operational data. NA
2.3.4 Visual Display Unit (VDU)

Visual Display Units (VDU‟s) shall be 22 inch colour monitor screens unless otherwise stated, capable of displaying
information in alphanumeric, bar histogram, graphical.. The TFT shall be color monitor with a 256-color palette as
minimum and shall have the ability of displaying mixed alphanumeric/semi graphical information. TFT shall be capable of
high resolution graphic displays non - interlaced, low radiation, flat screen with no discernible flicker. Display of
NA
characters shall be legible and stable on a shadow mask tube, having a resolution of not less than 1024 by 768 pixels and
a refresh rate of not less than 70 Hz.The units shall include all the necessary picture controls to adjust the sharpness,
contrast and position of the image. The VDU shall have non-volatile memory of 2MB minimum. The VDU shall be
industrial type.
Control room VDU‟s (Monitor) shall be 22inch and VDU‟s for local HMI at other locations Complied as HMI shall be provided as per the
(PLC panel), shall be 17 inch minimum size Noted project requirement
.VDU‟s shall be fitted with a power management system to reduce consumption upon
NA
detection of a stand-by signal from the PC
2.3.4 Keyboard
The master station keyboards shall be of an enhanced pattern personal computer (PC) keyboard, separate from the VDU,
NA
low profile and have non-reflecting surfaces and keys of low intensity to minimise unwanted reflections.
2.3.5 Logging / Alarm / Report Printers - Continuous Feed

Printers used for logging of system wide events and alarms shall comply with the following:-
(a) print speed : 160 characters per second

(b) print quality : letter print with optional draft mode
(c) paper feed : adjustable width tractor feed mechanism
NA
(d) paper width : 18 to 38 cm fan fold
(e) print pitch : 10 or 12 cpi
(f) print width : 132 characters at 10 cpi
(g) character set : Full ASCII
2.3.6 Colour Printers
1. Laser printers shall be used for the production of colour screen dumps and reports and shall have a sufficiently sized
buffer memory such that system performance will not be degraded when the colour printer is operational and comply with
the following:
(a) print speed : text, 80 characters per second

(b) print speed : colour graphics, 2 minutes per page full
(c) colours : compatible with VDU graphics NA
(d) paper feed : A3 and A4 with auto sheet feeder mechanism and minimum 50 sheets per tray
(e) paper width : A4/A3
(f) resolution : 600 DPI (g) RAM : 8 MB
2.3.7 Monochrome Printers (Laser)

These printers shall comply with the following:
(a) print Speed : 8 pages per minute
(b) paper feed : A4 with auto sheet feeder mechanism and minimum 250 sheet paper tray.
(c) resolution : 600 DPI
NA
(d) character set : full ASCII
(e) RAM : 4 MB
2.3.8 Audible Alarm

An audible alarm located on the control desk, shall be provided which is initiated by any fault condition arising and
silenced on operator acceptance of all fault conditions. An alarm mute function shall be provided to silence the audible
NA
alarm without accepting any fault conditions. It shall be possible to enable/disable this audible alarm only at the highest
system access level
Use of the internal PC audible alarm will not be acceptable. NA
2.3.9 Data Strorage
1. Provide a historical data storage system with removable media for archive and backup NA
2. The data storage system shall store alarms and events, with the time of occurrence for one month and selected
analogue signals connected to the system. All alarms and events shall be archived in a first in first out buffer, for a period NA
of 40 days
3. A high speed back up device with removable media, such as streaming tape cartridge or optical disk, shall be
provided for each server, suitable for backing up the whole system on a weekly basist. NA
4 Data selected for archive shall be written to removable media which shall be sized to support at least 180 days worth of
archive data. The archive media also shall be sized to store logged analogue data, at a maximum sample rate of 15 min NA
for a period of 15 months
2.3.10 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System
1. The Contractor shall supply a UPS system with sufficient capacity to maintain power to the computer equipment, its
Complied as UPS Shall be provided as per
peripherals and process critical instrumentation during a mains power failure for a minimum period of 8 hours. Refer to
Noted the project specification
Section 21, Part 18 Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems more detailed specification .
2. In the event of power failure, the master central system shall be supported by the UPS NA
3. The central system equipment shall be programmed to degrade gracefully once UPS power is exhausted or execute a
NA
shutdown routine after a preset time from the original mains failure.
4. The UPS systems shall be monitored by the SCADA and a fault in the UPS system shall be accorded the highest Complied as UPS failure signal shall be
priority alarm status. Noted provided to SCADA.
5. The FDS shall detail modes of failure and process shutdowns and itemise signals to be supported by UPS. NA
6. Power distribution from the UPS in the control room area shall be via protected sockets, the design of which will be
NA
such as to prevent inadvertent connections of non-system hardware.
2.4 MASTER STATION SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS
2.4.1 General
The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying complete software packages to enable the equipment to operate as
stated in this specification. Provision must be made for the adding of further software tasks as and when required. All
software functions shall be user friendly with instruction and messages to aid the operator. The Contractor shall make NA
available all standard software functions even if not specifically detailed in the specification. The sever / operator works
stations shall be OPC compliant for communicating to other client works station
The computers shall utilise a real time multi-tasking and networked operating system with a proven track record in real
NA
time control applications
It is a requirement that the system be supported by on line configuration and editing of all
VDU mimic displays and database and to create new displays and additional database NA
The system shall be capable of supporting the allocation of equipment groups into zones and these zones may be
NA
allocated for the attention of Particular operator workstations (OWs).
Operational mimics and other graphics shall be presented in an industry standard graphical user interface (GUI) format.
A minimum of two active windows should be displayable concurrently. Both text and graphics shall resize automatically
NA
to accommodate changes made to the size of a window. The system shall be designed to minimise the operators use of
the keyboard. All major functions shall be accessible on-screen through use of the mouse or track ball
When designated in the Project Specification additional operator workstations shall be provided for each process
area. Functionality shall be identical to that of the master station OW‟s allowing full access to all system functions at the
authorised access level. Operator system entry for each area will be password coded with different levels of entry
depending on the level of authority of the operator. Development and systems level entry passwords will be provided for NA
engineering workstations. Each action taken by any operator at any level of entry, or, at any operator terminal shall be
log file recorded, and time and date stamped. Log in and out time and dates will be printed on the control room event
logging printer
VDU mimics will display dynamic colour details of flow rates and pressures, pump status, well levels, alarms, electrical
power supplies and other general equipment status conditions. All requests and commands shall be via icons, whether
menu linked or linked to equipment control actions. A permanent dynamic alarm banner shall be displayed at the bottom NA
or top of each operator screen. Each control action will be routed through a series of confirmation routines.
The complete system database shall be available to each master-station OW offering preconfigured reports per
process area. These reports shall be available for printing in graph or tabular format. Dynamic trend displays shall also
NA
be available for all analogue flow, level and pressure values. Custom, as well as preconfigured reports and trends shall be
available to a higher level of entry. A colour A4 size screen dump printer shall be provided for graph and trend prints
An operator help utility shall be provided offering help linked to the particular action being carried out by the operator at
that time. At least one help screen per screen page shall be available. This facility shall be preconfigured with an option
NA
for updating by operators via a password entry. Typical information available shall consist of guides of actions to take
under Particular equipment conditions, general process information and help in operating the telemetry system itself
Provide a software watchdog timer function connected to one set of normally closed relay contacts which are held open
NA
whilst the watchdog is healthy
2.4.2 Display Facilities
The displays shall be user configurable, with the user being able to construct any desired symbol for display. Any display
shall appear (excluding historical recall) within 3 to 5 s of selection and the displayed data shall be updated from the
database as information is recovered from the Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC‟s). Alarms shall typically appear NA
within 3 to 5 s of occurrence and within 1 s of being received into the central system database
The Contractor shall configure all display pages as fully as possible. However, facility must be incorporated to permit easy
construction and modification of the display pages by using a standard library of shapes and symbols. The library shall be
added to and modified by the user as required. The configuration shall be object orientated for ease of use. All layout NA
details and dimensions, including colours, symbols, line diagrams, legend text and indications, shall be agreed with
the Engineer
The initial application software shall provide for the display pages listed below and any pages necessary for the system to
function as a complete entity.
(a) mimic displays

(b) alphanumeric configuration pages for the complete I/O and PLC‟s
(c) graphic displays
(d) trend displays
(e) process alarms with tag, date time and cause NA
(f) event logs of past 72 h with date and time
(g) tabular display of data
(h) inset windows showing an analogue trends may be mixed with mimic displays. In such a display the
main mimic and inset trend shall all be live with automatic display updates.
(i) network status and configuration.
(j) main power supplies status
(k) system alarms with equipment identity, date and time
Indexing of information and menus shall be presented in the form of active windows on the screen while the mimics etc.
NA
are still available for view
No display or function shall effect the logging/monitoring of data. It shall be possible for the master station terminal and
auxiliary terminals to perform different tasks within the displays simultaneously NA
2.4.3 Monitoring and Alarms
The operator shall be able to monitor all of the information at all workstations. He shall be able to view active equipment
information on a series of VDU based graphical and tabular displays
In the event of an equipment alarm, the following shall occur at the master station: (a) alarm message displayed in
the alarm message area of the screen
(b) the audible alarm shall sound
(c) the appropriate Section of the display page shall change colour and flash
(d) a full message shall be written on the alarm page
(e) the full alarm message shall be printed on the alarm printer
(f) the full alarm message shall be recorded, stored on disk and automatically archived.
The operator should be able to acknowledge the alarm by pressing an accept alarm key or icon. This action shall stop all
associated alarm messages and displays flashing, however the display shall remain in the alarm state fixed colour to
indicate an accepted alarm. When all outstanding alarms have been acknowledged the audible alarm shall be silenced
Once the alarm has cleared, the messages and displays shall return to normal. The alarm message shall stay recorded on
the event/alarm log and an alarm cleared message shall also be recorded
If the alarm clears before being acknowledged the sequence of events shall continue as above except the message shall
change to indicate a cleared alarm
An audible alarm silence function shall be provided to enable an operator to silence the audible alarm without Alarm Shall be Displayed
acknowledging all alarms. On occurrence of any subsequent alarm the audible alarm shall sound. in the Local HMI and
the provision for the alarm
For multiple bit points (where two or more inputs are combined to function as one point) the assignment of status/alarm NA
signals will be provided for
levels shall be on the combined signals integrating to Main
Each signal within the configured system shall be capable of being assigned an alarm based on the following: SCADA.
(a) four levels per analogue (Lo Lo, Hi Hi, Lo and Hi)
(b) rate of change
(c) deviation from setpoint or other control parameter
Alarms shall be time tagged to 1 second resolution at PLC
A minimum of four alarm priorities shall be provided so that those requiring immediate attention may be separated from
alarms of lower priority. An audible alarm shall sound for alarms requiring operator action. It shall be possible to
acknowledge alarms from any operator station provided the operator is logged on to an approved access level
Typical alarm assignments are as follows:
(a) critical alarm - an alarm that requires immediate operator action

(b) non critical alarm - an alarm that requires operator action but not necessarily immediate action
(c) operator guide alarm - an alarm that provides information to the operator
(d) event - a low priority condition which is recorded
The alarm software shall produce an alarm summary which will show all currently active alarms in priority and
chronological order
2.4.4 Equipment Control
The system shall support a high security equipment control facility and employ revertive checking of control outputs
based on a select, checkback and execute philosophy of operation. Any command entered at any OW shall complete NA
its action within 2 s
Command execution performance time excludes the time for call set-up on PSTN and assumes no transmission errors or
NA
re-transmission of data occurs
2.4.5 Data Archiving
Continuous process (analogue) data, digital event states, alarms and operator actions shall be archived to a removable
media system. The archive media shall be sized to store logged analogue data, at a maximum sample rate of 15 min for
NA
a period of 15 months. Data recording shall be on dual media. The archive system shall generate an alarm when a file
is 90 % full
Analogues will be stored at a rate selected by the operator in the range 1 second to 1 hour.
The operator shall have the facility to select the way in which an analogue is stored. The system will provide any
combination of the following:
(a) instantaneous value

(b) average value NA
(c) maximum value
(d) minimum value
(e) not stored
Maximum, minimum and average values shall be calculated over a period set by the operator in the range 15 min to 24 h,
NA
the default shall be 1 h
The logging of new data and reception of alarms must be carried out at the same time as the operator is viewing archived
data. Any alarms received must be displayed as an overlay on the visual display unit NA
2.4.6 VDU Mimic Displays

The Contractor shall configure all the mimics to provide total detailed coverage of the monitoring and control of
equipment as detailed in this specification. It is expected that display modifications will be required in the future and NA
therefore the ability to change the displays without programming skills is essential
Instrumentation shall be displayed using ISO standard symbols. For mimic configuration, it shall be possible to call up a
library of standard symbols representing items (e.g. pumps, valves) and add new symbols to the library. Building mimics
shall be simple and be achieved by using a mouse or tracker ball pointing device. The mimic displays shall consist of the
following pages:
NA
(a) a general diagram covering the whole of the system on a single screen with key data
(b) a general block diagram for each site or area of Site showing the equipment displayed on a series of single screens
with key data
(c) mimic of the equipment and instrumentation connected to each PLC displayed on as many screens as necessary
2.4.7 Tabular Representation of Data
It shall be possible to put any data into a tabular format, with the data entered in row or columns. The user shall be able
NA
to add headings to any of the rows or columns and store the table as a blank for later use
2.4.8 Trend Displays
It shall be possible to plot dynamically updated real time data and archived data on a line graph to represent analogue or
digital information. Each graph shall be capable of displaying
8 plots overlaid on a graph of different colours and line texture. Next to the graph, there shall be a key relating each NA
colour to its function. The horizontal axis shall be time based and user selectable in minutes, hours, days, weeks, for
example, together with a start time
The vertical axis shall be scaled as a percentage of range and be displayed in the colour of the selected reading. To avoid
cluttering, the vertical axis scale shall be changed by selecting the individual display. The vertical axis shall be
NA
automatically scaled for each selected point between limits entered by the user. Actual values in engineering units shall
be displayed by positioning a cursor at the desired point of the trend graph
The display of the data shall also be available in tabular form NA
2.4.9 Manual Data Entry
The system shall be provided with facility for entering data manually via the keyboard. This data will fall into two types.
(a) constants which will be changed infrequently. This data may have time and date associated with it
Complied
(b) maintenance related comments
2.4.10 Manually Corrected Data

The system shall allow a person with authorised access to manually correct erroneous data via the keyboard.
Complied
2.4.11 Reports
There shall be a real time spreadsheet facility supplied and installed by the Contractor in the master station. The users
shall be able to transfer data from either the archive system or live data to the spreadsheet. The user shall be able to
produce daily, weekly, monthly and annual reports using any data and a mixture of formats (tables, graphs, summaries,
spreadsheets).
Typical reports would be: NA
(a) power consumption
(b) total flows
(c) failures of equipment
(d) maintenance schedules
It shall be possible to configure and store blank templates for later use. Facilities for editing stored templates shall also
be provided NA
2.4.12 Point Record

Each input shall have a record covering every characteristic of the input. This data shall be automatically sent to the
appropriate locations when the user has completed entering or modifying data into the record. The Contractor shall
compile all input records as indicated in the input/output schedules, plus any other I/O to enable the complete
and optimum monitoring and control of the equipment. The user shall be able to modify, amend or create new records.
The Contractor shall ensure all possible characteristics are included in the record including the following:
(a) point identity

(b) point description
(c) point type NA
(d) point state
(e) point range
(f) point units
(g) status/alarm and priority levels
(h) alarm set points - high, low, out of range high/low
(i) log interval - time between logs
(j) log type - average, total, and others as required
(k) log in PLC - for communications failures
2.4.13 Profiling
From an average, typical or manually entered plot, it shall be possible to set an exception profile whereby readings within
an upper and lower level are acceptable. Profiles shall be set graphically via OW. The user may select for the system to
alarm if the reading is outside the profile and highlight such exceptions as Part of a report and so reduce the need to NA
examine all data to ensure acceptability. The number of exceptions shall be logged
2.4.14 Data Manipulation

It shall be possible to perform simple mathematical functions on any data, including the following functions:
(a) addition
(b) subtraction Complied
(c) multiplication
(d) division
(e) square root
It shall be possible to log, display or use in a control loop the resultant data Complied
2.4.15 Database Query Facilities
The system shall support the use of database relationships and wild card characters to provide database query facilities.
It shall be possible for applications integration to easily configure queries and save them for future use. Support of
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) or Structured Query Language (SQL), to permit data exchange between the SCADA Master NA
Station and external applications, including spread sheets and databases
Data shall be presented in tabular format and contain any combination of fields from the main system database NA
It shall be possible to manipulate the data by specifying search and sort criteria to define data range limits
NA
Once a query table has been created it shall be possible to store the configuration and initiate successive look ups using a
NA
point and shoot technique
2.4.16 Downloading PLC Configuration
It shall be possible to download configuration to the PLC‟s from the engineer‟s terminal Complied
2.4.17 Diagnostics
The system shall have on-line diagnostic facilities to report system faults as they occur. A set of off-line diagnostic
Complied
routines shall be supplied for more extensive fault diagnosis
2.4.18 Access Levels
The functions available on the system shall be fully flexible so as to allow users access levels to be customised by the
Complied
system operator to suit individual user requirements.
Access to management and engineering levels shall be restricted by user selectable passwords or keyswitch. The
security systems shall be based on a set of privileges which may be granted or denied to individual uses by the system Complied
operator
2.4.19 Control Loop and Sequence Programming
The method of programming will depend upon the Manufacturers system requirements.
However, the following standards shall be followed:
(a) all programs shall be written such that they lend themselves easily to alterations and additions
Complied
(b) good programming practice shall be followed using structured programming techniques. All programs
shall be tidy in format and logical to follow, and shall be accompanied by flow diagrams. Programs should be
extensively annotated with comments and be self-documenting
(c) the system shall be supplied with programs that use a high level language for the OW
2.4.20 Program - Documentation
As Part of the requirements of this specification full documentation is required as below :
(a) software user manuals
(b) database point allocation table
(c) complete program listing, flow charts for all sequences and control routines Complied
(d) application software source code
(e) end user license agreements for the programming software
2.5 REMOTE TERMINAL UNITS (RTU) FOR TELEMETRY APPLICATION

2.5.1 Future Expansion
The system hardware, application software and database shall be sized to accommodate a total of 10 % increase in signal
capacity overall and up to 25 % increase in an individual RTU
Sufficient plug in modules shall be provided and wired to terminals ready to accept future signals of up to 10 % or a
minimum of one module, for each RTU
2.5.2 RTU Hardware
Each microprocessor based RTU will be the main device used to control loops in each RTU process area. Each RTU shall
be able to receive analogue and digital inputs from the field, perform input signal processing and alarm checking, perform
algorithms control, and output to valves and other actuators.
Each RTU controller shall be mounted in an IP65 enclosure and constructed to allow easy replacement and maintenance of
cards
The RTU shall be suitably protected against exposure to the severe environmental conditions prevalent in sewerage
systems
The RTU shall be an intelligent device capable of handling data collection, logging, report by exception, current data
retrieval and pump sequence control programss
Each RTU shall be sized for controlling the specified input/outputs and future expansion.
The RTU shall be of single board construction and as a minimum shall include input/output circuits:
(a) 16 digital inputs

(b) 8 digital outputs
(c) 4 analogue inputs
It shall be possible to add one of the following input/output types on a single plug-in module. (d) 16 digital inputs
(e) 8 digital outputs
(f) 4 analogue inputs
(g) 4 analogue outputs
(h) 4 pulse inputs
The program and data held within memory shall remain intact and error free if all external power is removed from the
RTU for a minimum period of two weeks
The Contractor shall supply batteries for each RTU with sufficient capacity to maintain full power to the RTU for 8 h, or as
designated in the Project Specification, after a power failure. The UPS system shall be integral to the RTU. The batteries
shall be of a sealed maintenance free type
All field connections shall be made in terminal strips located for easy access. These terminals shall be clearly
marked and identified. Terminals carrying voltages in excess of
24 V shall be fully shrouded. All terminals shall be of the „flip up‟ isolator type with test points
NA
A hand held programmer, shall be provided for local display of signals, programming and fault diagnosis
RTU‟s shall be capable of being equipped with RS232/485 links for interconnection to
standalone control systems and standard equipment packages
NA
(a) connection to other devices will use Modbus ASCII or RTU protocol as standard
(b) details of other protocols available should be included within the tender
RTU‟s shall be configured such that a single RTU failure will not interrupt or degrade equipment monitoring and control
functions. RTU failure shall be alerted to the operator at the highest alarm priority
Surge protection shall meet the requirements of IEEE 472-1974
2.5.3 RTU Software
The RTU shall be capable of processing locally input equipment information before transmitting it to the master
station to reduce transmission overheads
Total internal scan time interval for all inputs and outputs in an RTU shall not exceed 1 s
There shall be two pairs of alarm settings for each analogue input, one an alarm warning of a possible fault, the other
warning that the input is outside a valid range of readings.
The RTU shall operate on a report by exception basis
The RTU‟s shall have sophisticated in built control facilities to permit control loop configuration using simple
building blocks. These blocks shall sequence control, three term control and other control routine components as required
by the Specification. The RTU shall be capable of routine signal processing including integration, summation, subtraction
and totalisation of one or more inputs. Control loops shall incorporate deviation and rate of change alarms, bumpless
transfer facility, set point and output high and low limits.
The RTU shall be capable of executing sequential control logic. Programming of sequential control shall be by means of
vendor supplied high level function block language or ladder diagram format as Part of an integrated package.
The RTU‟s shall have standalone capability, able to continue monitoring equipment and executing control loops if the
communication link to the master station fails. In the event of such a failure the RTU shall log all alarms and required
analogues until all the total memory is filled. When the communication link is restored the RTU will automatically upload
the logged data to the data archiving system.
The RTU‟s shall have a watchdog function and full self-diagnostics capable of detecting and reporting faults to the master
station and displayed locally
The Contractor shall program the RTU‟s fully under this Contract. It shall be possible to
modify the programs remotely by downloading from the engineers terminal
It shall be possible to initiate a current data retrieval on demand, from the master station, leaving the original RTU data
contents intact for routine up-loading
2.6 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)
2.6.1 PLC Hardware
The PLC system shall comprise of a central processing unit, input/output modules, serial interface modules and
programming units. The PLC shall be of modular construction with plug in I/O cards and facility to install expansion
Complied
racks/modules when necessary. The system shall include 25% spare capacity in hardware and memory for future
modifications
PLC‟s shall be installed inside Local Control Panels or in separate cubicles, as specified in
the Project Specification. PLC shall be suitable for ambient temperature of up to 50ᴼ C and
95% relative humidity.
(a) PLC diagnostic indications shall include the following: (i) Power ok
(ii) Low battery (iii) Forced I/O (iv) CPU fault
(v) I/O status indicators
(b) Central Processing Unit. The CPU shall perform the following function:
(i) Scan all inputs, execute relay ladder logic programs and generate outputs for the final control elements Complied
(ii) Monitor status of system hardware and provide diagnostic information .
(iii) Central Processing Unit ( CPU) shall 80 μs per 1 kb minimum process scan time. Random Access Memory (RAM)
for real time program execution with lithium battery backup for data retention and EEPROM flash backup for permanent
storage shall be provided. The PLC memory shall be as required for the programs and future requirements with a
minimum of 1 MB flash / I MB SRAM, with a minimum of 204 K for IEC Logic or equivalent
PLCs shall be supplied complete with a laptop programming and diagnostic device plus all necessary leads and
programming software & manuals. When a local SCADA computer is installed and connected to the PLC locally, the PLC Local HMI is provided for
Complied
programming software is to be installed in the same computer and the necessary cables/adaptors required for monitoring the process.
programming are to be supplied
PLCs shall have a minimum of 1 x RS 232 plus 1 x RS 232 /485 ports and 1 Ethernet port Complied
Compact Version and/or Fixed I/O type PLC shall be considered (physical I/O counts only) at the discretion of the
engineer depending upon the application requirements. The compact version CPU‟s specification shall meet all other Complied
communication parameters
PLC control equipment shall be housed in the common controls section of the MCC and shall be fed by non door
interlocked MCCB. A separate signal marshalling section shall be provided to accommodate all input and output signals to Complied
the Control and Telemetry section.
The equipment shall accept status and analogue (4-20mA) signals from both field and panel mounted instruments.
Analogue inputs shall be scanned into a 12 bit binary (minimum) analogue to digital converter with buffered inputs.The
equipment shall accept status and analogue (4-20mA) signals from both field and panel mounted instruments. Analogue Complied
inputs shall be scanned into a 12 bit binary (minimum) analogue to digital converter with buffered inputs.
PLC power supply shall be 24Vdc, 240 V ac as specified. The equipment shall be maintained in operation during a period
of mains failure drawing power from the battery or UPS system for a minimum back-up time of 8 hours. The battery/UPS
Complied
system shall include diagnostic and automatic self-test routines with volt-free contacts to initiate an alarm in the event of
malfunction
Panel mounted display (local HMI) units shall be provided for man machine interface, as a permanently connected means
of accessing set points, timer settings, control and monitoring locally, unless otherwise specified in the project Complied
specification
The HMI shall be pre-programmed to provide a basic graphical display of the process. Real- time numeric display of
process variables and alarm messages shall be available. All process control functions shall be accessible for the operator
from the HMI. The application program shall be stored in "Non Volatile Memory". Local HMI size shall be as specified in Complied
the clause
2.3.3 Visual Display Unit (VDU)
A schematic block diagrams for an overview of the PLC system and general arrangement in the MCC section indicating the
location and proposed placement shall be submitted for Engineer's review Complied
The Contractor shall ensure while submitting his proposal that the PLC systems selected provides high availability and
Complied
high level of integrity
PLCs used for controller applications require a minimum built-in redundancy of Power supply
,CPU modules, Communication modules and communications with a hot-backup logic configuration Complied
2.6.2 Input Modules

Digital input modules shall be 16-point (maximum per Card), 24 VDC, signal source type, with individual screw terminal
connections. Where space restrictions or high-density signal requirements are apparent 32-point 24VDC digital input Complied
modules may be permitted with the approval of the engineer
All digital input units shall be capable of accepting, a volt-free contact signal, the source voltage shall be regulated 24VDC
Complied
and shall be derived from the PLC panel
Where the input from an external source is not volt-free then suitable isolation devices shall be provided in order to
prevent cross-connection of different supplies. This device may be e.g. interposing relay or optical-isolator. For
Complied
frequencies of operation greater than 30 operations/hours, the use of electromechanical devices shall not be permitted.
All interface/isolation devices shall provide visual indication of Signal State
All Input modules shall be segregated into groups, which relate to 24VDC supply commons.
Where different supplies are apparent in input connections, these shall be segregated in accordance with supply common Complied
grouping
Inputs signals from 'DUTY' equipment shall not be allocated to the same input module as signals from 'STANDBY'
Complied
equipment performing the same function
The analogue current input module shall be capable of converting 4, 8 or 16 channels of inputs in the range of 4 to 20 Ma Complied
Resolution of the converted analogue current input signal shall be minimum 12 bits binary Complied
All analogue signals shall be updated each scan into a dedicated area of data registers Complied
The conversion speed for all analogue current input channels shall be within 2 - 10 milliseconds Complied
All digital input modules shall be provided with LED for each point (channel) for testing and maintenance purposes. Complied
All digital input modulus shall be provided with a dual independent power supply Complied
2.6.3 Output Modules
Discrete AC output modules shall have separate and independent commons allowing each group to be used on different
NA
voltages
Discrete AC output where used shall be provided with an RC snubber circuit to protect against transient electrical noise on
NA
the power line
Discrete AC outputs shall be suitable for controlling a wide range of inductive and resistive loads by providing a high
NA
degree of inrush current (10x the rated current).
Discrete DC output modules shall be available with positive and negative logic characteristics in compliance with the IEC
industry standard Complied
Discrete DC output modules shall be provided with a maximum of eight output points in two groups with a common
Complied
power input terminal per group
Discrete DC output modules shall be compatible with a wide range of load devices, e.g. motor starters, valves, and
Complied
indicators etc
The current rating of the relay output shall be capable of supplying the load according to the applications Complied
The analogue voltage output module shall be capable of converting digital data to analogue outputs in the range of -10 to
Complied
+10 volts
Resolution of the converted output signal shall be minimum 12 bits Complied
All analogue signals shall be updated each scan into a dedicated area of data registers. Complied
The analogue voltage outputs shall be configurable to default to 0 mA, 4 mA or hold-last- state in the event of a CPU
Complied
failure.
Output signals to 'DUTY' equipment shall not be derived from the same output module as
Complied
'STANDBY' equipment performing the same function
Digital outputs used for AC inductive loads shall be fitted with arc suppression devices as close to the load as is
Complied
practicable.
Means shall be provided to allow the disconnection of outputs causing unsafe movements or actions without removing
Complied
power from the PLC Processor or inhibiting program execution
All digital input modules shall be provided with LED for each point (channel) for testing and maintenance purposes Complied
All digital input modulus shall be provided with a dual independent power supply Complied
2.6.4 PLC Software
PLC Software shall be developed within the BS EN 61131-3 environment. Application program shall be developed by
Complied
using software package that only conform to BS EN 61131-3 requirements
Standard IEC libraries of Functions and Function Blocks shall be used when writing application software
Complied
All software shall be suitably documented to include the following as a minimum:

(a) suitable comments;
(b) function description;
(c) symbolic addressing local data areas; Complied
(d) symbolic addressing global data areas;
(e) descriptions of all constants;
(f) list of cross-references
The PLC shall be suitable to employ minimum two programming devices for development of application programs, a small
hand-held device with back-lit LCD readout and a Software programming package running on a PLC compatible laptop or Complied
desktop computer
On-line and off-line, CPU and I/O configuration and application program development shall be achieved with a PLC
Complied
compatible computer and programming and documentation software
Both the PC compatible computer and the hand-held programmer shall be connectable to the PLC via built-in serial
Complied
communication port. The PLC shall connect to the computer over the computer's RS 232C serial port for programming
In addition to the serial communications, the PLC compatible computer shall be connectable to the PLC via Ethernet TCPIP
Complied
supporting the SRTP application protocol
The programming devices shall have access to the application program, the CPU and I/O system configurations, all
Complied
registers, CPU and I/O status, system diagnostic relays, and I/O over-ride capabilities
2.7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS LINKS
2.7.1 Communication Standards
Transmission of data shall conform to a recognised Consultative Committee for International Telephone and Telegraphy
FO cables and network by
(CCITT) standard. The data transfer system shall be self monitoring such that any equipment or line failure shall be
main contractor
displayed at both ends
Complied as
The protocol used shall safeguard against false data transmission, allow for error detection, recovery, failure detection Noted
Signal provision for the
and initiate switchover the redundant data highway. A diagnostic routine shall be included to monitor the highway
integration shall be provided
performance. Data protocols and diagnostics shall be fully documented
2.7.2 Control Room Data Highway
All master station operator workstations and control room hardware shall be linked by a totally redundant local area
network to transfer data between the servers, work stations and serial line multiplexers. The system shall continuously
monitor the performance of both links and output an alarm on detection of an abnormal condition. Fibre Optic cables
shall be provided for control room Data Highway, unless otherwise specified in the project specification
The following features shall be provided as a minimum:
NA
(a) all data highway networks are to monitored at all times
(b) communications diagnostics are to be continuous such that a failure is alarmed in the minimum time
(c) each network node shall have message checking capability
(d) there shall be no single point of failure
(e) the maximum distance between nodes shall be up to 600 meters, with a maximum highway
distance of 3500 meters
(f) communication rates shall be at least 10 M baud
2.7.3 Leased lines or PSTN
The system shall use the public switched telephone network (PSTN) or leased data circuits to transfer data between the
master station and the RTU‟s located at remote sites. The modems used by the master station and the RTU‟s shall have
auto dial, auto answer capability and be PTT approved
NA
All radio equipment shall comply with the appropriate local recommendations and shall have been approved for licensing
by the radio frequency allocation authority. Additionally the equipment shall comply with the most recent edition of the
appropriate national and international standards specifications
2.7.4 Radio
Type approval numbers issued by the national frequency allocation committee in the country of manufacture shall be
supplied, together with CCIR recommendations, national and international standards, specification and
recommendations met by the equipment at this time of tender.
The radio system shall be of the following type : Complied

frequency : UHF/VHF as allocated by Frequency Allocation Authority
modulation : FM
base mode : full duplex
outstation mode : two frequency simplex
2.7.5 Radio Path Profiles
The Owner shall provide path profiles and subsequent technical examinations prior to detailed design of the radio
system Complied
2.7.6 Radio Transmitters/Receivers
Transmitter/receiver radio units shall be single units without standby facilities. These units shall have sufficient battery
back up for the system to function for 8 h in the event of mains failure. Provision for this may be from the main RTU It is depends on the building
battery back up supply. The units may be either wall mounted or incorporated within the RTU enclosure Noted
power supply
2.7.7 Base Station Radio Transmitter/Receivers

Base station transmitter/receiver radio units shall be of a dual main/standby type with auto changeover of the duty units.
The Contractor shall supply within the tender document and explanation of how this changeover shall be accomplished.
An alarm signal shall be transmitted to the Master Station when a changeover occurs. The base station shall be provided
with power supply equipment, including nickel cadmium battery and 240 V 50 Hz a.c. mains fed battery charger and have Radio Unit redudency is not
sufficient battery back up to allow for the system to operate for 4 h in the event of mains failure and capable of NA
considered.
automatically recharging the battery to full capacity within 24 h while the radio equipment continues to operate at full
duty
2.7.8 Aerials and Aerial Structures

The Contractor shall supply and install all aerials and aerial support structures and shall provide drawings to show how
each type of aerial is to be mounted NA
The base stations shall have omnidirectional aerials plus any associated duplexers NA
UHF outstations shall have a single 12 element, yagi aerial with a gain of 12 dB with respect to a half wave dipole on the
corresponding base station. Any VHF outstations shall have 3 element yagi VHF aerials planned on the corresponding NA
base station
The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary low loss coaxial down leads for connection for the radio unit
and lightning protection for the aerial system NA
2.7.9 Fibre Optic Network
The Contractor shall carry out a study whether it is necessary to lay a fibre optic communication media for use
as main data highway link. The study shall include the security level required in the designed site communication where
fibre optic cable considered being highly secured and highly accurate communication medium
This particular specification is to be read in conjunction with QCS 2010 Section 21 Part 14
Structured Cabling Systems
FO ports shall be provided.FO

Complied as
cabling is in main Contractor
Noted
Scope
Qualifications and Responsibility of Contractor
The Contractor shall furnish and install all fibre optic equipment and materials specified in this section and shown on the
tender drawings. The fibre optic system shall be the unit responsibility of one system supplier. The supplier shall use
qualified personnel, possessing the necessary equipment and having experience in similar installations
(a) Submittals:
Submit the following information:

(i) Catalog data and installation instructions on the splice method, hardware, and splicing
(ii) equipment (if any).
(iii) Catalog data on the fiber optic cable, pull boxes, connectors, cable lubricant, duct
(iv) sealant, closures, pull rope, enclosures, identification tape, and mounting hardware.
(v) Catalog data on the testing equipment including a written test procedure outlining the
(vi) steps and methods that will be used to test the cable during and after installation.
(vii) Include a sample copy of the test form that will be used in the test procedure. (viii) Cable installation procedures
for the applicable method of installation, outlining the
(ix) construction methods that will be used. Identify steps that will be taken to ensure
(x) that the cable is not damaged during the installation.
(xi) Complete factory test results for cable reel stating the signal loss for fiber in the cable
(xii) prior to and after extrusion of duct around cable if applicable.
(xiii) Record drawings indicating the locations of all splices (if any) and manholes . (xiv) Certified test results for each FO ports shall be provided.FO
cable after installation stating the signal loss of Complied as
cabling is in main Contractor
each fiber in the cable between splices, across all splices, and from end to end Noted
Scope
after splicing is complete.
(b) Qualifications and Responsibility of Contractor

(i) The Contractor shall furnish and install all fibre optic equipment and materials
specified in this section and shown on the tender drawings. The fibre optic system shall be the unit responsibility of one
system supplier. The supplier shall use qualified personnel, possessing the necessary equipment and having experience in
similar installations
(c) Material
(i) The Single mode optical fiber cables which are optimized for use in both wave lengths 1310 nm and 1550 nm.
(ii) The multimode optical fibre cables which are optimized for use in both wave lengths 850 nm and 1310 nm.
(iii) The optical fibre cables shall meet the requirements stated in ITU-T Rec. by international telecommunication
Union, BS EN 50173-3 standard.
(iv) The cable shall be new, unused and of current design and manufacture.
Suitable optical fibre cables shall be selected based on the distance travel, bandwidth, indoor and outdoor application and
shall be approved by the Engineer.
(v) The single mode fiber shall be used for fibre optic network more than 300 m distance data transmission, unless
otherwise justified by the manufacturer.
(vi) The material of the fibre shall be silica glass fibre
(d) Fibre characteristics
(i) The fibre utilized in the cable must meet ITU-T: G651.1, G652 and have maximum attenuation at 850 nm
of 3.75 dB/km at 1310 nm of 0.4 dB/km, at
1550 nm of 0.3 dB/km or less. If used for outdoor, then the fibre cable must be loose-tube non-dielectric type
(e) Installation
(i) Refer to the QCS Section 21 Part 14, clause 14.2.3

2.8 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
2.8.1 General
All process I/O and equipment interface boards shall comply with the following:
(a) Equipment wiring termination‟s shall accommodate up to 0.9 mm diameter conductors. Terminals shall Complied
be of the test disconnect type to permit ease of signal isolation and loop monitoring for commissioning and maintenance
purposes
Hot (powered) removal of I/O boards shall be possible without special tools Complied
Provision to power two wire loop powered transmitters, where required
Complied
Digital inputs shall meet the following requirements: (a) all digital inputs shall be optically isolated.
(b) all alarm and state indications shall be from dry contacts or 24 V d.c. wet contacts.
An isolated +24 V d.c. supply shall be provided to source the opto-isolated inputs when connected to dry contacts,
adequate filter circuits and software debounce techniques will be necessary.
(c) Contact operation shall be as follows :

(i) Alarms: in the healthy condition the contacts shall be closed with the relay coil energised: in the alarm condition Complied
the contacts shall be opened with the relay de-energised.
(ii) States: contacts shall be open with relay coil de-energised in the off (logic„0‟) condition, and closed in the on
(logic „1‟) condition.
(iii) Two bit Digital: One contact shall close when the equipment is in one state and a second contact shall close when
the equipment is in the opposite state
2.8.2 Analogue Inputs

Independently configured channels in the range 4 - 20 mA, 1-5 V d.c., 0-1 V d.c., 0-5 V d.c.,
0-10 V d.c. or +/-10 V d.c. All analogues shall be screened and segregated from other cables. The signal ground shall
be separate from the system ground. Input impedance shall Complied
16 bit, system accuracy ± 0.2% of span

2.8.3 Digital Outputs
1 All digital outputs shall be optically isolated

2 All control circuits shall operate from a 24 V d.c. supply. The contact will be normally open and energised to close when
an action is initiated. Outputs shall be either open-collector or volt-free contacts as follows: Complied
(a) Open collector : 100 mA at 35 V d.c.
(b) Contact : 1 A at 24 V d.c. or 120 VA (resistive) 0.5 A at 24 V d.c. or 120 VA (inductive).
2.8.4 Analogue Outputs

In general all analogue outputs shall be 4-20 mA or 1-5 V d.c., selectable, and drive a maximum loop impedance of 1000
Complied
conversion shall be 14 bit, system accuracy ± 0.2% of span
2.8.5 RTD Input
Conditioned signal must be capable of being directly accessed by the on board RTU controller without external
intervention NA
2.8.6 Thermocouple Input

Capable of receiving type E, J, K, input directly without an external transmitter. Linearisation shall be performed at the
NA
PLC without external intervention
2.8.7 Pulse Input
Capable of receiving a zero based pulse or rectangular wave or sinusoidal wave form with amplitude of 4-6 or 21.6-27 V
and rate of 0 to 5000 pulses per second for totalizing. Where frequency counting is required a rate of 0 to 1000 pulses NA
per second should be provided
2.9 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
All power supplies provided by the Contractor shall conform to the following:
(a) be comprised of standard available units
(b) be fitted with adequate input/output fuse protection
(c) power supplies to be fitted, if applicable, with short circuit protection and current limiting facilities
(d) all power supplies to be selected such that they are derated to allow for future expansion to improve the
reliability, and help increase the MTBF of the units. With all the expansion described in this specification, the loading on Complied
the power supplies shall not exceed 75 % of their total capacity
(e) modular with one for N redundancy
(f) modular failure indicated at the PLC and Master Station
(g) failed module shall be removed without disconnecting system power or affecting control
2.10 MIMIC DIAGRAM
2.10.1 General
Where required in the Project Specification a modular mimic diagram shall be provided. The Mimic will be configured to
display the status of all principal items of equipment in the area covered
No Part of the mimic panel display area shall be below 760 mm or above 2100 mm from the floor
All layout details and dimensions, including main construction, colours, symbols, line diagrams, legend text and
indications, shall be agreed with the Engineer
The mimic diagram driver shall be housed in either the mimic diagram enclosure or a separate enclosure. In either case
the driver shall consist of modules mounted in standard 19 inch card frames. The mimic driver shall consist of a client
device directly connected to the data centre LAN
Complied as Mimic diagram shall be provided
Colour coding shall be in as provided below and where not stipulated in accordance with BS EN 60073:2000: Noted in the HMI graphics
Satus of Operation Colour Code

Equipment running and normal Green
Equipment stopped and normal White/Grey
Equipment tripped Yellow
Equipment selected “on Auto” Blue
Equipment or process unsafe / danger in operation Red
Panel Energised /isolator or ACB ON White
Process Flow ON (e.g. Valves open) Green
Process flow Stopped OFF (e.g. Valves closed) White
2.10.2 Mosaic Tile
The face of the mimic diagram shall comprise a mosaic of precision formed tiles, which shall clip into a supporting grid to
form a robust construction of flush and neat appearance. The tile faces shall have a durable, scratch-resistant non-
reflective finish. The background colour of the mimic diagram tiles shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The face
dimensions of tiles shall be subject to approval by the Engineer
NA
The face of the tile mosaic shall be engraved and/or printed or painted to provide a diagram.The printing or painting shall
be durable throughout the lifetime of the equipmen
The mimic diagram face and supports shall be rigidly held in a robust floor mounting frame.
The surround to the mosaic tile area and the ends of the frame shall be enclosed in decorative panelling to provide a high
quality aesthetic finish. The complete construction shall be formed into an enclosed panel, with a access to enable the
ready replacement of defective components and the rearrangement of tiles. Tiles and components shall be replaceable
without disturbance to the surrounding areas of the mimic face
Wiring troughs or clips shall be provided at the rear of the mimic diagram to enable wiring to electrically driven
components to be neatly dressed and supported. Flexible wiring of adequate length shall be used to enable electrically
NA
driven components to be relocated on the mimic diagram without the necessity for rewiring
All illuminated indications shall use high radiance, light emitting diodes (LED‟s). Either single peep-through or multiple-
element/planar types shall be used, as appropriate. The illuminated area shall have even intensity across the whole face.
A 20 % spare capacity shall be provided (equipped) within the mimic driver and the wiring to the mimic board to allow
for future modifications. The spare capacity shall be evenly distribute
All driver outputs shall be protected against overload and short-circuit
Lamp test facilities shall be provided such that operators can initiate the test from their workstation positions. This facility
shall ensure that both the mimic LED‟s and the driver circuitry are exercised
2.10.3 Projection
The mimic diagram shall be displayed using high resolution 1280 by 1024 panel rear projection technology onto
multiple projectors and screens arranged in a matrix to produce an integrated display, or an equivalent quality as
specified in the particular Specifications
light conditions. The projector and screen assembly shall occupy a floor space of less than 1.5 m, deep by the length of
the mimic
Dynamic configuration of the display shall be from X-windows style environment and provide intuitive on screen menu
drive display. The ability to interface multiple sources, up to a maximum of 10 using an RS232/422 serial interface shall
be provided
A software package shall be provided to adjust brightness, contrast, time, colour, sharpness and geometry and NA
convergence settings from one computer. Image adjustments shall be stored for each source such that the projector will
automatically select the correct settings for the Particular source
An auto convergence system shall be provided to automatically align the projected image on the screen, manual
convergence shall also be possible
A live video window facility shall be provided to display real time video images anywhere on the screen matrix. The video
signal may originate directly from a site security video camera or via a live antenna signal.
A remote pointer facility shall be provided to allow the operator to use the local keyboard and mouse to move the cursor
on the mimic display and interact with the applications. The system shall support upto three operators simultaneously
with a security interlock system to avoid conflicts between users
2.11 FACTORY INSPECTION AND TESTING

2.11.1 General
The Contractor shall advise the Engineer the date on which the equipment is available for factory inspection and tests 30
days in advance. No equipment shall be shipped to Site without written permission of the Engineer
Complied
Before dispatch from a manufacturer‟s works each item of equipment, software and its components shall be tested in
accordance with the relevant specification or code issued by the British Standards Institution or similar internationally
recognised standards authority. In the absence of such a specification or code, these tests shall be performed in a
manner subject to the approval of the Engineer, and may be witnessed and approved by the Engineer or his
representative.The equipment will be inspected by the Engineer and his representative, to ascertain compliance with Complied
the functional design specification, satisfactory finish and workmanship, and relevant functional tests shall be carried
out with simulated inputs/outputs as necessary
If simulated inputs/outputs are necessary then the simulation equipment shall be provided by the Contractor as Part of
Complied
the Works unless otherwise agreed
Subject to the Engineer agreement, the works system tests shall take place according to the program detailed by the Complied
Contractor
Any surface coating applied prior to the initial inspection of equipment shall be considered sufficient reason for its
rejection. Where any attempt to conceal defects is discovered the works may be rejected Complied
2.11.2 Test Plan

A test plan shall be produced for the Engineer‟s approval, by the Contractor, for the factory and site acceptance tests.
The plan shall indicate a logical step by step schedule comprising step, action and reaction, e.g.:
Step 1 Action : Simulate high level Complied

Reaction : Tank Symbol Change Colour
(a) Hardware Tests
(i) All hardware including spares shall be required to pass an agreed preliminary hardware performance test to ensure Complied
known hardware operability before software testing begins
(b) Functional Testing
(i) Functional testing using the system software shall be comprehensive.

Simulation of the inputs and responses from equipment operation shall be as realistic a reproduction as possible of Site Complied
conditions. Systems to which the PLC/SCADA is required to interface with but are outside the scope of this contract shall
be emulated to demonstrate correct operation of the hardware and
software
(c) System Diagnostics
(i) The means of fault detection and diagnostics provided by the system software shall be validated. This will Complied
involve making provision for including a sufficient variety of faults and out-of-range conditions in the system to ensure
the detection processes are adequately tested
(d) The Engineer shall have the option not to attend these tests and to instruct the
Contractor to carry them out on a Self Certification basis. Complied
(e) Three copies of all manufacturers tests certificates, log sheets, performance curves, etc. relating to the tests at
Complied
manufacturer‟s works shall be dispatched to Site for the Engineer‟s approval prior to system installation and
2.12 commissioning
INSTALLATION
2.12.1 Tools
The Contractor shall include for the supply of all spanners, key, special tools, gauges and all other electronic and
calibration tools required for the efficient installation, commissioning and operation of the equipment Complied
2.12.2 Training for Owner’s Personnel

Training shall be conducted by personnel employed by the ICA Subcontractor, familiar with the system supplied,
experienced and trained in developing and implementing instructional courses Complied
The Contractor shall submit information on the training program for approval prior to shipment of the equipment.
This submittal shall include a course outline, time required, course schedule, sample workbook and instructor qualification Complied
information for each level
The Contractor make a workbook on each course available to every person taking the courses listed herein. The
Complied
workbook shall be of sufficient detail so at a later date a trainee could review in detail the major topics of the course
The training times shall be scheduled by Owner in advance so as not to disrupt Owner‟s
ability to operate the equipment Complied
Specialised training shall be provided for a minimum of three of the Owner‟s personnel in the operation and maintenance
of the system at the manufacturers facility or in Qatar, as specified in the Project Specification. The training Complied
programme shall be divided into two segments and each shall consist of at least five, eight hour working days
The maintenance training programme shall be developed for personnel that have electronics maintenance and repair
experience and a general knowledge of computer systems, but shall not assume any familiarity with the specific hardware
furnished. As a minimum, the following subjects shall be covered:
(a) system architecture and layout

(b) hardware components
(c) module switch settings (configuration switches) (d) I/O modules
(e) power supplies Complied
(f) data highway
(g) programmer connection
(h) PLC programming and diagnostic techniques
(i) battery replacement and recording
(j) PC and workstation familiarization and maintenance
(k) troubleshooting (l) disassembly (m) cleaning
(n) component replacement
(o) reassembling.
The operation training program shall include the following topics:
(a) power-up, bootstrapping and shutdown of all hardware devices

(b) interpretation of all standard displays
(c) appropriate actions for software and hardware error occurrences
Complied
(d) use of operator interface displays and keyboards (e) use of printer including replenishment of supplies (f)
manual data entries
(g) creation and editing of graphic operator display screens
(h) loading of any required software into the system
(i) data base creation and editing
System Management:
The training in this area shall cover the following:

(a) the daily supervision of the System: e.g., archiving data, system housekeeping, fault reporting, preventing
repetitive alarms
Complied
(b) system administration e.g., planning and providing system expansion and reconfiguration of hardware,
control of users and privileges, software and hardware fault analysis
(c) Engineering functions, configuration and application programming e.g., additions and changes to the system,
2.12.3 points, displays, and
Site Inspection reports and logs, preparation and downloading of sequence control programs and schedules and
Testing
The Engineer shall have the option to attend the inspection and tests before setting the equipment to work. The
Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, 48 hours before commencing tests
A Site Acceptance Test (SAT) shall be conducted as part of the ICA system validation and shall include all equipment and
software within the Contractor‟s scope of supply. This test shall be conducted after the above equipment has been
installed at the Site and the Contractor is satisfied of the correctness of the installation and of the operation of the
equipment
Particular Test Requirements
(a) communication test
(i) the Contractor shall firstly conduct a test to establish the correct functioning and ability to correctly transmit data
to and from each port on the system communications network. In the event of any problem or deficiency being identified
in any equipment supplied by others, this shall be reported fully in writing by the Contractor to the Engineer
(b) hardware test
(i) demonstrate correct operation of hardware using off-line diagnostics
(c) functionality test
(i) demonstrate the system performance and functionality meets the specification
(d) test details
(i) the SAT shall be carried out in accordance with a test specification produced by the Contractor, and approved by
the Engineer
(ii) test equipment and test software shall be provided by the Contractor to load the system to the worst case scenario
defined in the test specification
(iii) the Contractor shall prepare a test report following the SAT
System Commissioning
(a) where required in the Project Specification the Contractor shall provide staff to work in conjunction with the
Owner to ensure the satisfactory operation in service of all equipment in the system, and to assist the Owner to adjust
configuration data and to develop/modify application programs e.g., sequence controls
System Takeover
(a) The criteria for takeover of the system shall be:

(i) submission by the Contractor and approval of as-built drawings
(ii) submission by the Contractor of all documentation
(iii) submission of all software design and support documentation and the lodging of source codes in a place of secure
safe-keeping and storage with a third Party
(iv) provision of information and examples of each type of report and each item of user-configurable functionality
(v) issue of all relevant test certificates
(vi) successful completion of the SAT
(vii) system commissioning and issue of Final System Test Certificate by theContractor.
Following satisfactory completion of the above, the „Engineer‟ will issue the necessary system takeover certificate
END OF PART
33 45 00 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PUMPS

3 PRIMARY ELEMENTS
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 SCOPE
1 This Part includes specifications for Primary Elements, their design, manufacture, installation and commissioning.
Noted
2 Related Sections and Parts
This Section
Noted
Part 1, General
Part 2, General Telemetry/SCADA
3.1.2 Reference Standard

1 The following standards are referred to in this Part:
BS 907........................Dial gauges for linear measurement

BS 1042......................Flow Measurement
BS 1780......................Bourdon tube pressure and vacuum gauges
BS 1904......................Industrial platinum resistance thermometer sensors
BS 2765......................Dimensions for temperature detecting equipment and their pockets
BS 3680......................Open channel Flow and Level Measurement
Noted
BS EN 50014 to BS EN 50020 Protection

BS EN 60529..............Ingress Protection
BS EN ISO 6817 ........Flow measurement for conductive liquids
3.1.3 Submittals
1 Submittals shall be in accordance with Part 1 of this Section. Complied.
2 Manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications and engineering data including dimensions, weight,
instrument set point and range, ambient temperature and humidity rating, process pressure rating, enclosure Complied.
specifications, installation and wiring diagrams shall be included.
3 The submittal shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The ICA Subcontractor shall submit the final documentation
based on the Engineer’s comments. The Engineer’s comments/approval shall be issued to the Contractor within 21 Complied.
calendar days of the submittal.
3.1.4 Quality Standards
1 Manufacturer. In addition to requirements of Part 1 of this Section, instrumentation and controls equipment furnished
shall be manufactured by a Company regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture of similar
Complied.
equipment. All equipment furnished shall be new and of current design. The manufacturer shall be approved and
designated in the Project Specification.
2 Maintainability. All equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and access to critical parts shall
not require a major dismantling. Internal field adjustments, where permitted or required herein, shall be easily accessible Complied.
upon removal of a panel or cover.
3 Materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the current editions of referenced electrical codes
and standards, and the codes and standards referred to shall be used for establishing the minimum quality of the
materials and equipment supplied and installed. All equipment of the same type shall be products of the same Complied.
manufacturer. Capacities of all equipment shall not be less than that indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Project
Specification.
3.1.5 Warranty
1 The equipment manufacturer shall warrant his product to be free from defects in workmanship for a period of
Complied.
400 days from the date of satisfactory completion of performance test.
2 Warranties and guarantees by the suppliers of various components in lieu of single-source responsibility by the
equipment manufacturer will not be accepted. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the warranty. In the event a
component fails to perform as specified or is proven defective in service during the warranty period, excluding items Complied.
normally expended during operation, the equipment manufacturer shall provide the replacement Part without cost to
Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply for all such spares under warranty.
3 The Contractor shall furnish the Employer with manufacturer’s guarantee and warranty
certificates for all equipment, duly registered with the manufacturer. Complied.
3.2 PRODUCTS
3.2.1 Electromagnetic Flow Meters
1. General. Electromagnetic flow meters shall use electromagnetic induction to produce a dc voltage proportional to the
liquid flow velocity. The flow meter shall be certified intrinsically safe and suitable for hazardous area Zone 1, gas group
IIA to EN 50014, where specified in the Project Specification. Flowmeter shall be pressure tested and calibrated by the Not Applicable
manufacturer and certified. Overall accuracy shall be better than ±0.5 % of the range throughout the operating range.
Repeatability shall be within ±0.2 %.
2. Sensor. Sensor shall have NP16 flanged process connections. Metering tube, flanges and earthing rings shall be of
stainless steel 304 to BS 970. Electrodes shall be of stainless steel
316 to BS 970. The sensor lining shall be of Teflon or equivalent material suitable for the application, unless otherwise
specified in the Project Specification. The sensor enclosure shall be protected to IP68. Screened and armoured cable
Not Applicable
between the sensor and the transmitter shall be fitted and potted by the manufacturer. The preamplifier input impedance
of the sensor shall be a minimum of 105 megaohms to minimise errors due to sensor coating. Ultrasonic electrode
cleaning equipment with all accessories for automatic or manual operations, shall be provided when specified in the
3. Transmitter. Transmitter shall be remotely installed from the sensor. Transmitter power supply shall be 240 V a.c ,
50Hz, unless otherwise specified in the Project Specification. Transmitter shall be microprocessor based with
programmable range and engineering units. Outputs shall be isolated 4-20 mA d.c. and pulse with adjustable span.
Not Applicable
Programmable in-built alarm relays shall be provided for empty pipe, low and reverse flows. Transmitter shall have an
inbuilt digital display for flow rate, total and alarms. Transmitter enclosure shall be protected to IP65. Calibration and
programming kit shall be provided.
3.2.2 In - Line Ultrasonic Flow Meters
1. General. Ultrasonic Doppler type flow meter with nonintrusive sensor permanently bonded to the pipeline. Overall
Not Applicable
accuracy shall be within ±2 % of the range with a repeatability of ±0.2 %
2. Transducer. Dual transducers shall be permanently bonded or clamped on to the pipe line to ensure that locked air
Not Applicable
pockets are eliminated.
3. Transmitter. Transmitter shall be remotely installed from sensor. 240 V a.c. 50 Hz power supply, unless otherwise
specified in the Project Specification. Wall mounted with in-built flow rate and total display. Enclosure protected to IP65.
Automatic gain adjustments to suit pipe line material shall be available. Alarm contacts configurable for diagnostic or low Not Applicable
flow alarm shall be provided. Operating velocity range shall be user selectable. Output shall be isolated 4-20 mA d. and
facility for connecting industrial standard fieldbus.
3.2.3 Rotameters
1. Rotameters shall have borosilicate glass metering tube, stainless steel 316 float and wetted Parts to BS 970, scale shall
have black markings on white background with a nominal length of 250 mm. Graduation units shall be as specified in
Not Applicable
the Project Specification. Flanged process connection. 2 % accuracy and 10:1 rangeability. Glass tube shall be
easily removable for cleaning.
3.2.4 Venturi Flumes
1. Rectangular flumes used for open channel flow measurement to BS 3680 Part 4c, shall be moulded in a single GRP
piece with 5 mm thick walls, reinforcing ribs and internal removable blocking to prevent distortion during shipment.
Provide staff gauge, 50 mm width by full depth with 1 mm increments recessed into flume. The flume shall be self Not Applicable
supporting and be provided with an adequate number of lugs integral to the structure to enable the flume to be cast into
a reinforced concrete channel without additional internal or external supports.
2. U-throated flumes to BS 3680 Part 4C, shall be used for measurement of flows in sewers and other conduits running
Not Applicable
partly full.
3.2.5 Flow Switches

1. General. Flow switches shall sense an adjustable preset flow rate of fluid in a pipe and operate a SPDT switch to
actuate alarms or control circuits. The switch shall be rated for 1 ampere load at 110 V a.c., 50 Hz or 1 Ampere at 30 V Not Applicable
d.c.
2. Vane type flow switches shall be housed in a watertight case, unless explosion proof is specified in the Project
Specification, with electrical conduit connection. Switches for mounting in 40 mm pipe or larger shall be fitted for BSP
thread mounting directly in the pipe. Smaller sizes shall be supplied mounted on a pipe fitting with female BSP threads.
Not Applicable
The switch assembly shall be isolated form the flow by a diaphragm or suitable seal. The actuator vane and other wetted
parts shall be stainless steel, monel, brass or other corrosion resistant material suitable for the fluid in the pipe. These
flow switches are suitable for gases or clear liquid applications only and shall not be used for raw sewage applications.
3. Thermal type flow switches shall be housed in an explosion proof or watertight case as specified in the schedule with
NPT electrical conduit connection and shall be either of the probe type of insertion in the pipe or shall incorporate a pipe
spool for installation in the line, end fittings as shown on the Drawings. They shall operate by means of sensing
Not Applicable
the differential cooling of heated sensor elements caused by flow and no flow condition, and shall be all solid state. The
switches shall be available for pressure up to 14 MPa and shall be capable of sensing velocities as low as 3 cm/s. Wetted
parts shall be stainless steel to BS 970 or other materials suitable for the application.
4. Operating Conditions. The flow switch shall be sized and adjusted for the pipe, fluid and flow rate or velocity shown in
the Flow Switch Schedule. Repeatability of sensing shall be within
10 percent for any setting, and differential shall be less than 4.0 percent within the flow range specified. Set point shall
Not Applicable
be within 10 percent of flow rate of velocity specified. Care should be taken while installing, to avoid locations with
turbulent flow conditions
3.2.6 Ultrasonic Level Measurement
1. General. Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specification, the system shall comprise of a separate transducer and
a transmitter. Overall accuracy shall be better than ±1% of the span with a repeatability of ±0.5%. Ultra-sonic level
measurement is to be accomplished by the use of non-contact, echo-time measuring equipment operating at ultra-sonic
Not Applicable
frequency. The equipment is to transmit pulses, which are reflected back to the sensor from the surface of the liquid
whose level is being measured. Provide equipment with automatic temperature compensation and suitable for operation
in the designated application under the specified climatic conditions.
2. Transducer. The enclosure shall be protected to IP68. Automatic compensation for changes in ambient temperature
shall be in-built. The transducer shall be certified for hazardous area use if necessitated by the installed conditions, unless
Not Applicable
otherwise specified in the Project Specification. The transducer shall be supplied complete with all required mounting
accessories.
3. Transmitter. Surface or panel mounted transmitter with 240 V a.c. 50 Hz power supply.
Microprocessor based transmitter with programmable range and alarms. Transmitter shall be complete with in-built
indication for level or for flow, if used for open channel flow
measurement. 4 Nos. in-built relay contacts, shall be provided for process and diagnostic alarms. Transmitter shall be Not Applicable
provided with an in-built keypad or a hand held programming unit of programming the instrument. Output shall be
isolated 4-20 mA d.c and facility for connecting industrial standard fieldbus.
3.2.7 Hydrostatic Level Transmitter
1. Hydrostatic head type level transmitters shall be used for tank level measurement at atmospheric pressure.
Flush diaphragm type capacitance sensor suspended inside the tank. Sensor shall be certified intrinsically safe and
Not Applicable
protected to IP68. Sensor material shall be stainless steel 316 to BS 970. Two wire transmitter with 4-20 mA d.c.
output ±0.5 % accuracy. Flanged process connection on top of the tank.
3.2.8 Level Sensing System - Air Reaction Type
1. General. The level sensing system shall be designed to operate on the back pressure caused by the level of the liquid
above the open end of a pipe through which air is being discharged. The device shall be capable of sensing a rising or a
falling liquid level and shall translate this rise or fall into a proportional analogue signal. Device shall be two-wire loop
Not Applicable
powered 4-20 mA dc output and facility for connecting industrial standard fieldbus with an accuracy of +/- 0.5% of span.
All equipment such as required to meet the operational requirements set forth herein shall be included and connected to
obtain a complete functional system as specified herein.
2. Air Supply. The system shall operate from the auxiliary air sources specified below. To facilitate control, the system
shall include a strainer, shutoff valve, pressure regulator with gage, flow control valve and flow metering rotameter with
Not Applicable
differential pressure regulator. A 4- way purging valve or equivalent shall permit purging of the bubbler tube while
isolating the pressure sensing line.
3. Piping Connections. A "tee" with a removable plug for cleaning purposes shall be provided to connect the air tubing to
the bubbler tubing in the wet well. The plug shall be readily accessible for cleaning.. The wet well sensing tube shall be
12 mm diameter stainless steel to BS 970 grade 316 S12 and extend to 150 mm below the low alarm level or as
otherwise shown on the Drawings and be supported on not more than 1200 mm centres using stainless steel clamps on Not Applicable
the wet well wall to avoid movement due to turbulence. Static pressure connection to the 4-way purging valve shall be 8
mm polyethylene tubing, enclosed in steel conduit or equivalent protection. The pressure output signal shall be sensed
by indicator dials, pressure switches, electronic or pneumatic transmitters as specified in the Project Specification.
4. Auxiliary Air Supply. The system shall incorporate and operate from internally mounted dual oil-less heavy duty air
compressors, each capable of providing the required air flow. The compressors shall operate in a duty-standby mode.
Not Applicable
Failure of the duty compressor shall generate an alarm and start the standby compressor. Facility shall be provided to
drain out condensate from the system.
3.2.9 Capacitance Level Transmitter
1. General. Radio frequency type level sensors shall sense the varying capacitance admittance of a sensing probe as
function of the level of submersion. Varying capacitance is converted to a 4-20 mA d.c current signal or volt free contact Not Applicable
output as indicated in the Project Specification.
2. Specific Requirements. The type of process medium, temperature range, pressure other than atmospheric,
measurement range, indicators, switches, etc. shall be as specified in the Project Specification. Unless otherwise
Not Applicable
specified the accuracy shall be ±1 % of full scale. The electronics for the sensor shall incorporate circuitry which shall act
to cancel error caused by coating build-up on the probe.
3. Construction. The radio frequency level sensor shall consist of a probe and a solid state electronic unit housed in an
IP66 case for surface or panel mounting. Probes shall be designated for mounting through a threaded flange adapter
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. The probe mounting parts shall be stainless steel 316 to BS 970 and the probe
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation for the application specified. Rigid probes shall be Teflon Not Applicable
coated. Local indicators shall be mounted on the electronics housing and shall indicate in the engineering units specified
in the Project Specification. The output shall be isolated 4-20 mA d.c. unless otherwise required by the Project
Specification.
4. Power. The level sensing system shall either be a two wire transmitter loop powered by the receiver or operate from
Not Applicable
110 V a.c., 50 Hz power supply
3.2.10 Multiple Level Measurement Systems
1. General. Multiple level detection systems shall be used for pump control or multiple level alarm applications. Each
Not Applicable
system shall comprise of one or more electrode assemblies and a controller.
2. Electrodes. Conductivity type electrode assemblies shall have a weatherproof enclosure to IP56. Electrodes shall be of
316S12 material to BS 970 Part 1. Process connection shall be BSP threaded or flanged to BS 4504. The electrode
Not Applicable
assembly shall have a glazed ceramic insulator cemented to the metal housing. The measuring electrodes shall be Teflon
insulated except at the tip.
3. Controller: Controller power supply shall be 110 V a.c. 50 Hz. Provide double pole changeover contact for the
output relays. Controller shall have LED indication for relay status. Zener barriers shall be provided for intrinsically safe
installations when the electrode assembly is located in hazardous areas. Multiple level detection signals shall be used by Not Applicable
the Controller for control of up to 4 pumps or level alarm. The number of control modules in each controller shall depend
on the number of level signals and control contacts required.
3.2.11 Tilting Float Level Switches
1. General. Tilting float level switches shall use the tilting movement of a float, whose specific weight is less than that of
the process liquid, to actuate switches as the level changes. The switch(es) shall be integrally mounted in the float and
connected to a control box by an appropriate, waterproof electric cable. A movable weight shall be mounted on the cable
Not Applicable
to allow adjustment of the setpoint(s). Sufficient cable length shall be provided to facilitate termination in a control or
electrical room unless otherwise stated in the Project Specification. The float shall be polyethylene, stainless steel or other
approved material.
2. Specific Requirements. The desired switching action Pump-up ("pump-down”, or alarm), level set-points, cable length
and optional features shall be as specified in the schedule. Contractor may utilise either a series of floats or a single
Not Applicable
float to provide the specified switching action. The "pump-up" type shall close a contact at a low level and open it at a
high level. The "pump-down" type shall provide the opposite action.
3. The switch shall be rated for 1 A, 110 V 50 Hz or 1 A, 24 V d.c. inductive load. Not Applicable
3.2.12 Level Switches - Conductivity Probe
1. General. Level sensing switches of the conductivity probe type shall use the electric conductivity property of
the sensed fluid to close an electric circuit between two or more sensing probes or between probe and an electrically Not Applicable
conductive tank shell. The level switches shall consist of a probe assembly and an electronic sensing unit.
2. Sensing Unit. The solid state sensing unit shall operate from a power source of 110 V a.c.,
50 Hz, but shall not apply more than 10 V to probes and the current shall be limited to one milliampere maximum. The
unit shall be housed in an IP66 enclosure, unless explosion proof is specified in the Schedule, and shall be for pipe stand
or surface mounting. The unit shall be suitable for direct or inverse operation (i.e. output contacts) operate on liquid
Not Applicable
contact or non-contact. The output shall have two SPDT switches, rated at 5 A resistive load at 110 V a.c., with provision
for latching or non-latching operation, by appropriate connection of the
output contacts, to provide for "pump-up", "pump down" or alarm type operation.
3. Probes. The probes shall be either of the rod or flexible wire type when not specified the Contractor shall select the
type most suitable for the application and submit the choice for approval. Solid rods shall generally be used only where
the installation requires less than 2 m in length. Both rod and flexible wire types shall be insulated except at the sensing
end. Either type shall be suspended from a holder which provides liquid tight connections, and when installed in a
pressure vessel they shall be pressure tight to at least twice the system operating pressure. Exposed probe ends shall be Not Applicable
type 316 stainless steel to BS 970 and holder shall be cadmium plated cast iron, unless otherwise stated in the Project
Specification. The number of probes per holder shall be as specified in the Project Specification. The holder mount type
(i.e. pipe threaded, flanged or conduit style) shall be selected to suit the installation unless otherwise specified in the
3.2.13 Electronic Pressure Transmitters
1. General. Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specification, the instrument shall be a two-wire loop powered
Grade316S31 to BS 970 and the enclosure protected to IP67. Complete with flush diaphragm or remote seal sensing
system. To achieve optimum accuracy, transducers shall be selected to have a range as close as possible to the
anticipated operating range. A datum point shall be provided adjacent to the transducer installation. An engraved plate
Complied.
shall define any offsets resulting from its elevation relative to the tapping point (zero level) and also define the
range of the transducer. All elevation measurement shall be in metres, with the equivalent bar offset shown. Sensors
shall be positioned in a location accessible for safe maintenance. Where separate transducers and transmitters are
used, the transmitter where possible, shall be positioned locally to the transducer to facilitate calibration. Site
operatives shall be provided with a remote readout at a convenient point.
2. Construction. The transmitter enclosure shall be IP65 unless explosion proof is specified in Project Specification.
Complied.
Enclosure and wetted surface material shall be stainless steel to BS 970 or as indicated in the Project Specification.
3.2.14 Electronic Differential Pressure Transmitters

1. General. Electronic differential transmitters shall convert a differential pressure measurement to a loop
powered 4 to 20 mA d.c. output signal. Range shall be as indicated in the Project Specifications and span shall be field
adjustable over at least a 10 to 1 range. Elevation or suppression facility shall be provided. Overload protection shall be
at least +3.5 Complied.
MPa. Accuracy shall be +0.5 percent of full scale span or better. Integral adjustable damping shall be provided. An
indicating meter shall be provided. Zero and span adjustments shall be provided.
2. Construction. The transmitter enclosure shall be IP65 unless explosion proof is specified is schedule. The process
connection shall be 12 mm NPT. Enclosure and wetted surface material shall be stainless steel to BS 970. Vent drain
Complied.
plug shall be provided on meter body. A 3-valve manifold shall be provided such that the transmitter can be removed
without disturbing piping connections.
3.2.15 Pressure Gauges

1. Gauges shall have bourdon tube sensor with 270 degrees pointer travel. Dials shall have black markings on white
background. Dial size shall be 100 mm unless otherwise specified. Wetted Parts and case shall be 316 stainless steel to
BS 970. Accuracy shall be ±1 %. Not Applicable
1/2 inch NPT process connection unless otherwise specified. Pressure range and units shall be as specified in the Project
Specification.
2. Isolation diaphragm shall be stainless steel 316 to BS 970 with silicone fill, pulsation dampeners or vibration
Not Applicable
snubbers shall be provided where specified in the Project Specification.
3.2.16 Vacuum Gauges
1. Gauges shall have bourdon tube sensor with 270 degrees pointer travel. Dials shall have black marking son white
background. Dial size shall be 100 mm unless otherwise specified. Wetted Parts and case shall be stainless steel 316 to
Not Applicable
BS 970. Accuracy shall be ±1 %. 1/2 inch NPT process connection unless otherwise specified. 0-760 mm HgA range
unless otherwise specified in the Project Specification. Cases shall be black phenolic.
3.2.17 Pressure Switches

1. Pressure switches shall have a diaphragm type sensor with a switching differential adjustable within 25 % of the range.
Contact shall be micro switch SPDT rated 110 V a.c. 5A, 30 V d.c.
Not Applicable
2A. Accuracy shall be ±1 % of span. Stainless steel enclosure certified explosion proof where specified in the Project
Specification.
3.2.18 Limit Switches
1. Limit switches shall be provided to sense the limiting positions of equipment, such as valves.
The switches shall be non-contact reed type, magnetically coupled to the actuating device. SPST contacts shall be rated
Not Applicable
110 V a.c. 3A. Reed switch shall have a life expectancy of one
million operations.
3.2.19 Temperature Sensors
1. General. Temperature sensors shall be (RTD) platinum resistance element. RTD sensors shall have a temperature
Complied.
resistance relationship and tolerances for 100 ohm platinum resistance element to BS 1904.
2. Construction. Temperature sensors shall be equipped with accessory equipment as specified in the Schedule. In
general, accessory equipment shall consist of general purpose, or explosion proof connection heads; pipe extension with
union connectors or bushings; wells or protecting tubes and spring-loading assemblies. Well or protecting tube material Complied.
shall be to BS 2765. Sensors shall be integrally mounted with transmitters to provide a 4-20 mA, loop powered signal,
where specified in the Project Specification.
3.2.20 Gas Detection System
1. General. Gas detection system shall be rack-mounted. The system shall measure and display gas concentration and
shall provide audio and visual alarms when preset limits are exceeded. Relay output for alarms and malfunction
indications and analogue signal representing gas concentrations shall be provided. The system shall be configured for fail
Not Applicable
safe operation. Failure of a sensor shall generate an alarm. The system shall consist of a sensor, control module, and
calibration check kit including sensor separation accessories and calibration gas tanks. Sensor and transmitter location
shall be as shown on the drawings and schedule. The gas detection system shall operate from 110 V a.c., 50 Hz power.
2. Control Module. The control module shall amplify the sensor current signal through a solid- state amplifier for display
and alarm functions. The control module shall include a two or three-digit LED display and three discrete alarm levels:
Not Applicable
Low, high, and malfunction. Output relay contact shall be rated at 2 amp, 110 V a.c. and single pole, double throw.
Analogue output signal representing the gas concentration shall be 4-20 mA.
3. Oxygen Gas Detector. The oxygen gas detector shall have a 0-25 percent range, full scale.
The oxygen sensor shall be housed in an explosion proof enclosure. The sensor shall be the electrochemical fuel cell type Not Applicable
and not require the periodic addition of reagents.
4. Combustible Gas Detector. The combustible gas detector shall have a 0-100 LEL range, full scale calibrated on
methane gas. The combustible gas sensor shall be the catalytic bead type. The sensor must have a demonstrated Not Applicable
resistance to degradation by silicones and reduced sulphur gases.
5. Hydrogen Sulphide Gas Detector. The hydrogen sulphide gas detector shall have a 1-100 ppm range; full scale. The
Not Applicable
hydrogen sulphide sensor shall be of the electrochemical type which shall not require periodic addition of reagents.
6. Chlorine Gas Detector. The chlorine gas detector shall have a 0-10 ppm range, full scale.
The chlorine gas sensor shall detect a minimum concentration of 0.5 ppm by volume and a
Not Applicable
maximum response time of 30 s for 80 % of range to 10 ppm gas at 20 deg C. Sensor recovering time shall be 3
minutes for 90 % of range at 10 ppm chlorine.
3.2.21 Guided Wave Radar Level Transmitter
1. The probe shall:
(a) have single rod with extended flexible wire, minimum probe diameter 6mm and constructed of stainless steel to
BS970-1 Grade316S31 (partially replaced by BS EN
10084);
Not Applicable
(b) have flange mounted and threaded process connections;
(c) be able to work with ambient rating of 1500C at 20 bar, for a dieletric range of 10-100; (d) have ingress
protection and hazardous area protection and shall meet the CE
requirements on Electromagenetic compatibility
(e) be energised in an intrinsically safe way.

2. The transmitter shall:
(a) (a) have locally remote wall/post mounting with a flexible connection to the probe head; (b) (b) give a 4-20mA
output with a resolution of 0.01mA;
(c) (c) have a push button keypad and a HART communicator, with menu language Not Applicable
English;
(d) (d) have ingress protection and hazardous area protection and shall meet the CE
requirements on Electromagenetic compatibility.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1 General
1. Installation, testing and commissioning shall be in accordance with Part 1 of this Section. Complied.
3.3.2 Testing and Final Acceptance
1. All the primary elements shall be calibrated and tested prior to final acceptance, in accordance with Part 1 of
Complied.
this Section.
3.3.3 Spare Parts and Tools
1. Spare Parts for all instruments listed in the schedules shall be provided for two (2) years of normal service. Refer to Shall be as per the project
Complied as Noted
Part 1 of this Section for additional spare parts requirements. specifications.
PART-4 PANEL MOUNTED AND MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 SCOPE
This Part specifies the panel mounted and miscellaneous instruments and equipment to perform the required functions in Complied
Unit Responsibility. It shall be the responsibility of the ICA Sub-Contractor as described in Part 1 of this Section to ensure
that the panel instruments and equipment supplied under this Part are compatible with the primary elements and
telemetry/SCADA equipment and equipment specified under other Sections of these specifications, and that the signal Complied
transmission methods are compatible.
Enclosures of front of panel mounted instruments shall be of uniform design and colour scheme wherever possible. Front
of enclosure colours shall be compatible with panel colours and subject to final approval by the Employer. Normally, Complied
compatible standard colours of the manufacturer shall be acceptable.
This Section Complied

Part 1, General.
4.1.2 Reference Standards

The following standards are referred to in this Part:
BS 5515......................Documentation of computer based systems
BS 7165......................Recommendation for achievement of quality in software
BS EN 50081..............Electromagnetic Compatibility
BS EN 61131-3P ........Programming Languages for Programmable Controllers. IEEE 472-1974 ...........Surge protection Complied
ISO 3511 ....................Process measurement control functions - instrumentation symbolic representation
ISO 9075 (BS 6964) ...Structured Query Language (SQL)
4.1.3 Submittals
Submittals shall be in accordance with Part 1 of this Section.
The following shall be included in the submittals: (a) shop drawings, product data, and samples
(b) complete description, specifications, drawings, and descriptive literature on the
equipment.
(c) make and model of each component
(d) number of sizing electrical and control wires and power requirements
(e) complete wiring and equipment instrumentation diagram Complied as
(f) list of spare Parts to be provided per contract
(g) recommended procedure for protection of equipment against damage prior to installation
(h) complete system diagram showing required components, routing through in-plant ductbank system.
The submittals shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit the final documentation based
on the Engineer’s comments. The Engineer’s comments/approval shall be issued to the Contractor within 21 calendar days
of the submittal

Manufacturer: In addition to requirements of Part 1, instrumentation and control equipment furnished shall be
manufactured by a Company regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture of similar equipment. All
equipment furnished shall be new and of the most recent design.
Maintainability: All equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and access to critical Parts shall not
require major dismantling. Internal field adjustments where permitted or required herein shall be easily accessible upon Complied As Per the technical submital
removal of a panel or cover.
Complied As Per the technical submital
Materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the current editions of referenced electrical codes and
standards, and the codes and standards referred to shall be used for establishing the minimum quality of the materials
and equipment supplied and installed. All equipment of the same type shall be products of the same manufacturer.
4.1.5 Manufacturers Test Certificates
Manufacturers shall test and calibrate each input/output to operate within specified limits Calibration and compliance
certificates provided by the manufacturer, shall be authenticated by the Contractor and submitted to the Employer Complied
4.1.6 Approved Manufacturers

All ICA equipment shall be provided by approved, prequalified manufacturers and suppliers designated in the Project
Specification. Complied
4.2 PRODUCTS
4.2.1 Digital Indicators and Totalizers

Digital indicators shall be panel mounted type. 96 mm (w) by 48 mm (H) dimensions. 110 V a.c. 50 Hz power supply. 4
1/2 digit LED or backlit LCD display for process variable. Range shall be programmable in Engineering units. Input shall
be 4-20 mA d.c. or volt free contact as specified in the Project Specification. Loop power for 2-wire transmitter shall be NA
provided as required. At least two programmable alarm contacts for high or low alarms. Totalizers shall have 8 digit
display with manual reset facility.
4.2.2 Trip Amplifiers
Trip Amplifiers shall be surface or rack mounted with 110 V a.c. 50 Hz power supply. Input shall be 4-20 mA d.c. 1 or 2
independent adjustable set points shall be provided as specified in the Project Specification. Outputs shall be SPDT relay NA
contacts rated 110 V a.c. 5A.
4.2.3 Relays-Electromagnetic Type
1 Relays shall be provided as necessary to perform switching functions required of control panels and other control
NA
circuits.
2 Control Relays. Control relays shall be provided for the control and alarm circuits as indicated in the Project
Specifications. The relays shall be electrically held, 50 Hz, continuous duty, multiple connected to 110 V a.c. control
circuits and mounted inside control panels or separate metal enclosures as indicated. Enclosures shall be IP66. The relay NA
base assembly shall accept from 1 through 8 convertible poles. Relays shall be attached to pre-shaped mounting
channels with captive screws.
4.2.4 Timers
1 Timers shall be provided as specified herein or indicated in the Project Specifications. Timers shall have four types of
operation: (1) On Delay (2) Off-Delay (3) Single Shot, and (4) Duty Cycle timers. Time ranges shall be as shown in the NA
2 Panel mounted timers shall be of the motor driven adjustable type with dials and presentable pointers. The timers shall
operate from 110 V, single-phase, 50 Hz power and shall be of the square bezel type for flush panel mounting. Output
contacts shall be double throw and rated for 10 A at 110 V a.c.. The number of contact sets shall be sufficient to perform
the required control functions. Where more contacts are required than supplied as commercial standards, control
NA
relays of equal rating shall be used to supplement the timer contacts. When specified, relay contacts shall be supplied as
Part of the timer and shall be operated by the timer control power independently of the timed contacts. Repeatability of
the preset time delays shall be within ± 2%. Timers shall be of the plug-in type and enclosed in dust-proof cases.
Connection shall be by numbered screw terminals in the rear of the timer connector
3 On delay timers. When a start signal is applied, the timing cycle begins. Output contacts change state after the time
NA
delay is completed. Contacts shall return to original state when a reset signal is applied or power is removed.
4 Off delay timers. When a start signal is applied, the output contacts change state immediately. When the
start signal is removed, the timing cycle begins and the output contacts return to the original state when the cycle is NA
completed. Timer shall be reset by a reset signal or by removal of power.
5 One shot timers. When a start signal is applied, the output contacts change state immediately and the timing
cycle begins. The output contacts return to the original state when the cycle is completed. Timer shall be reset by a NA
reset signal or by removal of power.
6 Duty Cycle timers. Two timer cycles shall be incorporated. When a start signal is applied, the first timing cycle beings.
The output Contacts change state at the end of the cycle and the next timing cycle begins. When this delay is completed
NA
the output contacts return to the original state. This sequence is repeated until a reset signal is applied or power is
removed.
4.2.5 Running Time Meters
1 Running time meters shall be of the synchronous motor driven type having a minimum of six (6) decimal digits where
the least significant digit shall represent tenths (1/10's) of hours. Unless specified otherwise in the Project Specification,
NA
they shall not be equipped with a reset button. They shall be for panel mounting with a square bezel approximately 60
mm on a side. Motor voltage shall be 110 V a.c.
4.2.6 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC’s)
1See Section 10, Part 2, Telemetry/SCADA for PLC specifications. Complied
2 PLC’s shall be installed inside Local Control Panels or in separate cubicles, as specified in the Project Specification. Complied
3 Data base development and system configuration shall be the Contractor’s and the ICA Subcontractor’s responsibility.
The data base developed by using the P&IDs and I/O point list shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to Complied
installation in the operating system
4.2.7 Alarm Annunciators
1 All windows in the alarm and status annunciator shall be nominally 36 mm by 76 mm, of white plastic, and rear lighted
with two low voltage, heavy filament lamps. The plastic windows shall be engraved with black letters in accordance with
the Drawings. The windows shall be removable from the front for lamp replacement. The lamp units and electronic
drivers shall be in one case, unless otherwise approved in writing, with a removable cover and designed for panel
mounting. The lamps shall be mounted such that replacement is possible from the front of the annunciator panel without
tools. Lamp sockets and mountings shall be robustly constructed, so as not to be loosened or misaligned when lamps are
replaced. The windows shall be in rows of six, unless otherwise shown. The monitoring modules shall be of all solid state
plug-in design. There shall be sufficient electronic modules to drive all required annunciator windows, including
spares. When specified, provide repeater contacts terminated on a terminal strip for externally monitoring each alarm
status. The annunciator power supply shall be sufficient to drive all required loads. Alarm points shall be driven by
modules with the operating sequence shown below. The windows for status indication, when specified shall be off and
steady on only, colour shall be white or as shown in Table 4.1.
2 The alarm and status actuators shall be contacts or as shown on the Drawings. The annunciator shall accept either
NA
Normally Open (N.O.) or Normally closed (N.C) contacts. The sensing voltage shall not exceed 24 V d.c. The units shall
be supplied with audible- flasher cards as required that shall operate on receipt of alarms from any of the alarm points to
the panel. A buzzer shall be provided and mounted in the control panel. A horn in a weather proof housing shall be
provided for external mounting when specified. On receipt of any alarm the monitor card shall cause the flasher to flash
the appropriate indicating window and sound the alarm.
3 There shall be a test button and an acknowledge button. The test button shall actuate all alarm and status points and
sound the audible alarm. The acknowledge button shall perform the functions as outlined in the operational sequence, but
shall not prevent any future alarm points from being annunciated visually and audibly. The unit shall operate from 110 V
a.c.,50 Hz commercial power.
4 When specified, a "first out" sequence shall be provided in which the first alarm in a related group, as designated, shall
flash red while subsequent alarms in the group shall be non- flashing white. A first out reset button shall be provided for
each designated group.
4.2.8 Chart Recorders

1 Paperless video graphic recorders with colour LCD display and internal and external storage, networking capability shall
be provided having the following specification:
(a) screen size 127mm (minimum) front panel to IEC 529 – IP65 standard and cut out size
138mm x 138mm
(b) required number of input channels but never less than two and capable of 4020mA, mV, V, RTD, thermocouple
inputs
(c) minimum scan rate of 125ms and chart speed of 1mm/hour to 1200mm/hour
NA
(d) totaliser with mathematical functions
(e) RS232 serial Ethernet 10 Base T interfaces
(f) data storage facilities with a minimum of 1MB internal flash
(g) integral smart media with 128MB smart card and media door lock
(h) capability of being configured by both PC keyboard and via tactile membrane front door key.
4.3 INSTALLATION
4.3.1 General
1 Installation, testing, calibration, validation, start-up, and instructions shall be in accordance with Part 1 of this Section.
Complied
PART-5 CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL ROOM HARDWARE
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 SCOPE
1 This Section covers control panels for work of the ICA Sections, and all unit panels unless modified under other
Sections.
2 Related Sections and Parts Complied
This Section
Part 1,General
5.1.2 Reference Standards
1 The following standards are referred to in this Part: BS 88..........................Fuses
BS 546........................Electrical outlets
BS EN 60898..............Design of MCBs
Complied
BS 7430......................Code of practice for earthing
BS EN 60529,.............Ingress protection
BS EN 60439..............Low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
5.1.3 Submittals
1 Submittals shall be in accordance with Part 1 of this Section. Complied
2 Shop Drawings. The ICA Subcontractor shall submit shop drawings for all control panels, including details for the
following items, as applicable:
(a) electric power wiring circuits and schematics
(b) air supply piping schematics
(c) electric signal wiring circuits and schematics

Complied
(d) pneumatic signal tubing schematics
(e) fabrication drawings
(f) details of all panels accessories
(g) listing of all panel mounted (both front and rear) instruments
(h) control panel layouts and nameplate inscriptions

3 The submittal shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit the final documentation based
on the Engineer’s comments. The Engineer’s comments/approval shall be issued to the Contractor within 21 calendar days
Complied
of the submittal.
4 Factory Test Reports. The Contractor shall submit from the equipment manufacturer, or his authorised representative, Complied
a certified test report in accordance with the requirements of the relevant test procedure.
1 All equipment furnished shall be of a design that has been used in similar applications and shall be demonstrated to the
satisfaction of the Engineer that the quality is equal to the specified equipment. The manufacturer shall have
successfully designed and furnished similar sized or larger panels for a similar application.
Noted &
Complied
2 The Engineer or his representative may inspect the panel at the factory. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at
least three weeks prior to shipment so that the factory inspection may be arranged. Factory inspection will be made after
the manufacturer has performed satisfactory checks, adjustments and tests. Approval of equipment at the factory only
allows the manufacturer to ship the equipment to the site and does not constitute final acceptance.
5.1.5 Approved Manufacturers

1 Control panels and all the associated hardware shall be provided by approved, prequalified manufacturers and suppliers
designated in the Project Specification.
5.1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling

1 Control panels shall be assembled and shipped in sections, properly packed to prevent damage during shipment. Panel
sections shall facilitate easy handling and Site installation. Panels and associated instrumentation shall be handled
carefully to avoid damage. Proper lifting and handling equipment and accessories such as grounding straps for
handling electronic cards, shall be used. Complied As Site storage and handling
Noted (offloading) by main contractor
2 ICA equipment shall only be delivered to Site just prior to their installation to minimise the possibility of damage.
Delivered instrumentation shall be protected and not scattered or left unprotected on the Site.
3 Materials and equipment not required for immediate installation shall be stored in a separate store protecting them
from shock, weather, dust and damage from chemical and construction material
4 ICA equipment shall not be stacked unless crated.
5.2 PRODUCTS
5.2.1 Panels General

1. Control panels shall be free standing and floor mounted cabinets of console or desk pattern.
Complied As
Console layouts shall permit the operator to readily observe all instruments. Panel shall be floor mounted.
Noted
2 The panels shall be manufactured to a high standard of quality in terms of visual appearance, colour and finish. The
panels located in the main control room shall have an appearance and quality suitable for a pumping installation Complied
environment.
3 The panel design including colour, style and appearance and detailed specifications of panel instruments shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to manufacture. Complied
4 Control voltage. Panel instruments and controls shall operate from 110 V a.c. power supply, unless otherwise specified Control Voltage shall be
in Project Specification. A separate 24 V d.c. circuit shall be provided for the indicating lamps and panel instruments, as Complied as 240VAC. The dedicated 24 V
necessary. Noted d.c. power supply shall be
Provided
5 Where specified in the Project Specification, panel space shall be provided for instruments supplied by others.
Installation and wiring of such instruments shall be carried out by the panel manufacturer. Coordination of instrument Complied
delivery shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
6 Unit Control Panels for mechanical and electrical equipment can be the manufacturers standard panels. Details of such
panels shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval, prior to manufacture. The Contractor shall be responsible for
Complied
interfacing the unit control panels with the main control panel or central control system, as necessary.
5.2.2 Panel Construction

1 All consoles and auxiliary cabinets shall be fabricated of cold rolled sheet-steel and be of rigid and stable construction
without bows and ripples. The front surface shall be flat and the corners and edges shall be rounded to give a smooth NA
appearance.
2 Panels shall be of sufficient size to enclose all the panel instruments with ample interior clearance to allow for
installation and maintenance of instruments. Annunciator displays shall be located in the top portion of the console
assembly. Control panels shall be of sectional design with provision for easy extension. Pushbuttons shall be provided to NA
enable acknowledgement and resetting of alarm annuciators and lamps on the console.
3 Panels shall be formed of IP55 panel sections and each enclosure shall be a maximum of
2100 mm high, 800 mm wide and 600 mm deep unless otherwise specified in the Project Specification. Each section
shall be fully enclosed including the top and bottom with no visible seams on the front. Externally visible screws and bolts Complied
shall not be acceptable.
4 Each panel section shall be provided with two door rear access. Door hinges shall be knuckle type. Handles and other
hardware shall be chromium plated. Where necessary, removable access covers secured by quick release fasteners shall Complied
be provided to facilitate easy maintenance.
5 Undrilled gland plates shall be fitted at a sufficient height above the floor level to provide easy access under the gland
plate. Suitable side covers shall provide access to the gland plates and also provide the specified ingress protection.
Complied
6 Electrical general purpose outlets for test and repair purpose shall be provided in all consoles and cabinets. The outlets
shall be in accordance with BS 546. Complied
7 All consoles and auxiliary cabinets shall be ventilated mechanically or by natural circulation to maintain the internal
equipment working temperature to below 10°C above ambient. NA
8 Panel lighting shall be provided to ensure adequate illumination for carrying out delicate adjustments or repairs on
small items of equipment. Complied
9 Finish. After fabrication, all external welds must be ground smooth. The entire unit shall be thoroughly degreased, then
filled and sanded. At least one coat of synthetic primer shall be applied, baked on, and sanded. This first coat shall be
followed by two coats of baked-on synthetic enamel. The first coat shall be sanded after baking. The final two coats shall
provide a glossy or semi-matt finish to a colour and finish approved by the Engineer. The average overall finish shall be at Complied
least 1.25 micrometres in thickness. Any minor damage to the finish during installation shall be touched up at Site,
provided such remedial works are to the approval of the Engineer.
10 Panel Earthing. A copper earth bar shall be provided within the panel for earthing of the panel, all the panel
instruments and the cables to BS 7430, code of practice for earthing. Complied
11 Panel Isolation. Isolating switches shall be provided for all incoming power supplies. These switches shall be clearly
Complied
identified, labelled and suitably protected from inadvertent operation.
12 Panel Protection. MCBs to BS 3871, shall be provided for the distribution of electrical power within the panel. The
MCBs shall be arranged to minimise disruption to the equipment operation and also to prevent unsafe operating Complied
conditions. Power supplies from control panels shall conform to BS 5486.
5.2.3 Panel Wiring and Termination
1 Panel wiring shall be carried out in PVC insulated multi-strand cable of adequate grade and rating. Wiring within each
panel shall be done in a structured manner, grouped and supported to give a neat appearance. Complied
2 110 V a.c. wiring shall be colour coded with black-unswitched live phase, red-switched live phase, white-neutral and
green-ground. Signal and d.c. wiring shall also be neatly segregated under an approved colour coding scheme. Wiring Complied
shall be bundled and laced or tied with plastic ties and supported to prevent ragging or damage.
3 All control and auxiliary cabinets shall be manufactured and assembled with all internal wiring connected to terminals
Complied
blocks, requiring only connection to external wiring at Site.
4 Separate terminal blocks shall be provided for incoming and outgoing analogue and digital signals and power supply
connections. Each terminal block shall be clearly identified and labelled. Layout shall permit convenient access to
terminals and wires and enable ferrule numbers to be easily read. Terminals shall be at sufficient height from the cable Complied
gland to facilitate easy routing of wires. Terminals shall clamp the wire between two plates using a captive screw. Where
wires are terminated on screw terminals, insulated crimp spade lugs shall be used.
5.2.4 Instrument Labelling

1 All panel instruments shall have engraved nameplates showing their tag number and service in the English language.
Complied
2 Materials for nameplates shall be selected in accordance with the relevant environmental conditions and shall be of non-
metallic material, with black inscription on a white background.
Complied
3 Name plates on control panels shall be mounted on or near the relevant instruments to ensure clear identification
Complied
4 An additional nameplate engraved with the instrument tag number only, mounted at the rear of the panel, shall be
provided for each panel mounted instrument. These plate shall be attached to the instrument, the panel or instrument Complied
support near the instrument.
5 For panels where opening the circuit breaker does not shut off all of the power, the following sign shall be provided:
"THIS CABINET CONTAINS CIRCUITS SUPPLIES FROM EXTERNAL SOURCES." "OPENING THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
DOES NOT TURN OFF ALL POWER". Complied
Letters shall be 6 mm high, red colour on a white background.
5.2.5 Control Desk
1 SCOPE
(a) This section defines the minimum requirements for the manufacture, supply, inspection, installation, testing
of control desks or consoles required to be used on this Contract. Control desks or consoles shall be of the custom made NA
industrial type and material for construction shall comply with MCC’s panel construction as specified in QCS Section 21
Part 2. The requirements for lockable doors, ventilation fans, anti- condensation heaters etc. shall complied with as
specified in this section.
2 CODES AND STANDARDS
(a) The following list of standards indicates the minimum requirements. Any other standards not listed below
or elsewhere in these documents shall be subject to review and approval by the Engineer.
BS EN 527-1 Office furniture, Work tables and desks
NA
BS EN 1335-1 Office furniture, Office work chair
BS EN ISO 26800 Ergonomics, General approach, principles and concepts
3 SITE CONDITIONS
(a) It is the Contractor’s responsibility to furnish and install the control desks or consoles to withstand and operate
properly under the prevailing ambient conditions as described in the General Technical Requirements. This Specification
serves as a guideline to the Contractor. The Contractor shall include all the necessary equipment based on his previous NA
experience on similar installations. Control desks or consoles shall be able to operate continuously without their normal
physical and functional reliability being affected by the tropical environment.
4 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS AND FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
(a) The control desks and consoles shall be designed so that it is comfortable to use, thus enabling operators to
maximize their efforts, incorporating the latest principles of ergonomic design, as described in BS EN ISO 26800.Monitors
(and instruments if applicable) shall ideally be arranged so that they are all are equidistant from the operator’s eyes.
Similarly, all the associated controls should be equidistant from the operator's shoulder pivot points. This arrangement
avoids any body movement, but demands a convex panel in both planes. If this is not a practical proposition then flat
panels shall be provided which are angled to each other and which require only some limited body movements, such as
bending the trunk or pivoting a chair, to operate the keyboards or view the VDUs (monitors) .The display area shall be
divided either vertically or horizontally. Vertical division shall be utilized for mounting VDUs. If small instruments are
fitted then parallax errors may be introduced are mounted above or below eye level, although this danger can be avoided
by using those with digital displays. In most cases horizontal division is the simplest and gives the greatest area of panel NA
space free from parallax errors within the operator's control. When a large number of instruments or controls are
involved, horizontal and vertical division shall be combined. The desk shall then become a winged console.
(b) Sufficient rack space shall be provided in the base to enclose all control desk equipment and permit access
for installation and maintenance purposes. Cable entry shall be via floor mounted cable gland plates with facility to route
cables through desk sections as required. All servers/works stations shall be placed inside the control desk with lockable
doors. Ventilation louvers and fans are to be fitted in the desk for sufficient air circulation.
5 PANEL LAYOUTS
(a) Where indicators ,Monitors and controls are to be fitted on panels then the actual arrangement must receive
careful consideration. When designing the layout, the center of the various instruments should be arranged so as NA
to be opposite the operator's eye position. Controls should be mounted below shoulder level. Space above this level shall
preferably be utilized to house indicators, or infrequently used controls.
6 DESK SIZING
(a) The design shall such that when the operator is sitting correctly (trunk erect, but shoulders relaxed) elbows shall be
about level with the working surface. Desks used for keyboards shall be slightly lower than one used for general duties, so
as to bring the actual working surface to the correct level. Draw out type tray arrangement shall be provided for
keyboard and mouse. Care shall be taken that the underside of the desk will allow the thighs of an operator to fit
comfortably between it and the top of the seat; a minimum of 200 mm clearance shall be allowed. The front surface shall
be flat and the corners and edges shall be rounded to give a smooth appearance
NA
(b) Desk thickness shall be as specified in Section 21 Part 2 MV Factory Built Assemblies
(FBA’s).
(c) Generous leg space shall be provided to ensure operator comfort. It shall be possible for the operator(s) to move
easily to and from the desk to this end a minimum a minimum of 400 mm clearance is to be provided.
7 SEATING
(a) The seat height shall be no higher than the length of the lower leg when it forms a right angle with the upper leg
and the foot is resting flat, to ensure operator comfort,. An adjustable seat shall be provided to achieve this. If this leads
NA
to a large difference between the eye positions of short and tall operators then as an alternative a fixed height seat shall
be provided which will suit the tall operator together with an adjustable foot rest for the use of others.
8 CONSTRUCTION
(a) Materials of construction shall generally comply with the MCC’s panel construction requirements specified in the
Section 21 Part 2 MV Factory Built Assemblies (FBA’s). Consoles shall be built on a plinth fabricated from rolled steel.
They shall consist of a closed skeletal steel or forged aluminum framework with rigid panels screwed or bonded in place or
alternatively hinged or fixed with quick release fasteners . Consoles shall be prefabricated in the factory. Assembly on
site is acceptable but on site fabrication is not acceptable.
(b) Console sizes shall be determined by equipment sizes, number of operators. Where practicable, the unit shall be
designed in individual modules, which are then bolted together. Apertures shall be sized and finished to accept specific NA
equipment and/or fitted with standard rack mount fixings. All components shall be protected against corrosion by means
of passivation, fusion bonded epoxy coating or high grade epoxy factory applied spray baked finish. Brush painting is not
acceptable. Color shall be a RAL shade as directed by the Engineer. Areas subject to abrasion or wear shall be suitably
protected with replaceable rubber mats, stainless steel finishes, or similar.
(c) The desk or console IP rating shall be IP 54 as a minimum or higher to match the grade of any installed equipment.
5.3 INSTALLATION
5.3.1 General
1 Installation, testing, calibration, validation, commissioning, and instructions shall be in accordance with Part 1 of
Complied
this section.
5.3.2 Site Inspection
1 Each instrumentation item shall be checked by the Contractor upon receipt for compliance with purchase specifications,
damage, shortage and shortage of components. Items shall be repaired, replaced or the vendor notified of non- Complied
conformance as instructed by the Engineer.
5.3.3 Testing and Commissioning
1 All control panels and instruments shall be tested and commissioned by the Contractor according to procedures outlined
Complied
in Part 1 of this Section, prior to final inspection and acceptance by the Engineer.
2 Calibration of all panel instruments shall be tested and corrected as necessary. NA
3 Panel wiring shall be tested to ensure that wiring is done as per the submitted wiring schedules. Correct identification
Complied
on ferrules and tag plates shall also be verified.
4 Panel power supply voltages shall be checked to ensure that they are within the operational limits of each instrument. Complied
5 Damaged or defective instruments and equipment shall be identified and replaced. Complied
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
3. Material Schedule
3.1 Instruments BOQ
3
Sr. No. Line Size Instrument Description Model Code & Description Quantity Power Voltage Instrument Range Units Output Process Connection Make Remarks
ETS ‐ 01, Line Size DN500mm
1 DN500mm Pressure Transmitter PMP51‐AA11JA1SGBRKJA1+PA 3 24V DC 0-40 bar Bar 4-20mA 1/2" MNPT E&H
2 DN500mm Differential Pressure Transmitter PMD55‐AA21BA67LGBHG4A1A+AAPD 5 24V DC 0-16 bar Bar 4-20mA HART 1/4" NPT E&H
3 DN500mm DN500mm Flow Meter DTI200-A14C1A 1 24V DC DN25-2000mm l/s 4-20mA E&H
4 DN500mm RTD for BTU Meter TR66‐ABABDAX10C7A, Insertion Length : 300mm 2 24V DC (-)200 to 600 °C Resistance 1/2" MNPT E&H
Offered with 4‐20mA analog signal output.

5 DN500mm Temperature Transmitter TR66‐ABABDAX10473, Insertion Length : 300mm 2 24V DC (-)200 to 600 °C 4-20mA 1/2" MNPT E&H Integral Display is not selected, can be decided only
after the receipt of Project specification.
6 DN500mm Energy Calculator (BTU Meter) RH33‐AA1A+AAD2E1E2P3 1 100-230VAC N/A kWh MODBUS RTU WALL MOUNT E&H
Offered with 4‐20mA analog signal output. Integral

5 DN600mm Temperature Transmitter TR66‐ABABDAX10473, Insertion Length : 350mm 2 24V DC (-)200 to 600 °C 4-20mA 1/2" MNPT E&H Display is not selected, can be decided only after the
receipt of Project specification.
Energy Calculator (BTU

6 DN600mm RH33‐AA1A+AAD2E1E2P3 1 100-230VAC N/A kWh MODBUS RTU WALL MOUNT E&H
Meter)
Offered with 4‐20mA analog signal output.

5 DN600mm Temperature Transmitter TR66‐ABABDAX10473, Insertion Length : 350mm 2 24V DC (-)200 to 600 °C 4-20mA 1/2" MNPT E&H Integral Display is not selected, can be decided
only after the receipt of Project specification.
Energy Calculator (BTU

6 DN600mm RH33‐AA1A+AAD2E1E2P3 1 100-230VAC N/A kWh MODBUS RTU WALL MOUNT E&H
Meter)
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
3.2 PLC BOQ
4
Sr. No. Description Model Code & Description Quantity Make Remarks
1 CPU 1769-L33ER 1 Allen -Bradley
2 DI 1769-IQ16 4 Allen -Bradley
3 DO 1769-OB16 1 Allen -Bradley
4 AI 1769-IF16C 3 Allen -Bradley
5 AO 1769-OF8C 2 Allen -Bradley
6 SM2 1769-SM2 1 Allen -Bradley
7 PB4 1769-PB4 1 Allen -Bradley
9 ECL 1769-ECL 1 Allen -Bradley
10 CRR1 1769-CRR1 1 Allen -Bradley
11 HMI 2711P-T7C22D9P 1 Allen -Bradley
12 Ethernet Switch JETNET 4510/4510-W 1 Korenix
13 Fibre Trransreceiver SFP100SM30 2 Korenix
14 UPS-2kVA AP160N-2KS 1 G-TEC
15 Battery E912 1 Rocket
1 CPU 1769-L36ERM 1 Allen -Bradley
9 ECL 1769-ECR 1 Allen -Bradley
10 CRR1 1769-CRR1+CLL1 2 Allen -Bradley
1 CPU 1769-L36ERM 1 Allen -Bradley
9 ECR 1769-ECR 1 Allen -Bradley
10 CRR1 1769-CRR1+CLL1 2 Allen -Bradley
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4. Catalogues
4.1 Instruments Catalogues
4.1.1 Pressure Transmitter
5
Configuration summary
Mat. no. Description Quantity Unit
Order code
71086209 Cerabar M PMP51 1 ST

PMP51-AA11JA1SGBRKJA1+PA
010 Approval: AA Non-hazardous area

020 Output: 1 4-20mA
030 Display, Operation: 1 LCD, push button on
display/electronics
040 Housing: J F31 Alu, glass window
050 Electrical Connection: A Gland M20, IP66/68 NEMA4X/6P
070 Sensor Range: 1S 40bar/4MPa/600psi gauge,
400mH2O/1334ftH2O/16000inH2O
overload: 160bar/16MPa/2400psi
080 Reference Accuracy: G Standard
090 Calibration; Unit: B Sensor range; mbar/bar
110 Process Connection: RKJ Thread ANSI MNPT1/2 hole 11.4mm,
316L
170 Membrane Material: A 316L
180 Fill Fluid: 1 Silicone oil
620 >>Accessory Enclosed: PA Mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 316L
Technical Information
Cerabar M PMC51, PMP51, PMP55

Process pressure measurement
Pressure transmitter with ceramic and metallic sensors;
With analog electronics or communication via HART,
PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Application Your benefits

The Cerabar M pressure transmitter is used for the • Very good reproducibility and long-term stability
following measuring tasks: • High reference accuracy: up to ±0.15%,
• Absolute pressure and gauge pressure measurement in as PLATINUM version: ±0.075%
gases, steams or liquids in all areas of process • Turn down up to 100:1
engineering and process measurement technology • End-to-end modularity for differential pressure,
• Level, volume or mass measurements in liquids hydrostatics and pressure (Deltabar M – Deltapilot M –
• High process temperature Cerabar M), e.g.
– without diaphragm seals up to 130°C (266°F), for a – replaceable display
maximum of 60 minutes 150 °C (302 °F) – universal electronics
– with diaphragm seals up to 400°C (752°F) • Easy commissioning without the need for an operating
• High pressure up to 400 bar (6000 psi) tool
• International usage thanks to a wide range of approvals • Easy and safe menu-guided operation
– on-site via display module
– via 4 to 20 mA with HART
– via PROFIBUS PA
– via FOUNDATION Fieldbus
• Device versions compliant with ASME-BPE
• Used for process pressure monitoring up to SIL2,
certified to IEC 61508 Edition 2.0 and IEC 61511 by
TÜV NORD
TI00436P/00/EN/17.12
No. 71190907
Function and system design

Device selection
Cerabar M – PMC51 PMP51 PMP55

Product family
P01-PMC51xxx-16-xx-xx-xx-000 P01-PMP51xxx-16-xx-xx-xx-000 P01-PMP55xxx-16-xx-xx-xx-000
With capacitive measuring cell and With piezoresistive measuring cell With diaphragm seal
ceramic process isolating diaphragm and metallic welded process
(Ceraphire®) isolating diaphragm
Field of application – Gauge pressure and absolute pressure
– Level
Process connections – Thread – Thread – Wide range of diaphragm seals

– EN flanges DN 25 – DN 80 – EN flanges DN 25 – DN 80
– ANSI flanges 1" – 4" – ANSI flanges 1" – 4"
– JIS flanges 50 A – 100 A – JIS flanges 25 A – 100 A
– Flush-mounted hygienic connections – Prepared for diaphragm seal mount
– Flush-mounted hygienic
connections
Measuring ranges From –100/0 to 100 mbar (–1.5/0 to From –400/0 to 400 mbar (–6/0 to 6 psi)
1.5 psi) to –1/0 to 400 bar (–15/0 to 6000 psi)
to –1/0 to 40 bar (–15/0 to 600 psi)
OPL 1) Max. 60 bar (900 psi) Max. 600 bar (9000 psi)
Process temperature range –40 to +130 °C (–40 to +266°F) –40 to +130°C (–40 to +266°F) –70 to 400 °C (–94 to +752 °F)
For a maximum of 60 minutes: +150 °C For a maximum of 60 minutes: +150 depending on the filling oil
(+302 °F) °C (+302 °F)
Ambient temperature range – Without LCD display: -40 to +85°C (–40 to +185 °F)
– With LCD display: –20 to +70°C (–4 to +158°F) (extended temperature application range (-40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)) with
restrictions in optical properties such as display speed and contrast)
– Separate housing: –20 to +60°C (–4 to +140°F)
– Diaphragm seal systems depending on the version
Reference accuracy – Up to ±0.15% of the set span Up to ±0.15% of the set span
– PLATINUM version: up to ±0.075% of the set span
Supply voltage – 11.5 to 45 V DC (versions with plug-in connection 35 V DC)

– For intrinsically safe device versions: 11.5 to 30 V DC
Output 4 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA with superimposed HART protocol
Options – PMP51, PMP55: NACE-compliant materials

– PMC51, PMP51, PMP55: inspection certificate 2.2 or 3.1 or other certificates
– 3A approval and EHEDG approval
– Specific firmware versions
– Initial device settings
– Separate housing
– Broad range of accessories
Specialties – Metal-free measurement with PVDF – Process connections with minimum – Wide range of diaphragm seals
connection oil volume – For extreme medium temperatures
– Special cleaning of the transmitter to – Gas-tight, elastomer-free – Process connections with minimum
remove paint-wetting substances, for use oil volume
in paint shops – Completely welded versions
1) OPL = over pressure limit; depends on the lowest-rated element, with regard to pressure, of the selected components
4 Endress+Hauser
Measuring principle
Ceramic process isolating diaphragm used in PMC51 (Ceraphire®) Metallic process isolating diaphragm used in PMP51 and PMP55
➀ ➁ ➂
➀
➁
➃ ➂
➃
p p
P01-PMC71xxx-03-xx-xx-xx-000 P01-PMP7xxxx-03-xx-xx-xx-000
Ceramic sensor Metallic sensor

1 Air pressure (gauge pressure sensors) 1 Silicon measuring element, substrate
2 Ceramic substrate 2 Wheatstone bridge
3 Electrodes 3 Channel with fill fluid
4 Ceramic process isolating diaphragm 4 Metallic process isolating diaphragm
Ceramic process isolating diaphragm used in PMC51 (Ceraphire®)

The ceramic sensor is a dry sensor, i.e. the process pressure acts directly on the robust ceramic process isolating
diaphragm and deflects it. A pressure-dependent change in capacitance is measured at the electrodes of the
ceramic substrate and the process isolating diaphragm. The measuring range is determined by the thickness of
the ceramic process isolating diaphragm.
Advantages:
• Guaranteed overload resistance up to 40 times the nominal pressure
• Thanks to ultrapure 99.9% ceramic (Ceraphire®, see also "www.endress.com/ceraphire")
– extremely high chemical stability, comparable with Alloy C
– less relaxation
– high mechanical stability
• Can be used in absolute vacuum
• Outstanding surface finish, Ra ≤0.3 μm (11.8 μin)
Metallic process isolating diaphragm used in PMP51 and PMP55
PMP51
The operating pressure deflects the process isolating diaphragm and a fill fluid transfers the pressure to a
resistance bridge (semiconductor technology). The pressure-dependent change in the bridge output voltage is
measured and evaluated.
Advantages:
• Can be used for process pressure up to 400 bar (6000 psi)
• High long-term stability
• Significantly less thermal effect compared to diaphragm seal systems
PMP55
The operating pressure acts on the process isolating diaphragm of the diaphragm seal and is transferred to the
process isolating diaphragm of the sensor by a diaphragm seal fill fluid. The process isolating diaphragm is
deflected and a fill fluid transfers the pressure to a resistance bridge. The pressure-dependent change in the
bridge output voltage is measured and evaluated.
Advantages:
• Depending on the version, can be used for process pressure up to 400 bar (6000 psi) and simultaneous
extreme process temperatures
• High long-term stability
Endress+Hauser 5
Level measurement (level, Function and design

volume and mass)
p
h= r g
P01-PMx5xxxx-15-xx-xx-xx-000
Level measurement
h Height (level)
p Pressure
ρ Density of the medium
g Gravitation constant
Your benefits
• Choice of different level measuring modes in the device software
• Volume and mass measurements in any tank shapes by means of a freely programmable characteristic curve
• Choice of diverse level units
• Has a wide range of uses, even in the following cases:
– in the event of foam formation
– in tanks with agitators or screen fittings
– in the event of liquid gases
Electrical differential pressure

measurement with gauge
pressure sensors
Cerabar M
FXN 520
➀ ➀
Fieldgate Multidrop-Connector ➁
FXA520 FXN520
P01-PMX51xxx-14-xx-xx-xx-001
1 Shut-off valves
2 e.g. filter
In the example given, two Cerabar M devices (each with a gauge pressure sensor) are interconnected. The
pressure difference can thus be measured using two independent Cerabar M devices.
Caution!
If using intrinsically safe devices, strict compliance with the rules for interconnecting intrinsically safe circuits
as stipulated in IEC60079-14 (proof of intrinsic safety) is mandatory.
System integration (except The device can be fitted with a tag name and a preset bus address, see → ä 82 ff "Ordering information"
analog electronics) feature 895 "Identification:" version "Z1" and "Z2".
6 Endress+Hauser
Communication protocol • 4 to 20 mA without communication protocol (analog electronics)

• 4 to 20 mA with HART communication protocol
• PROFIBUS PA
– The Endress+Hauser devices meet the requirements of the FISCO model.
– Due to the low current consumption of 11 mA ± 1 mA, the following number of devices can be operated
on one bus segment if installing as per FISCO:
– up to 8 Cerabar M for Ex ia, CSA IS and FM IS applications
– up to 31 Cerabar M for all other applications, e.g. in non-hazardous areas, Ex nA, etc.
Further information on PROFIBUS PA can be found in Operating Instructions BA00034S "PROFIBUS DP/
PA: Guidelines for planning and commissioning" and in the PNO Guideline.
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus
– up to 6 Cerabar M for Ex ia, CSA IS and FM IS applications
– up to 22 Cerabar M for all other applications, e.g. in non-hazardous areas, Ex nA, etc.
Further information on FOUNDATION Fieldbus, such as requirements for bus system components can be
found in Operating Instructions BA00013S "FOUNDATION Fieldbus Overview".
Endress+Hauser 7
Operating conditions (installation)

General installation • The position-dependent zero point shift can be corrected:
instructions – directly at the device via operating keys on the electronic insert
– directly at the device via operating keys on the display (except analog electronics)
– via digital communication if the cover is not open (except analog electronics)
Note!
In hazardous areas, comply strictly with the safety instructions when the housing cover is closed and open.
• Endress+Hauser offers a mounting bracket for installing the device on pipes or walls.
See also → ä 26, "Wall and pipe mounting" section.
• Use flushing rings for flange and cell diaphragm seals if medium buildup or clogging can be expected at the
diaphragm seal connection. The flushing ring can be inserted between the process connection and the
diaphragm seal. Thanks to the two lateral flushing bore holes, material buildup in front of the process
isolating diaphragm can be rinsed away and the pressure chamber can be ventilated.
• To guarantee the leak-tightness of the transmitter, Endress+Hauser recommends that only genuine cable
glands be used (also available as spare parts).
Measuring arrangement for Cerabar M transmitters without diaphragm seals are mounted as per the norms for a manometer
devices without diaphragm (DIN EN 837-2). We recommend the use of shutoff devices and siphons. The orientation depends on the
seal – PMC51, PMP51 measuring application.
Pressure measurement in gases

• Mount Cerabar M with shutoff device above the tapping point so that any condensate can flow into the
process.
Pressure measurement in steams

• Mount Cerabar M with siphon above the tapping point.
• Fill the siphon with liquid before commissioning.
The siphon reduces the temperature to almost the ambient temperature.
Pressure measurement in liquids

• Mount Cerabar M with shutoff device below or at the same level as the tapping point.
Level measurement
• Mount Cerabar M below the lowest measuring point (zero point of the measurement).
• Do not mount the device at the following positions: In the filling curtain, in the tank outlet or at a point in
the container which could be affected by pressure pulses from an agitator or a pump.
• The calibration and functional test can be carried out more easily if you mount the device downstream of a
shutoff device.
Measuring arrangement for • → ä 76, "Planning instructions for diaphragm seal systems" section.
devices with diaphragm seal
– PMP55
Wall and pipe mounting For installing the device on pipes or walls, Endress+Hauser provides a mounting bracket which is included in
the scope of supply or can be ordered as a separate accessory (part no. 71102216).
For the dimensions, see → ä 66.
26 Endress+Hauser
"Separate housing" version With the "separate housing" version, you are able to mount the housing with the electronics insert at a distance
from the measuring point. This version allows for trouble-free measurement:
• Under particularly difficult measuring conditions (at installation locations that are cramped or difficult to
access)
• If extreme cleaning of the measuring point is required
• If the measuring point is exposed to vibrations
• For space-saving installations
You can choose between different cable versions:
• PE (2 m (6.6 ft), 5 m (16 ft) and 10 m (33 ft))
• FEP (5 m (16 ft)).
→ ä 82 ff, feature 600, "Separate housing".
For the dimensions, → ä 66.
➃
➂ IP xx
FEP cable: (see chapter
IP 69K “Ordering information”)
IP 66/68 NEMA 4/6P
PE cable:
IP 66/68 NEMA 4/6P
➀
➁
r ³ 120 mm
P01-PMx5xxxx-11-xx-xx-en-002
In the case of the "separate housing" version, the sensor is delivered with the process connection and cable ready
mounted. The housing and a mounting bracket are enclosed as separate units. The cable is provided with a socket at both
ends. These sockets are simply connected to the housing and the sensor.
1 Process connection with sensor
2 Cable, both ends are fitted with a socket
3 Mounting bracket provided, suitable for pipe and wall mounting (for pipes from 1 1/4" up to 2" diameter)
4 Housing with electronic insert
Degree of protection for the process connection and sensor with the use of
• FEP cable:
– IP 69K
– IP 66 NEMA 4/6P
– IP 68 (1.83 mH2O for 24 h) NEMA 4/6P
• PE cable:
– IP 66 NEMA 4/6P
– IP 68 (1.83 mH2O for 24 h) NEMA 4/6P
Technical data of the PE and FEP cable:
• Minimum bending radius: 120 mm (4.72 in)
• Cable extraction force: max. 450 N (101 lbf)
• Resistance to UV light
Use in hazardous area:
• Intrinsically safe installations (Ex ia/IS)
• FM/CSA IS: for Div.1 installation only
Reduction in installation height

If the separate housing is used, the mounting height of the process connection is reduced compared to the
dimensions of the standard version (see graphic).
Endress+Hauser 27
r ³ 120 mm r ³ 120 mm r ³ 120 mm
F31 F15
44
ø54.1
36
29
17
81
➀ ➀ ➀
P01-xMx5xxxx-06-xx-xx-xx-000
Oxygen applications Oxygen and other gases can react explosively to oils, grease and plastics. As a result, the following are some of
the precautions that must be taken:
– All components of the system, such as measuring devices, must be cleaned in accordance with the BAM
(DIN 19247) requirements.
– Depending on the materials used, a certain maximum temperature and maximum pressure must not be
exceeded for oxygen applications.
The devices suitable for gaseous oxygen applications are listed in the following table with the specification pmax.
Ordering code for devices1) pmax for oxygen applications Tmax for
cleaned for oxygen applications oxygen
applications
PMC51 2) – devices with sensors, Over pressure limit (OPL) of sensor3), 4) 60°C (140°F)
nominal value < 10 bar (150 psi)
PMC51 2) – devices with sensors, 40 bar (600 psi) 60°C (140°F)

nominal value ≥ 10 bar (150 psi)
PMP51 PMP55 2) Depends on the lowest-rated element, with regard to 85°C (185°F)
pressure, of the selected components: over pressure limit
(OPL) of sensor 3, process connection (1.5 x PN) or fill fluid
(160 bar (2320 psi))
1) Only device, not accessory or enclosed accessory

2) Feature 570 "Service" version "HB"
3) → ä 82 ff "Ordering information", feature 70 "Sensor range"
4) PMC51 with PVDF thread or PVDF flange pmax = 15 bar (225 psi)
PWIS cleaning Special cleaning of the transmitter to remove paint-wetting substances, for use in paint shops
→ ä 85 feature 570 "Service", version "HC".
Ultrapure gas applications Endress+Hauser also provides devices which have been cleaned of oil and grease for special applications, such
as for ultrapure gas. No special restrictions regarding the process conditions apply to these devices.
→ ä 82 ff, "Ordering information PMC51", feature 570 "Service" version "HA".
→ ä 88 ff, "Ordering information PMP51", feature 570 "Service" version "HA".
Applications with hydrogen With regard to materials in which hydrogen formation takes place, hydrogen atoms can diffuse through the
metallic process isolating diaphragm. This can result in incorrect measurement results.
Endress+Hauser offers process isolating diaphragms with a gold/rhodium coating for such instances.
→ ä 87 ff "Ordering information PMP51" and
→ ä 92 ff "Ordering information PMP55", feature 170 "Membrane Material" version "M".
28 Endress+Hauser
PMP51 This overview does not mark options which are mutually exclusive.
10 Approval:
AA For non-hazardous areas
BA ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6
BB ATEX II 1/2D Ex t IIIC
BC ATEX II 2G Ex d IIC T6
BD ATEX II 3G Ex nA IIC T6
BE ATEX II 2G Ex ia IIC T6
BG ATEX II 3G Ex ic IIC T6
B1 ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 + ATEX II 1/2D Ex iaD
B2 ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6 + ATEX II 2G Ex d IIC T6
8A ATEX II Ex ia/Ex d + FM/CSA IS + XP
ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6+
ATEX II 2G Ex d IIC T6+
FM/CSA IS + XP Cl.I, II Div.1 Gr. A-G/B-G, zone 1,2
8B FM/CSA IS + XP Cl.I, II Div.1 Gr.A-D/B-G
FM IS/FM XP Cl.I, II Div.1 Gr.A-G+
CSA IS/XP Cl.I, II Div.1 Gr.A-G, zone 1,2
IA IEC Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
IB IEC Ex d IIC T6 Gb
ID IEC Ex t IIIC Da/Db
IE IEC Ex ic IIC T6 Gc
I1 IEC Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb+Ex ia IIIC Da/Db
NA NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6
NB NEPSI Ex d IIC T6
TA TIIS Ex ia IIC T4
CA CSA C/US IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G,
CSA C/US IS Cl.I Div.2 Gr.2 Gr.A-D, Ex ia, zone 0,1,2,20,21,22
CB CSA C/US XP Cl.I, II Div.1 Gr.B-G, Ex d (Conduit seal not required), zone 1,2
CC CSA C/US Cl.II, III Div.1 Gr.E-G, US: Zone 21,22
CD CSA General Purpose
C1 CSA C/US IS/XP Cl.I, II Div.1 Gr.A-G/B-G, Zone 1,2
FA FM IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, AEx ia
FM NI Cl.I Div.2 Gr.A-D
FM IS: Zone 0,1,2,20,21,22/FM NI: Zone 2
FB FM XP Cl.I, II Div.1 Gr.A-D, AEx d (Factory sealed) zone 1,2
FC FM DIP Cl.II, III Div.1 Gr.A-D Zone 21,22
FD FM NI Cl.I Div.2 Gr.A-D, Zone 2
F1 FM IS/XP Cl.I, II Div.1 Gr.A-G, Zone 1,2
99 Special version
20 Output:
1 4-20mA Analog
2 4-20mA HART
3 PROFIBUS PA
4 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
9 Special version
30 Display, operation:
1 LCD, keys on display/electronics
2 Without LCD, keys on electronics
9 Special version
40 Housing:
I F31 aluminum
J F31 aluminum, glass window
Q F15 Stainless Steel Hygiene
R F15 Stainless Steel Hygiene, glass window
S F15 Stainless Steel Hygiene, plastic window
Y Special version
50 Electrical connection:
A Gland M20, IP66/68 NEMA4X/6P
B Thread M20, IP66/68 NEMA4X/6P
C Thread G1/2, IP66/68 NEMA4X/6P
D Thread NPT1/2, IP66/68 NEMA4X/6P
I Connector M12, IP66/67, NEMA4X/6P
M Connector 7/8", IP66/68, NEMA4X/6P
P Connector Han7D, 90deg, IP65
S PE Cable 5m, IP66/68 NEMA4X/6P + pressure compensation via cable
V Valve connector ISO4400 M16, IP64
Endress+Hauser 87
50 Electrical connection:
Y Special version
PMP51 (continued) 70 Sensor range:

1F 400mbar/40kPa/6psi relative,
4mH2O/13ftH2O/160inH2O
Overload: 6bar/600kPa/90psi
1H 1bar/100kPa/15psi relative,
Overload: 10bar/1MPa/150psi
1K 2bar/200kPa/30psi relative,
1M 4bar/400kPa/60psi relative,
Overload: 28bar/2.8MPa/420psi
1P 10bar/1MPa/150psi relative,
1S 40bar/4MPa/600psi relative,
400mH2O/1334ftH2O/16000inH2O
1U 100bar/10MPa/1500psi relative,
1000mH2O/3330ftH2O/40000inH2O
1W 400bar/40MPa/6000psi relative,
4000mH2O/13340ftH2O/160000inH2O
2F 400mbar/40kPa/6psi abs,
Overload: 6bar/600kPa/90psi
2H 1bar/100kPa/15psi abs,
2K 2bar/200kPa/30psi abs,
2M 4bar/400kPa/60psi abs,
40mH2O/133ftH2O/1600inH2O abs
Overload: 28bar/2.8MPa/420psi
2P 10bar/1MPa/150psi abs,
2S 40bar/4MPa/600psi abs,
2U 100bar/10MPa/1500psi abs,
2W 400bar/40MPa/6000psi abs,
99 Special version
80 Reference accuracy:
D Platinum
G Standard
Y Special version
90 Calibration; Unit:
A Sensor range; %
B Sensor range; mbar/bar
C Sensor range; kPa/MPa
D Sensor range; mm/mH2O
E Sensor range; inH2O/ftH2O
F Sensor range; psi
J Customized pressure; see additional spec.
K Customized level; see additional spec.
Y Special version
88 Endress+Hauser
PMP51 (continued) 110 Process connection:

ANSI flanges
AEJ 1-1/2" 150lbs RF, 316/316L, flange ANSI B16.5 (CRN)
AFJ 2" 150lbs RF, 316/316L, flange ANSI B16.5 (CRN)
AGJ 3" 150lbs RF, 316/316L, flange ANSI B16.5 (CRN)
AHJ 4" 150lbs RF, 316/316L, flange ANSI B16.5 (CRN)
ANJ 1" 300lbs RF, 316/316L, flange ANSI B16.5 (CRN)
AQJ 1-1/2" 300lbs RF, 316/316L, flange ANSI B16.5 (CRN)
ARJ 2" 300lbs RF, 316/316L, flange ANSI B16.5 (CRN)
ASJ 3" 300lbs RF, 316/316L, flange ANSI B16.5 (CRN)
ATJ 4" 300lbs RF, 316/316L, flange ANSI B16.5 (CRN)
EN flanges
CNJ DN25 PN10-40 B1, 316L, flange EN1092-1
CPJ DN32 PN10-40 B1, 316L, flange EN1092-1
CQJ DN40 PN10-40 B1, 316L, flange EN1092-1
CXJ DN50 PN25/40 B1, 316L flange EN1092-1
CZJ DN80 PN25/40 B1, 316L, flange EN1092-1
Threaded connection
GCC Thread ISO228 G1/2, AlloyC
GCJ Thread ISO228 G1/2, 316L
GLC Thread ISO228 G1/2 G1/4 female, AlloyC
GLJ Thread ISO228 G1/2 G1/4 female, 316L
GMC Thread ISO228 G1/2 hole 11.4mm, AlloyC
GMJ Thread ISO228 G1/2 hole 11.4mm, 316L
GRC Thread ISO228 G1/2, AlloyC, flush-mounted
GRJ Thread ISO228 G1/2, 316L, flush-mounted
GTJ Thread ISO228 G1, 316L, flush-mounted
GVJ Thread ISO228 G1-1/2, 316L, flush-mounted
GWJ Thread ISO228 G2, 316L, flush-mounted
G0J Thread ISO228 G1/2 seal O-ring, fm= flush-mounted, 316L, adapter 52002643
G1J Thread DIN13 M20x1.5, 316L
Threaded connection as per ANSI
RKC Thread ANSI MNPT1/2 hole 11.4mm, AlloyC (CRN)
RKJ Thread ANSI MNPT1/2 hole 11.4mm, 316L (CRN)
RLC Thread ANSI MNPT1/2 FNPT1/4, AlloyC (CRN)
RLJ Thread ANSI MNPT1/2 FNPT1/4, 316L (CRN)
R1C Thread ANSI FNPT 1/2, Alloy C (CRN)
R1J Thread ANSI FNPT 1/2, 316L (CRN)
U5J Thread ANSI MNPT1, 316L, flush-mounted (CRN)
U7J Thread ANSI MNPT1-1/2, 316L, flush-mounted (CRN)
U8J Thread ANSI MNPT2, 316L, flush-mounted (CRN)
XSJ Prepared for diaphragm seal mount, 316L (CRN)
Hygienic connections
MXJ DIN11851 DN25 PN25 coupling nut, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
MIJ DIN11851 DN32 PN25 coupling nut, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
MZJ DIN11851 DN40 PN25 coupling nut, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
MRJ DIN11851 DN50 PN25 coupling nut, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
S1J NEUMO BioControl D25 PN16, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
S4J NEUMO BioControl D50 PN16, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
TBJ Clamp ISO2852 DN18-22, 316L DIN32676 DN15-20, EHEDG, 3A, ASME-BPE
TCJ Tri-Clamp ISO2852 DN25 (1"), 316L, DIN32676 DN25, EHEDG, 3A, ASME-BPE
TJJ Tri-Clamp ISO2852 DN38 (1-1/2"), 316L, DIN32676 DN40, EHEDG, 3A, ASME-BPE
TDJ Tri-Clamp ISO2852 DN40-51 (2"), 316L, DIN32676 DN50, EHEDG, 3A
TIJ DRD DN50 65mm PN25, 316L
TMJ APV Inline DN50 PN40, 316L, 3A
TPJ Varivent B pipe DN10-15 PN40, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
TQJ Varivent F pipe DN25-32 PN40, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
TRJ Varivent N pipe DN40-162 PN40, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
T6J SMS 1" PN25, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
T7J SMS 1-1/2" PN25, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
TXJ SMS 2" PN25, 316L, EHEDG, 3A
YYY Special version
170 Material of the process isolating diaphragm:

A 316L
B AlloyC
M Rhodium>gold>316L
Y Special version
Endress+Hauser 89
180 Fill fluid:

1 Silicone oil
2 Inert oil
3 Synthetic oil, FDA
9 Special version
Additional ordering information (optional)

500 Additional Operating language:
AA English
AB German
AC French
AD Spanish
AE Italian
AF Dutch
AK Chinese simplified
AL Japanese
PMP51 (continued) 550 Calibration:

F1 Factory calibration certificate, 5-point
F2 DKD/DAkkS calibration certificate 10-point
570 Service:
HA Oil and grease removed 1)
HB Cleaned for oxygen service 1)
HC Cleaned from PWIS (PWIS = paint wetting impairment substances) 1)
IA Configured min alarm current
IB Configured HART Burst Mode PV
I9 Special version
580 Test, certificate:

JA EN10204-3.1 wetted material, inspection certificate
JB NACE MR0175 wetted
JF EN10204-3.1 AD2000 material wetted parts, excepting process membrane inspection certificate
KB EN10204-3.1 wetted material + Ra, Ra= surface roughness, dimensional check, inspection certificate
KD EN10204-3.1 helium leak test, inspection certificate
KE EN10204-3.1 pressure test, inspection certificate
KG EN10204-3.1 PMI test* (PMI = positive material identification), inspection certificate
* Meter body and process isolating diaphragm not included.
K9 Special version
590 Other approvals:

LW CoC-ASME BPE (CoC = Certificate of Compliance)
LI DNV marine certificate
LE GL marine certificate
LA SIL
LR NSF potable water approval
600 Separate housing:

MA Cable PE, 2m/80in + housing mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 304
MB Cable PE, 5m/200in + housing mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 304
MC Cable PE, 10m/400in + housing mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 304
MH Cable FEP, 5m/200in IP69K + housing mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 304
610 Accessory mounted:

NA Overvoltage protection
620 Accessory enclosed

PA Mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 304
P2 Shutoff valve (PZAV), see additional spec
-R1A1 PZAV-R1A1 Shutoff valve, G1/2, C22.8 (O-shape)
-R1A2 PZAV-R1A2 Shutoff valve, G1/2, 316Ti (O-shape)
-R1D1 PZAV-R1D1 Shutoff valve, NPT1/2, C22.8 (U-shape)
-R1D2 PZAV-R1D2 Shutoff valve, NPT1/2, 316Ti (U-shape)
-B1A2 PZAV-B1A2 Shutoff valve, G1/2, 316Ti, 3.1 (O-shape)
-B1D2 PZAV-B1D2 Shutoff valve, NPT1/2, 316Ti, 3.1 (O-shape)
P4 Siphon (PZW), see additional spec
-RA21 PZW-RA21 Siphon G1/2 vertical, C22.8
-RA22 PZW-RA22 Siphon G1/2 vertical, 316Ti
-RC11 PZW-RC11 Siphon G1/2 x weld. horiz. C22.8
90 Endress+Hauser
620 Accessory enclosed

-RD11 PZW-RD11 Siphon NPT1/2 x weld. horiz. C22.8
-BB22 PZW-BB22 Siphon NPT1/2 vertical, 316Ti, 3.1
-BA22 PZW-BA22 Siphon NPT1/2x weld.vert.316Ti 3.1
QA Welding neck G1/2, 316L,
QB Welding neck G1/2, 316L, 3.1, EN10204-3.1 material, inspection certificate
QC Weld-in tool adapter G1/2, brass
QG Weld-in tool adapter G1, brass, metallic sealing taper
QJ Welding neck G1-1/2, 316L
QK Welding neck G1-1/2, 316L, 3.1, EN10204-3.1 material, inspection certificate
QL Weld-in tool adapter G1-1/2, brass
RL Plug-in jack M12
RM Plug-in jack M12, 90deg
RN Plug-in jack M12, 90deg+5m cable
850 Firmware version:

78 01.00.zz, HART, DevRev01
895 Identification:
Z1 Measuring point (TAG), see additional spec.
Z2 Bus address, see additional spec.
Endress+Hauser 91
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.1.2 Differential pressure transmitter
6
Order code
71078221 Deltabar M PMD55 1 ST

PMD55-AA21BA67LGBHG4A1A+AAPD

020 Output: 2 4-20mA HART
030 Display, Operation: 1 LCD, push button on
display/electronics
040 Housing: B F30 Alu, glass window
050 Electrical Connection: A Gland M20, IP66/67 NEMA4X/6P
060 Nominal Pressure PN: 6 70bar/7MPa/1015psi
070 Sensor Nominal Value: 7L 16bar/1.6MPa/240psi
080 Reference Accuracy: G Standard
090 Calibration; Unit: B Nominal value; mbar/bar
110 Process Connection: HG4 NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 UNF7/16-20,
C22.8,H1 Installation impulse line
horizontal Alignment 180deg
170 Membrane Material: A 316L
180 Fill Fluid: 1 Silicone oil
190 Seal: A FKM Viton
500 >Additional Operation Language: AA English
620 >>Accessory Enclosed: PD Mounting bracket, wall/pipe, 316L,
standard design
Deltabar M PMD55
Differential pressure measurement
Differential pressure transmitter with metal sensor
Communication via HART, PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION
Fieldbus
Application Your benefits

The Deltabar M differential pressure transmitter is used • Reference accuracy: 0,1%
for the following measuring tasks: as PLATINUM version: up to 0,075%
• Flow measurement (volume or mass flow) in • Turn down up to 100:1
conjunction with primary elements in gases, vapours • Compact transmitter design
and liquids • Quick commissioning via DIP switches
• Level, volume or mass measurement in liquids • Easy and safe menu-guided operation
• Differential pressure monitoring, e.g. of filters and – on-site via display module
pumps – via 4 to 20 mA with HART
– via PROFIBUS PA
– via FOUNDATION Fieldbus
• Continuous modularity for differential pressure,
hydrostatic and pressure (Deltabar M, Deltapilot M
Cerabar M), e.g.
– replaceable display
– universal electronics
• International usage thanks to a wide range of approvals
• Used for process pressure monitoring up to SIL2,
certified to IEC 61508 Edition 2.0 and IEC 61511 by
TÜV NORD
TI00434P/00/EN/17.12
71190901
Deltabar M PMD55

Measuring principle
2
1 3
p1 p2
4
P01-PMD55xxx-03-xx-xx-xx-001
Measuring cell of the Deltabar M

1 Sensing element
2 Overload diaphragm/Middle diaphragm
3 Filling oil
4 Process isolating diaphragm
The separating diaphragms (4) are deflected on both sides by the acting pressures p1 and p2. A filling oil (3)
transfers the pressure to a resistance circuit bridge (semi-conductor technology). The differential-pressure-
dependent change of the bridge output voltage is measured and further processed.
Level measurement (level, Design and operation mode

volume and mass)
– Dp
h= r g
– Dp
h= r g
– Dp
h= r g
h h h
+ + +
PMD55, H2
PMD55, H1
PMD55, V1
Level measurement with Deltabar M;

left: V1 version; vertical impulse lines; 90° alignment
middle: H1 version; horizontal impulse lines; 180 ° alignment
right: H2 version; horizontal impulse lines; 90° alignment
h Height (level)
Δp Differential pressure
ρ Density of the medium
g Gravitation constant
Your benefits
• Volume and mass measurements in any tank shapes by means of a freely programmable characteristic curve
• Choice of diverse level units
• Has a wide range of uses, e.g.
– for level measurement in tanks with superimposed pressure
– in the event of foam formation
– in tanks with agitators of screen fittings
– in the event of liquid gases
– for standard level measurement
Endress+Hauser 3
Deltabar M PMD55
Flow measurement Design and operation mode
1 1
2 2
+ – + –
Q ~ Dp p1 p2 Q ~ Dp p1 p2
Q Q
Flow measurement with Deltabar M PMD55 and primary element, left: Orifice plate and right: Pitot tube
1 Deltabar M PMD55
2 3-valve manifold
Q Flow
Δp Differential pressure, Δp = p1 – p2
Your benefits
• Choice between five flow modes of operation:
– Volume flow
– Norm volume flow (European norm conditions)
– Standard volume flow (American standard conditions)
– Mass flow
– %
• Choice of diverse flow units with automatic unit conversion.
• Low flow cut off: when activated, this function suppresses small flows which can lead to large fluctuations
in the measured value.
• Contains two totalizers as standard. One totalizer can be reset to zero.
• The totalizing unit can be individually set for each totalizer. This allows independent daily and annual
quantity totalizing.
Note!
For more information about the Deltatop flow measurement system, see
• TI00422P: Deltatop Differential Pressure Flow Measurement with Orifices
• TI00425P: Deltatop Differential Pressure Flow Measurement with Pitot Tubes
4 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar M PMD55
Typical arrangements for flow measurements
A B C
PMD55, V1
PMD55, H1
PMD55, V1
A: liquid in vertical pipe; H1 version; horizontal impulse line; alignment 180°

B: gas in horizontal pipe; V1 version; vertical impulse line; alignment 90°
C: steam in horizontal pipe; V1 version; vertical impulse line; alignment 90°
Mounting example
2
2
1
1
PMD55, V1 PMD55, V1
1: Valve manifold
2: Impulse line
Endress+Hauser 5
Deltabar M PMD55
Communication protocol • 4 to 20 mA with HART communication protocol

• PROFIBUS PA
– up to 8 Deltabar M for Ex ia, CSA IS and FM IS applications
– up to 31 Deltabar M for all other applications, e.g. in non-hazardous areas, Ex nA, etc.
Further information on PROFIBUS PA can be found in Operating Instructions BA00034S "PROFIBUS DP/
PA: Guidelines for planning and commissioning" and in the PNO Guideline.
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus
– up to 6 Deltabar M for Ex ia, CSA IS and FM IS applications
– up to 22 Deltabar M for all other applications, e.g. in non-hazardous areas, Ex nA, etc.
Further information on FOUNDATION Fieldbus, such as requirements for bus system components can be
found in Operating Instructions BA00013S "FOUNDATION Fieldbus Overview".
6 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar M PMD55
Operating conditions (Installation)

General installation • The position-dependent zero shift can be corrected directly at the device via operating keys.
instructions • Endress+Hauser offers a mounting bracket for installing the device on pipes or walls → ä 22, section "Wall
and pipe mounting".
• When measuring in media with solid proportions, such as dirty liquids, installing separators and drain valves
is useful for capturing and removing sediment.
• Using a three-valve or five-valve manifold allows for easy commissioning, installation and maintenance
without interrupting the process.
• General recommendations for the impulse piping can be found in DIN 19210 "Methods for measurement of
fluid flow; differential piping for flow measurement devices" or the corresponding national or international
standards.
• Install the impulse piping with a continuous gradient of at least 10 %.
• When routing the impulse piping outdoors, ensure that sufficient anti-freeze protection is used, e.g. by using
pipe heat tracing.
Measuring arrangement Flow measurement

• Measuring arrangement for gases: Mount device above the measuring point.
• Measuring arrangement for liquids and vapours: Mount device below tapping point.
• For flow measurement in vapours, mount the condensate traps at the same level as the same the tapping
point and at the same distance from Deltabar M.
Level measurement
Measuring arrangement level measurement in open tanks

• Mount device below the lower measuring connection. The low-pressure side is open to atmosphere
pressure.
Measuring arrangement level measurement in closed tanks and closed tanks with superimposed vapour
• Mount device below the lower measuring connection. Always connect the low-pressure side above the
maximum level.
• In the case of level measurement in closed tanks with superimposed vapour, a condensate trap ensures
pressure which remains constant on the low-pressure side.
Pressure measurement
• Measuring arrangement for gases: Mount device above the measuring point.
• Measuring arrangement for liquids and steams: Mount device below tapping point.
• For differential pressure measurement in vapour, mount the condensate traps at the same level as the same
the tapping point and at the same distance from Deltabar M.
Endress+Hauser 21
Deltabar M PMD55
Wall and pipe-mounting Endress+Hauser offers a mounting bracket for installing the device on pipes or walls. A bracket with mounting
(optional) accessories for pipe mounting is included with the device.
Note!
When using a valve block, the block's dimensions must be taken into account.
0
M1 6
1
7/1
54
30
6 6.4
2
54
37.5
.3
41
.4
66
41.3
60
90 41.3
54
135
12
74 74
6
4 10
Mounting bracket for wall and pipe mounting

1 Adapter plate (+ six screws and six washers)
2 Mounting bracket (+ bracket for pipe mounting and two nuts)
Please note the following when mounting:

• To prevent the mounting screws from scoring, lubricate them with a multi-purpose grease prior to mounting.
• In the case of pipe mounting, the nuts on the bracket must be tightened uniformly with a torque of at least
30 Nm (22.13 lbf ft).
Ordering information:
• See Product structure → ä 39 ff: Feature 620 "Accessory Enclosed", option PB and PC
• As Accessorry:
– Adapter plate 7/16 - 20 UNF part number: 71098632
– Adapter plate M10 part number: 71101935
– Mounting bracket and adapter plate 7/16 - 20 UNF part number: 71098630
– Mounting bracket and adapter plate M10 part number: 71101934
22 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar M PMD55
Typical installation arrangements
PMD55, H2
A
PMD55, V1
A: Installation for horizontal impulse pipes; H2 version

B: Installation for vertical impulse pipes; V1 version
1: Deltabar M; 2: Adapter; 3: Mounting bracket
Endress+Hauser 23
Deltabar M PMD55
Oxygen applications Oxygen and other gases can react explosively to oils, grease and plastics, such that, among other things, the
following precautions must be taken:
– All components of the system, such as measuring devices, must be cleaned in accordance with the BAM
(DIN 19247) requirements.
Product structure (→ ä 39): Feature 570 "Service", option HB "Cleaned for oxygen service"
– Dependent on the materials used, a certain maximum temperature and a maximum pressure for oxygen
applications must not be exceeded.
Option 190 "Seal" Pmax for Oxygen applications Tmax for Oxygen applications
A: FKM Viton 30 bar (450 psi) -18 to +60°C (0 to 140°F)
PWIS cleaning Special cleaning of the transmitter to remove paint-wetting substances, for use in paint shops
→ ä 39 feature 570 "Service", version "HC".
Ultra pure gas applications Endress+Hauser also offers devices for special applications, such as ultra pure gas, cleaned from oil and grease.
Product structure (→ ä 39): Feature 570 "Service", option HA "Cleaned from oil + grease".
No special restrictions regarding the process conditions apply to these devices.
24 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar M PMD55
Ordering information
PMD55 This overview does not mark options which are mutually exclusive.
010 Approval:
AA Non-hazardous area
BA ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6
BB ATEX II 1/2 D Ex t IIIC
BC ATEX II 2 G Ex d IIC T6
BD ATEX II 3G Ex nA IIC T6
B1 ATEX II 1/2 G Ex ia IIC T6 + ATEX II 1/2 D Ex iaD
CA CSA C/US IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, CSA C/US IS Cl.I Div.2 Gr.A-D, Ex ia, C: Zone 0,1,2/US: Zone 0,1,2,20,21,22
CB CSA C/US XP Cl.I,II Div.1 Gr.B-G, Ex d, (Conduit seal not required), Zone 1,2
CC CSA C/US Cl.II,III Div.1 Gr.E-G, US: Zone 21,22
CD CSA General Purpose
C1 CSA C/US IS/XP Cl.I,II Div.1Gr.A-G/B-G, Zone 1,2
FA FM IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, AEx ia, FM NI Cl.I Div.2 Gr.A-D, FM IS: Zone 0,1,2,20,21,22/FM NI: Zone 2
FB FM XP Cl.I,II Div.1 Gr.A-G Zone 1 IIC T6 (Conduit seal not required), Zone 1,2
FC FM DIP Cl.II,III Div.1 Gr.E-G, Zone 21,22
FD FM NI Cl.I Div.2 Gr.A-D, Zone 2
F1 FM IS/XP Cl.I,II Div.1 Gr.A-G, Zone 1,2
IA IEC Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb
IB IEC Ex d IIC T6 Gb
ID IEC Ex t IIIC Da/Db
IE IEC Ex ic IIC T6 Gc
I1 IEC Ex ia IIC T6 Ga/Gb + Ex ia IIIC Da/Db
NA NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6
NB NEPSI Ex d IIC T6
TA TIIS Ex ia IIC T4
8A ATEX II Ex ia/Ex d + FM/CSA IS + XP ATEX II 1/2G Ex ia IIC T6+ ATEX II 2G Ex d IIC T6+FM/CSA IS + XP Cl.I,II Div.1
Gr.A-G/B-G, FM/CSA: Zone 1,2
8B FM/CSA IS + XP Cl.I,II Div.1 Gr.A-D/B-G FM IS/FM XP Cl.I,II Div.1 Gr.A-G + CSA IS/XP Cl.I,II Div.1 Gr.A-G, FM/CSA:
Zone 1,2
020 Output:
2 4-20mA HART
3 PROFIBUS PA
4 FOUNDATION Fieldbus
030 Display, Operation:

1 LCD, push button on display electronics
2 W/o LCD, push button on electronics
040 Housing:
A F30 Alu
B F30 Alu, Glass window
050 Electrical Connection:

A Gland M20 IP66/68, NEMA4X/6P
B Thread M20 IP66/68, NEMA4X/6P
C Thread G1/2 IP66/68, NEMA4X/6P
D Thread NPT1/2 IP66/68, NEMA4X/6P
I Plug M12, IP66/67, NEMA4X/6P
M Plug 7/8, IP66/68, NEMA4X/6P
P Plug Han7D, 90deg, IP65
V Ventil plug ISO4400 M16, IP64
060 Nominal Pressure PN:

D Prepared for Deltatop
2 1bar/100kPa/14.5psi
6 70bar/7MPa/1015psi
7 160bar/16MPa/2400psi
070 Sensor Nominal Value:

7B 10mbar/1kPa/0.15psi
7C 30mbar/3kPa/0.45psi
7D 100mbar/10kPa/1.5psi
7F 500mbar/50kPa/7.5psi
7G 1bar/100kPa/15psi
7H 3bar/300kPa/45psi
7L 16bar/1.6MPa/240psi
Endress+Hauser 39
Deltabar M PMD55
070 Sensor Nominal Value:

7M 40bar/4MPa/600psi
88 Prepared for Deltatop
080 Reference Accuracy:

D Platinum
G Standard
090 Calibration; Unit:

B Nominal value; mbar/bar
C Nominal value; kPa/MPa
D Nominal value; mm/mH2O
E Nominal value; inH2O/ftH2O
F Nominal value; psi
J Customised pressure; see additional spec.
K Customised level; see additional spec.
L Customised flow; see additional spec.
8 Adjusted for Deltatop; see additional spec.
110 Process Connection:

HAJ NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 UNF7/16-20; 316L, V1, Installation impulse line vertical, Alignment 90°
HA4 NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 UNF7/16-20; C22.8, V1, Installation impulse line vertical, Alignment 90°
HBJ NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 M10, 316L, V1, Installation impulse line vertical, Alignment 90°
HB4 NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 M10; C22.8, V1, Installation impulse line vertical, Alignment 90°
HGJ NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 UNF7/16-20, 316L, H1, Installation impulse line horizontal, Alignment 180°
HG4 NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 UNF7/16-20, C22.8, H1, Installation impulse line horizontal, Alignment 180°
HHJ NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 M10, 316L, H1, Installation impulse line horizontal, Alignment 180°
HH4 NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 M10, C22.8, H1, Installation impulse line horizontal, Alignemnt 180°
HNJ NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 UNF7/16-20, 316L, H2, Installation impulse line horizontal, Alignment 90°
HN4 NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 UNF7/16-20, C22.8, H2, Installation impulse line horizontal, Alignment 90°
HOJ NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 M10, 316L, H2, Installation impulse line horizontal, Alignment 90°
HO4 NPT1/4-18 IEC61518 M10, C22.8, H2, Installation impulse line horizontal, Alignment 90°
V1: H1: H2:

HAJ, HA4, HBJ, HB4 HGJ, HG4, HHJ, HH4 HNJ, HN4, HOJ, HO4
170 Process isolating diaphragm material:

A 316L
B AlloyC
180 Fill Fluid:

1 Silicone oil
2 Inert oil
190 Seal:
A FKM Viton
C PTFE
F NBR
J EPDM
40 Endress+Hauser
Deltabar M PMD55
Additional ordering information (optional)

500 Additional Operation Language:
AA English
AB German
AC French
AD Spanish
AE Italian
AF Dutch
AK Chinese
AL Japanese
550 Calibration:
F1 Works calib. certificate 5-point
F2 DKD/DAkkS calib. certificate 10-point
570 Service (multiple options can be selected):

HA Cleaned from oil+grease 1))
HB Cleaned for oxygen service 1)
HC Cleaned from PWIS (PWIS = paint wetting impairment substances) 1)
IA Adjusted min alarm current
IB Adjusted HART Burst Mode PV
580 Test, Certificate (multiple options can be selected):

JA EN10204-3.1 material wetted parts, inspection certificate
JB NACE MR0175 wetted parts
JF EN10204-3.1 AD2000 material wetted parts, expecting process membrane, inspection certificate
KD EN10204-3.1 Helium leak test, inspection certificate
KE EN10204-3.1 pressure test, inspection certificate
590 Other approvals:

LA SIL
610 Accessory Mounted:

NA Overvoltage protection
620 Accessory Enclosed (multiple options can be selected):

PB Mounting bracket + adapter plate; wall/pipe mounting, 304
PC Adapter plate, wall/pipe mounting, 304
P1 Oval flange (PZO), see additional spec.
850 Firmware version:

78 01.00.zz, HART, DevRev01
895 Marking:
Z1 Tagging (TAG), see additional spec.
Z2 Bus address, see additional spec.
Endress+Hauser 41
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.1.3 Temperature Transmitter
7
Order code
60022843 RTD Thermometer TR66 1 ST

TR66-ABABDAX10473
010 Approval: A Non-hazardous area

020 Head; Attachment Hinge: B TA30H Alu, IP66/68; plastic
030 Cable Entry: A 1x NPT1/2
040 Neck Length N; Material; Fitting: B 69 mm; 316; N NPT1/2 male thread
050 Thermowell Material: D 316L
060 Extension T; D1; Df; Q1; Q2: A 70 mm; 30mm; 7mm; 17mm; 14mm
070 Insertion Length U: X 300 mm ..... mm
080 Process Connection: 10 NPT1/2 male thread
090 Head Transmitter; Range: 4 TMT180-A11 PCP; 4-20mA, 0.2K;
temp. range to be spec. -200/650oC
100 RTD; Wire; Measuring Range; Class: 7 1xPt100 TF; 4; -50...+400oC; AA,
increased vibration resistance
110 Additional Option: 3 0/ +100oC, 1x RTD + factory
calibration transmitter, 6-points: at
0/20/40/60/80/100% of preset
measurement range
Order code

TR66-ABABDAX10473

090 Head Transmitter; Range: 4 TMT180-A11 PCP; 4-20mA, 0.2K;
temp. range to be spec. -200/650oC
110 Additional Option: 3 0/ +100oC, 1x RTD + factory
calibration transmitter, 6-points: at
0/20/40/60/80/100% of preset
measurement range
Omnigrad S TR66
Modular RTD assembly, flameproof
Barstock thermowell, with thread or flange
Application
• Heavy duty applications
• Oil & Gas processing industry
• Measuring range: -200...600 °C (-328...1115 °F)
• Static pressure range up to 500 bar (7250 PSI)
• Protection class: up to IP 68
Head transmitters
All Endress+Hauser transmitters are available with
enhanced accuracy and reliability compared to directly
wired sensors. Easy customizing by choosing one of the
following outputs and communication protocols:
• Analog output 4...20 mA
• HART®
• PROFIBUS® PA
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus™
Your benefits
• High flexibility based on modular assembly with a
terminal head and customized immersion length
• Extension neck for head transmitter heat protection
• Types of protection for use in hazardous locations:
Flameproof (Ex d)
Intrinsic Safety (Ex ia)
Non-Sparking (Ex nA)
Dust ignition proof (protection by enclosure)
4 0
TI284T/02/en
71078770
TR66

Measuring principle These resistance thermometers use a Pt100 temperature sensor according to IEC 60751. This temperature
sensor is a temperature-sensitive platinum resistor with a resistance of 100 Ω at 0 °C (32 °F) and a temperature
coefficient α = 0.003851 °C-1.
There are generally two different kinds of platinum resistance thermometers:
• Wire wound (WW): Here, a double coil of fine, high-purity platinum wire is located in a ceramic support.
This is then sealed top and bottom with a ceramic protective layer. Such resistance thermometers not only
facilitate very reproducible measurements but also offer good long-term stability of the resistance/
temperature characteristic within temperature ranges up to 600 °C (1112 °F). This type of sensor is relatively
large in size and it is comparatively sensitive to vibrations.
• Thin film platinum resistance thermometers (TF): A very thin, ultrapure platinum layer, approx. 1 μm
thick, is vaporized in a vacuum on a ceramic substrate and then structured photolithographically. The
platinum conductor paths formed in this way create the measuring resistance. Additional covering and
passivation layers are applied and reliably protect the thin platinum layer from contamination and oxidation
even at high temperatures.
The primary advantages of thin-film temperature sensors over wire wound versions are their smaller sizes and
better vibration resistance. A relatively low principle-based deviation of the resistance/temperature
characteristic from the standard characteristic of IEC 60751 can frequently be observed among TF sensors at
high temperatures. As a result, the tight limit values of tolerance category A as per IEC 60751 can only be
observed with TF sensors at temperatures up to approx. 300 °C (572 °F). For this reason, thin-film sensors are
generally only used for temperature measurements in ranges below 400 °C (932 °F).
Measuring system
a0010191
Example of an application
A RIA 261 Field display
– The display measures an analog measurement signal and indicates this on the display. The display is connected
in a 4 to 20 mA current loop and also derives its supply from the loop. The volt drop is almost negligible
(< 2.5 V). The dynamic internal resistance (load) makes sure that independently from the loop current, the
maximum volt drop is never exceeded. The analog signal at the input is digitalized, analyzed and displayed. For
details see Technical Information (see "Documentation").
B Active barrier RN221N
– The RN221N active barrier (24 V DC, 30 mA) has an galvanically isolated output for supplying voltage to loop
powered transmitters. The power supply has a wide-range input for mains power, 20 to 250 V DC/AC,
50/60 Hz to be used in any electrical circuit. For details see Technical Information (see "Documentation").
C Built-in RTD assembly TR66 with head transmitter
2 Endress+Hauser
TR66
Equipment architecture
a0010220
Equipment architecture of the Omnigrad S TR66
1 Insert TPR100, ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in) with mounted head 5 Thread or flange as process connection
transmitter, for example. For applications in non-hazardous 6 Thermowell from bar stock material
areas (except: Ex ia and Ex nA) N Extension neck length
2 Insert TPR300, ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in) with mounted ceramic T Thermowell lag
terminal block, for example. U Immersion length
For applications in hazardous areas (Ex d) A Thermowell length (= U + T)
3 Terminal head IL Insertion length = U + T + N + 41 mm (1.6 in)
4 Extension neck
The Omnigrad S TR66 RTD assemblies are modular. The terminal head serves as a connection module for the
extension neck to the thermowell in the process as well as for the mechanical and electrical connection of the
measuring insert. The actual RTD sensor element is fitted in and mechanically protected within the insert. The
insert can be exchanged and calibrated even during the process. Either ceramic terminal blocks or transmitters
can be fitted to the internal base washer. Where required, threads or flanges can be fixed onto the thermowell.
Measurement range -200 ... 600 °C (-328...1112 °F)
Performance characteristics
Operating conditions Ambient temperature
Terminal head Temperature in °C (°F)
Without mounted head transmitter Depends on the terminal head used and the cable gland or fieldbus connec-
tor, see 'Terminal heads' section, → ä 8
With mounted head transmitter -40 to 85 °C (-40 to 185 °F)
With mounted head transmitter and display -20 to 70 °C (-4 to 158 °F)
Endress+Hauser 3
TR66
Process pressure (static)
Process connection Standard Max. process pressure
Thread ANSI B1.20.1 75 bar (1088 psi)
Flange ASME B16.5 Depending on flange pressure stage

150, 300 or 600 psi
Permitted flow velocity depending on the immersion length

The highest flow velocity tolerated by the thermometer diminishes with increasing immersion length exposed
to the stream of the fluid. In addition it is dependent on the diameter of the thermometer tip, on the kind of
measuring medium, on the process temperature and on the process pressure. The following figures exemplify
the maximum permitted flow velocities in water and superheated steam at a process pressure of 4 MPa
(40 bar = 580 PSI).
a0010219
Maximum flow velocity

--------------- Thermowell ∅ D1 = 35 mm (1.38 in), ∅ Q1 = 25 mm (0.98 in), ∅ Q2 = 18 mm (0.71 in)
- - - - - - - - Thermowell ∅ D1 = 30 mm (1.18 in), ∅ Q1 = 20 mm (0.8 in), ∅ Q2 = 14 mm (0.55 in)
A Medium water at T = 50 °C (122 °F) U Immersion length thermowell, material 1.4401 (316)
B Medium superheated steam at T = 400 °C (752 °F) v Flow velocity
! Note!
Information on the thermowell dimensions ∅ Q1, ∅ Q2, ∅ D1, ∅ Df and U, → ä 10.
Shock and vibration resistance

4g / 2 to 150 Hz as per IEC 60068-2-6
4 Endress+Hauser
TR66
Accuracy RTD corresponding to IEC 60751
Class max. Tolerances Temperature range Characteristics

(°C)
RTD max. error type TF - range: -50 to +400 °C
Cl. A ± (0.15 + 0.002 · |t|1)) -50 °C to +250 °C
Cl. AA, ± (0.1 + 0.0017 · |t|1)) 0 °C to +150 °C

former 1/3
Cl. B
Cl. B ± (0.3 + 0.005 · |t|1)) -50 °C to +400 °C
RTD max. error type WW - range: -200 to +600 °C
Cl. A ± (0.15 + 0.002 · |t|1)) -200 °C to +600 °C
Cl. AA, ± (0.1 + 0.0017 · |t|1)) 0 °C to +250 °C

former
1/3 Cl. B
Cl. B ± (0.3 + 0.005 · |t|1)) -200 °C to +600 °C
a0008588-en
1) |t| = absolute value °C
! Note!
For measurement errors in °F, calculate using equations above in °C, then multiply the outcome by 1.8.
Response time Tests in water at 0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s), according to IEC 60751; 10 K temperature step change. Measuring probe
Pt100, TF/WW:
∅ Q1 thermowell Response time ∅ Q2 tapered tip
20 mm (0.79 in) t50 34 s 14 mm (0.55 in)

t90 105 s
25 mm (0.98 in) t50 37 s 18 mm (0.71 in)

t90 115 s
! Note!
Response time for the RTD insert without transmitter.
Insulation resistance Insulation resistance ≥100 MΩ at ambient temperature.

Insulation resistance between each terminal and the sheath is measured with a voltage of 100 V DC.
Self heating RTD elements are passive resistances that are measured using an external current. This measurement current
causes a self heating in the RTD element itself which in turn creates an additional measurement error. In
addition to the measurement current the size of the measurement error is also affected by the temperature
conductivity and flow velocity of the process. This self heating error is negligible when an Endress+Hauser
iTEMP® temperature transmitter (very small measurement current) is connected.
Endress+Hauser 5
TR66
Calibration specifications The manufacturer provides comparison temperature calibration from -80 to +600 °C (-110 °F to 1112 °F) on
the International Temperature Scale (ITS90). Calibrations are traceable to national and international standards.
The calibration report is referenced to the serial number of the thermometer. Only the measuring insert is
calibrated.
Insert: Ø 6 mm (0.24 in) Minimum insertion length (IL) in mm (inch)
Temperature range without head transmitter with head transmitter
-80 °C to -40 °C (-110 °F to -40 °F) 200 (7.87)
-40 °C to 0 °C (-40 °F to 32 °F) 160 (6.3)
0 °C to 250 °C (32 °F to 480 °F) 120 (4.72) 150 (5.91)
250 °C to 550 °C (480 °F to 1020 °F) 300 (11.81)
550 °C to 650 °C (1020 °F to 1202 °F) 400 (15.75)
Material Extension neck and thermowell

The temperatures for continuous operation specified in the following table are only intended as reference values
for use of the various materials in air and without any significant compressive load. The maximum operation
temperatures are reduced considerably in some cases where abnormal conditions such as high mechanical load
occur or in aggressive media.
Material Short form Recommended max. Properties

name temperature for
continuous use in air
AISI 316L/ 650 °C (1200 °F)1) • Austenitic, stainless steel
1.4404 X2CrNiMo17-12-2 • High corrosion resistance in general
1.4435 X2CrNiMo18-14-3 • Particularly high corrosion resistance in chlorine-based and acidic, non-oxidizing
atmospheres through the addition of molybdenum (e.g. phosphoric and sulfuric acids, acetic
and tartaric acids with a low concentration)
• Increased resistance to intergranular corrosion and pitting
• Compared to 1.4404, 1.4435 has even higher corrosion resistance and a lower delta ferrite
content
AISI 316Ti/ X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2 700 °C (1292)1) • Properties comparable to AISI316L

1.4571 • Addition of titanium means increased resistance to intergranular corrosion even after welding
• Broad range of uses in the chemical, petrochemical and oil industries as well as in coal
chemistry
• Can only be polished to a limited extent, titanium streaks can form
1) Can be used to a limited extent up to 800 °C (1472 °F) for low compressive loads and in non-corrosive media. Please contact your Endress+Hauser sales team
for further information.
Transmitter specifications
TMT180 TMT181 TMT182 TMT84 PA / TMT85 FF

PCP PCP HART®
Pt100 Pt100, TC, Ω, mV Pt100, TC, Ω, mV Pt100, TC, Ω, mV
Measurement accuracy 0.2 °C (0.36 °F), optional 0.2 °C (0.36 °F) or 0.08% 0.1 °C (0.18 °F)
0.1 °C (0.18 °F) or 0.08%
% is related to the adjusted measurement range (the larger value applies)
Sensor current Ι ≤ 0.6 mA Ι ≤ 0.2 mA Ι ≤ 0.3 mA
Galvanic isolation (input/output) - Û = 2 kV AC
6 Endress+Hauser
TR66
System components
Family of temperature Thermometers fitted with iTEMP® transmitters are an installation ready complete solution to improve
transmitters temperature measurement by increasing accuracy and reliability, when compared to direct wired sensors, as
well as reducing both wiring and maintenance costs.
PC programmable head transmitter TMT180 and TMT181

They offer a high degree of flexibility, thereby supporting universal application with low inventory storage. The
iTEMP® transmitters can be configured quickly and easily at a PC. Endress+Hauser offers the ReadWin® 2000
configuration software for this purpose. This software can be downloaded free of charge at
www.readwin2000.com. More information can be found in the Technical Information (see
"Documentation" section).
HART® TMT182 head transmitter

HART® communication is all about easy, reliable data access and getting additional information about the
measurement point more inexpensively. iTEMP® transmitters integrate seamlessly into your existing control
system and provide painless access to numerous diagnostic information.
Configuration with a hand-held (Field Xpert SFX100 or DXR375) or a PC with configuration program
(FieldCare, ReadWin® 2000) or configure with AMS or PDM. Details see Technical Information (see chapter
’Documentation’).
Type of transmitter Specification

®
iTEMP TMT18x • Material: Housing (PC), Potting (PUR)
• Terminals: Cable up to max. max. ≤ 2.5 mm2 / 16 AWG (secure screws) or
with wire end ferrules
• Eyelets for easy connection of a HART®-handheld terminal with alligator
clips
• Degree of protection NEMA 4 (see also type of terminal head)
Details see Technical Information (see chapter ’Documentation’)
R09-TMT182ZZ-06-06-xx-en-001
PROFIBUS® PA TMT84 head transmitter

Universally programmable head transmitter with PROFIBUS® PA communication. Converting various input
signals into a digital output signal. High accuracy over the complete ambient temperature range. Swift and easy
operation, visualization and maintenance using a PC directly from the control panel, e. g. using operating
software such as FieldCare, Simatic PDM or AMS.
Benefits are: dual sensor input, highest reliability in harsh industrial environments, mathematic functions,
thermometer drift monitoring, sensor back-up functionality, sensor diagnosis functions and sensor-transmitter
matching using Callendar-Van Dusen coefficients. Details see Technical Information (see chapter
FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ TMT85 head transmitter

Universally programmable head transmitter with FOUNDATION fieldbus™ communication. Converting
various input signals into a digital output signal. High accuracy over the complete ambient temperature range.
Swift and easy operation, visualization and maintenance using a PC directly from the control panel, e. g. using
operating software such as ControlCare from Endress+Hauser or the NI Configurator from National
Instruments.
Endress+Hauser 7
TR66
iTEMP® TMT84 and TMT85 • Spring range L ≥ 5 mm (0.2"), see Pos. A

• Fixing elements for pluggable measured value display, see Pos. B
• Interface for contacting measured value display, see Pos. C
• Material (RoHS-compliant)
Housing: PC
Potting: PU
• Terminals:
Screw terminals (cable up to max. ≤ 2.5 mm2 / 16 AWG)
or spring terminals (e. g. from 0.25 mm2 to 0.75 mm2/ 24 AWG to 18 AWG
for flexible wires with wire-end ferrules with plastic ferrule)
a0007301-en
Pluggable display TID10 as option • Displays the actual measured value and the measurement point identification
• Displays fault events in inverse color with channel ident and diagnostics code
• DIP-switches on the rear for hardware set-up, e. g. PROFIBUS® PA bus
address
! Note!
Display is only available with suitable terminal head with display window, e.g.
TA30
a0009955
Terminal head Internal geometry according to DIN 43729, form B. It is compliant with EN 50014/18 and EN 50281-1-1
standards (EEx-d certification for explosion proof type of protection).
! Note!
In the XP version, the thermometer is available without a cable gland or fieldbus connector.
All dimensions in mm (inch).
TA21H Specification
• Protection class: IP66 to IP68

• Max. temperature: 100 °C (212 °F) rubber
(observe max. permitted temperature of the cable gland!)
• Material: aluminum alloy; rubber seal under the cover
• Double threaded cable entry:
½" NPT, ¾" NPT, M20 or G½"
• Extension neck / thermowell connection:
M24x1.5, G½" or ½" NPT
• Head color: blue
• Cap color: grey
• Weight: 600 g (21.16 oz)
a0010194
8 Endress+Hauser
TR66
TA30H Specification
• Flameproof (XP) version, explosion-protected, captive screw cap

• Protection class: IP 66/68
• Max. temperature: 150 °C (300 °F) for rubber seal
• Material: aluminum; polyester powder coated
• Cable entry glands:
½" NPT, ¾" NPT, M20x1.5, only thread G½"; plug: M12x1 PA,
7/8" FF
• Neck tube/thermowell connection: ½" NPT
• Color of head: blue, RAL 5012
• Color of cap: gray, RAL 7035
• Weight: 640 g (22.6 oz)
a0009832
TA30H with display window in cover Specification

½" NPT, ¾" NPT, M20x1.5, only thread G½";
plug: M12x1 PA, 7/8" FF
• Weight: 860 g (30.33 oz)
• Head transmitter optionally available with TID10 display
a0009831
Maximum ambient temperatures for cable glands and fieldbus connectors
Type Temperature range

Cable gland ½" NPT, M20x1.5 (non Ex) -40 to +100 °C (-40 to +212 °F)
Cable gland M20x1.5 (for dust ignition-proof area) -20 to +95 °C (-4 to +203 °F)
Fieldbus connector (M12x1 PA, 7/8" FF) -40 to +105 °C (-40 to +221 °F)
Endress+Hauser 9
TR66
Thermowell All dimensions in mm (inches).
a0010230
Dimensions of the Omnigrad S TR66
1 Insert with mounted terminal block IL Insertion length = U + T + N + 41 mm (1.61 in)

2 Insert with head transmitter mounted N Extension neck length
3 Flying leads T Thermowell lag
∅ ID Insert diameter U Immersion length
A Thermowell length
∅ D1 Thermowell diameter at the thermometer connection ∅ Df Thermowell internal hole

∅ Q1 Thermowell external diameter at the flange or ∅ Q2 Thermowell tip external diameter
thread connection
The thermowell is the component of the RTD assembly that must tolerate most of the mechanical stress
transmitted by the process. It is made from a round bar and supplied in different materials and dimensions,
according to the chemical/physical characteristics of the process: corrosion, temperature, pressure and speed
of the fluid.
The thermowell consists of three parts:
• The lag, usually with a cylindrical shape and standard diameters of 30 or 35 mm (1.18 or 1.38 in) and lengths
of 70/100 mm (2.76/3.94 in), represents the external part of the thermowell and is connected with the
terminal head by means of a neck (usually a nipple, type N or nipple-union-nipple, type NUN).
• The immersed part (identified as U), with a conical or cylindrical shape is situated next to the process
connection in direct contact with the process fluid. The standard diameter of the area below the fitting is 20
or 25 mm (0.79 or 0.98 in).
• The threaded or flanged process connection is the part inserted between the lag and the immersed part and
guarantees the mechanical and hydraulic sealing of the assembly and plant.
The surface of the wetted part of the thermowell is available with a surface roughness rating of Ra = 1.6 μm as
standard (other surface versions available on request).
" Caution!
The maximum total length A of the thermowell (maximum drilling limit) is 1200 mm (47.3 in). Higher lengths
are available only on request.
10 Endress+Hauser
TR66
Weight From 1.5 to 5.5 kg (3.3 to 12.1 lbs) for standard options.
Process connection The standard process connections are threaded or flanged. When the process connection is threaded, the
connection material is the same as that of the thermowell.
Standard material flange: SS 316/1.4401or ASTM A105/St 52.3 U.
On request, it is possible to select different materials, finishings and connections.
Type and dimension of the process connections (ASME B16.5, ANSI B1.20.1). All dimensions in mm (inch).
Type Ød ØD ØL No. of f b Ø D1 A A1
holes
Flange 1” ANSI 150 RF SO1) 107.9 15.7 14.2 - - -

(4.25) (0.62) 1.6 (0.56)
(0.06)
1” ANSI 300 RF SO 50.8 (2) 17.5 - - -
19.1 (0.69)
1” ANSI 600 RF SO 124 (4.9) 6.4 - - -
(0.75)
(0.25)
4
1½” ANSI 150 RF SO 127 (5) 15.7 17.5 - - -
(0.62) 1.6 (0.69)
(0.06)
1½” ANSI 300 RF SO 73 (2.9) 20.6 - - -
155.4 22.4 (0.81)
1½” ANSI 600 RF SO (6.1) (0.85) 6.4 - - -
(0.25)
2” ANSI 300 RF SO 1.6 22.4 - - -

92.1 165.1 19.1 (0.06) (0.88)
8
2” ANSI 600 RF SO (3.6) (6.5) (0.75) 6.4 25.4 - - -
(0.25) (1)
≥ 21.4
a0010224-en
Thread ¾" NPT - - - - - - 19.9 8.1
(0.84) (0.78) (0.32)
1" NPT - - - - - - ≥ 26.7 20.2 8.6

(1.1) (0.79) (0.34)
1) RF SO: Raised Face Slip On flange (flat flange with sealing face).
Further information you can find in the Technical Information ’Flanges’ (TI432F/00).
Spare parts Measuring probe (Pt100):

• TPR100 for general purpose and intrinsically safe model
• TPR300 for explosion-proof model
Both of the probes are made in mineral insulated cable (MgO), with a sheath in 316L/1.4401 stainless steel.
The insertion length (IL) of the insert can be chosen within a standard range from 50 to 1000 mm (1.97 to
39.4 in), see "Caution" on Page 9. Inserts with a insertion length IL > 1000 mm (39.4 in) can be supplied after
a technical verification of the specific application by a Endress+Hauser service organization.
When replacing the insert it is necessary to refer to the following table to obtain the correct insertion length IL
(applicable only to thermowells with standard bottom thickness). It is calculated by adding the total thermowell
length (immersion lenght U + lag T) to the extension neck length (N) used.
Insert model Ø Extension Extension neck length N Insertion length IL

neck type
N 69 mm (2.71 in)
TPR100 / TPR300 6 mm (0.24 in) N 109 mm (4.3 in) IL = U+T+ N + 41 mm (1.61 in)
NUN 148 mm (5.8 in)
Endress+Hauser 11
TR66
Wiring
Wiring diagrams Type of sensor connection
Head mounted transmitter TMT18x (single input)
T09-TH1112xx-04-xx-XX-ae-000
Head mounted transmitter TMT84 and TMT85 (dual input)
a0008848-en
Terminal block mounted
a0008591-en
12 Endress+Hauser
TR66
Installation conditions
Orientation No restrictions.
Installation instructions
a0010222-en
Installation examples
A - B: In pipes with a small cross section the thermowell tip should reach or extend slightly past the center line of the pipe
(= U).
C - D: Angled installation.
The immersion length of the thermometer influences the accuracy. If the immersion length is too small then
errors in the measurement are caused by heat conduction via the process connection and the container wall.
If installing into a pipe then the immersion length must be at least half of the pipe diameter.
For best installation follow the rule: h ~ d; U > D/2 + h. As far as corrosion is concerned, the base material for
parts in contact with the fluid is able to withstand the most common corrosive agents up to the highest
temperatures. For further information on specific applications, contact a Endress+Hauser service organization.
! Note!
When operating in small nominal bore pipes it must be guaranteed that the thermowell tip is long enough to
go over the pipe centre line (see figure above, A and B). A further solution could be an angled (tilted) installation
(see figure above, C and D). When determining the immersion length all thermometer parameters and the
process to be measured must be taken into account (e.g. flow velocity, process pressure → ä 4).
The counterparts for process connections and gaskets, when required, are not supplied with the sensor and
must be purchased separately.
Endress+Hauser 13
TR66
Extension neck length The extension neck is the part between the thermowell connection and the terminal head. The connection
situated in the upper part of the neck allows for orientation of the terminal head. The neck is constituted by a
tube assembled to hydraulic hardware (nipples or joints) that is suitable to allow the adjustment of the sensor
to the thermowell. In addition to the standard versions listed below, it is also possible to order the extension
neck by specifying the desired length (see “Product structure” at the end of this document):
Neck version Material Neck length N Thread Thread length C
69 mm (2.72 in)
109 mm (4.3 in)
SS 316 or A 105 ½" NPT M 8 mm (0.31 in)
NUN 148 mm (5.83 in)
a0010216
As illustrated in the following figure, the extension neck length may influence the temperature in the terminal
head. It is necessary that this temperature is kept within the limit values defined in the chapter "Operating
conditions".
a0010513-en
Heating of the terminal head consequent to the process temperature.

Temperature in terminal head = ambient temperature 20 °C (68 °F) + ΔT
14 Endress+Hauser
TR66
Certificates and approvals

CE Mark The device meets the legal requirements of the EC directives if applicable. Endress+Hauser confirms that the
device has been successfully tested by applying the CE mark.
Hazardous area approvals For further details on the available Ex versions (ATEX, CSA, FM, etc.), please contact your nearest
Endress+Hauser sales organization. All relevant data for hazardous areas can be found in separate Ex
documentation. If required, please request copies.
Other standards and • IEC 60529:

guidelines Degrees of protection by housing (IP-Code).
• IEC 61010-1:
Safety requirements for electrical measurement, control and laboratory instrumentation.
• IEC 60751:
Industrial platinum resistance thermometer
• EN 50014/18:
Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres - General requirements/flameproof enclosure ’d’
• EN 50281-1-1:
Electrical apparatus protected by enclosures
• IEC 61326-1:
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements)
PED approval The thermometer complies with paragraph 3.3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive (97/23/CE) and is not
marked separately.
Material certification The material certificate 3.1 (according to standard EN 10204) can be requested separately. The "short form"
certificate includes a simplified declaration with no enclosures of documents related to the materials used in
the construction of the single sensor and guarantees the traceability of the materials through the identification
number of the thermometer. The data related to the origin of the materials can subsequently be requested by
the client if necessary.
Test on thermowell Thermowell pressure tests are carried out in accordance with the specifications in the DIN 43772
standard.With regards to thermowells with tapered or reduced tips that do not comply with this standard these
aretested using the pressure of corresponding straight thermowells. Tests according to other specifications can
be carried out on request.
Test report and calibration For the tests and calibration, the "Acceptance report" comprises a declaration of conformity with the primary
points as per IEC 60751.
The "Factory calibration" is carried out according to an internal procedure in a laboratory of Endress+Hauser
accredited by the European Accreditation Organization (EA) to ISO/IEC 17025. A calibration which is
performed according to EA guidelines (SIT or DKD calibration) may be requested separately. The calibration is
performed on the replaceable insert of the thermometer. In the case of thermometers without a replaceable
insert, the entire thermometer - from the process connection to the tip of the thermometer - is calibrated.
Endress+Hauser 15
TR66
Product structure This information provides an overview of the order options available. The information is not exhaustive,
however, and may not be fully up to date. More detailed information is available from your local
Endress+Hauser representative.
RTD thermometer TR66
Approval:
A Non-hazardous area
C ATEX II 1/2 GD EEx ia IIC
E ATEX II 2 GD EEx d IIC
H ATEX II 3 GD EEx nA II
K TIIS Ex ia IIC T4
L TIIS Ex ia IIC T6
M ATEX II 1/2 GD EEx d IIC
Head:
A TA21H Alu, IP66
B TA30H Alu, IP66/68
C TA30H Alu, IP66/68 + Display
Y Special version, to be specified
Cable Entry:
A 1x ½" NPT
B 2x ½" NPT
C 1x ¾" NPT
D 2x ¾" NPT
E 1x M20x1.5
F 2x M20x1.5
Neck Length N; Material; Fitting:

B 69 mm; 316; N ½" NPT M
C 109 mm; 316; N ½"NPT M
E 148 mm; 316; N ½" NPT M
F 69 mm; A105; N ½" NPT M
G 109 mm; A105; N ½" NPT M
J 148 mm; A105; N ½" NPT M
Y ..... mm, as specified
Thermowell Material:
B 316Ti
C 316
D 316L
Extension T; D1; Df; Q1; Q2:

1 70 mm; 30 mm; 7 mm; 20 mm; 14 mm
2 75 mm; 35 mm; 7 mm; 24 mm; 14 mm
6 100 mm; 35 mm; 8 mm; 25 mm; 18 mm
9 .... mm, as specified
Immersion length U:
X .... mm
Y .... mm, as specified
Process Connection:
CA Flange 1" ANSI 150 RF SO; A105
CB Flange 1" ANSI 150 RF SO; B16.5;JPI; 316
CC Flange 1" ANSI 300 RF SO; A105
CD Flange 1" ANSI 300 RF SO; B16.5;JPI; 316
CE Flange 1" ANSI 600 RF SO; A105
CF Flange 1" ANSI 600 RF SO; 316
CG Flange 1½" ANSI 150 RF SO; A105
CH Flange 1½" ANSI 150 RF SO; B 16.5; JPI; 316
CJ Flange 1½" ANSI 300 RF SO; A105
CK Flange 1½" ANSI 300 RF SO; B 16.5; JPI; 316
CL Flange 1½" ANSI 600 RF SO; A105
CM Flange 1½" ANSI 600 RF SO; 316
CQ Flange 2" ANSI 300 RF SO; A105
CS Flange 2" ANSI 600 RF SO; A105
16 Endress+Hauser
TR66
Process Connection:
CT Flange 2" ANSI 600 RF SO; 316
CV Flange 2" ANSI 300 RF SO; 316
JA Flange 10K25A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
JB Flange 10K40A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
JC Flange 10K50A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
JD Flange 20K25A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
JE Flange 20K40A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
JF Flange 20K50A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
YY Special version, to be specified
11 Thread ¾" NPT-M
22 Thread 1" NPT-M
44 Thread R ¾", JIS B 0203, 316
Head Transmitter; Range:

B TMT84 PA
C Terminal block
D TMT85 FF
F Flying leads
G TMT181 (PCP); temp. range to be specified
H TMT182 (HART, SIL2); temp. range to be specified
2 TMT180-A21 fix; 0.2 K, temp. range to be specified, Span limit -200/650 °C
4 TMT180-A11 PCP; 0.2 K, temp. range to be specified, Span limit -200/650 °C
RTD; wire; meas. range; class: validity:

A 1x Pt100 WW; 3; -200/600 °C; A: -200/600 °C
B 2x Pt100 WW; 3; -200/600 °C; A: -200/600 °C
C 1x Pt100 WW; 4; -200/600 °C; A: -200/600 °C
F 2x Pt100 WW; 3; -200/600 °C; 1/3B: 0/250 °C
G 1x Pt100 WW; 4; -200/600 °C; 1/3B: 0/250 °C
2 1x Pt100 TF; 3; -50/400 °C; A: -50/250 °C
3 1x Pt100 TF; 4; -50/400 °C; A: -50/250 °C
6 1x Pt100 TF; 3; -50/400 °C; 1/3B: 0/150 °C
7 1x Pt100 TF; 4; -50/400 °C; 1/3B: 0/150 °C
Additional option:
0 Not needed
TR66- ← Order code (complete)
Documentation
Technical Information:
• RTD Insert for Temperature Sensor Omniset TPR100 (TI268t/02/en)
• Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® PCP TMT181 (TI070r/09/en)
• Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® Pt TMT180 (TI088r/09/en)
• Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® HART® TMT182 (TI078r/09/en)
• Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® TMT84 PA (TI138r/09/en)
• Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® TMT85 FF (TI134r/09/en)
Hazardous area supplementary documentation:
• Omnigrad TRxx RTD Thermometer ATEX II1GD or II 1/2GD (XA072r/09/a3)
• Omnigrad S TR/TC 6x Thermometer ATEX II1/2, 2GD or II2G EEx d IIC T5, T6 (XA014t/02/a3)
Application example Technical Information:

• Field display RIA261 (TI083r/09/en)
• Active barrier with power supply RN221N (TI073R/09/en)
Endress+Hauser 17
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.1.4 Temperature Element for Energy meter
8
Order code

TR66-ABABDAX10C7A

090 Head Transmitter; Range: C Terminal block
110 Additional Option: A 0/ +100oC, 1x RTD
Order code

TR66-ABABDAX10C7A

090 Head Transmitter; Range: C Terminal block
110 Additional Option: A 0/ +100oC, 1x RTD
Omnigrad S TR66
Modular RTD assembly, flameproof
Barstock thermowell, with thread or flange
Application
• Heavy duty applications
• Oil & Gas processing industry
• Measuring range: -200...600 °C (-328...1115 °F)
• Static pressure range up to 500 bar (7250 PSI)
• Protection class: up to IP 68
Head transmitters
All Endress+Hauser transmitters are available with
enhanced accuracy and reliability compared to directly
wired sensors. Easy customizing by choosing one of the
following outputs and communication protocols:
• Analog output 4...20 mA
• HART®
• PROFIBUS® PA
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus™
Your benefits
• High flexibility based on modular assembly with a
terminal head and customized immersion length
• Extension neck for head transmitter heat protection
• Types of protection for use in hazardous locations:
Flameproof (Ex d)
Intrinsic Safety (Ex ia)
Non-Sparking (Ex nA)
Dust ignition proof (protection by enclosure)
4 0
TI284T/02/en
71078770
TR66

Measuring principle These resistance thermometers use a Pt100 temperature sensor according to IEC 60751. This temperature
sensor is a temperature-sensitive platinum resistor with a resistance of 100 Ω at 0 °C (32 °F) and a temperature
coefficient α = 0.003851 °C-1.
There are generally two different kinds of platinum resistance thermometers:
• Wire wound (WW): Here, a double coil of fine, high-purity platinum wire is located in a ceramic support.
This is then sealed top and bottom with a ceramic protective layer. Such resistance thermometers not only
facilitate very reproducible measurements but also offer good long-term stability of the resistance/
temperature characteristic within temperature ranges up to 600 °C (1112 °F). This type of sensor is relatively
large in size and it is comparatively sensitive to vibrations.
• Thin film platinum resistance thermometers (TF): A very thin, ultrapure platinum layer, approx. 1 μm
thick, is vaporized in a vacuum on a ceramic substrate and then structured photolithographically. The
platinum conductor paths formed in this way create the measuring resistance. Additional covering and
passivation layers are applied and reliably protect the thin platinum layer from contamination and oxidation
even at high temperatures.
The primary advantages of thin-film temperature sensors over wire wound versions are their smaller sizes and
better vibration resistance. A relatively low principle-based deviation of the resistance/temperature
characteristic from the standard characteristic of IEC 60751 can frequently be observed among TF sensors at
high temperatures. As a result, the tight limit values of tolerance category A as per IEC 60751 can only be
observed with TF sensors at temperatures up to approx. 300 °C (572 °F). For this reason, thin-film sensors are
generally only used for temperature measurements in ranges below 400 °C (932 °F).
Measuring system
a0010191
Example of an application
A RIA 261 Field display
– The display measures an analog measurement signal and indicates this on the display. The display is connected
in a 4 to 20 mA current loop and also derives its supply from the loop. The volt drop is almost negligible
(< 2.5 V). The dynamic internal resistance (load) makes sure that independently from the loop current, the
maximum volt drop is never exceeded. The analog signal at the input is digitalized, analyzed and displayed. For
details see Technical Information (see "Documentation").
B Active barrier RN221N
– The RN221N active barrier (24 V DC, 30 mA) has an galvanically isolated output for supplying voltage to loop
powered transmitters. The power supply has a wide-range input for mains power, 20 to 250 V DC/AC,
50/60 Hz to be used in any electrical circuit. For details see Technical Information (see "Documentation").
C Built-in RTD assembly TR66 with head transmitter
2 Endress+Hauser
TR66
Equipment architecture
a0010220
Equipment architecture of the Omnigrad S TR66
1 Insert TPR100, ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in) with mounted head 5 Thread or flange as process connection
transmitter, for example. For applications in non-hazardous 6 Thermowell from bar stock material
areas (except: Ex ia and Ex nA) N Extension neck length
2 Insert TPR300, ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in) with mounted ceramic T Thermowell lag
terminal block, for example. U Immersion length
For applications in hazardous areas (Ex d) A Thermowell length (= U + T)
3 Terminal head IL Insertion length = U + T + N + 41 mm (1.6 in)
4 Extension neck
The Omnigrad S TR66 RTD assemblies are modular. The terminal head serves as a connection module for the
extension neck to the thermowell in the process as well as for the mechanical and electrical connection of the
measuring insert. The actual RTD sensor element is fitted in and mechanically protected within the insert. The
insert can be exchanged and calibrated even during the process. Either ceramic terminal blocks or transmitters
can be fitted to the internal base washer. Where required, threads or flanges can be fixed onto the thermowell.
Measurement range -200 ... 600 °C (-328...1112 °F)
Operating conditions Ambient temperature
Terminal head Temperature in °C (°F)
Without mounted head transmitter Depends on the terminal head used and the cable gland or fieldbus connec-
tor, see 'Terminal heads' section, → ä 8
With mounted head transmitter -40 to 85 °C (-40 to 185 °F)
With mounted head transmitter and display -20 to 70 °C (-4 to 158 °F)
Endress+Hauser 3
TR66
Process pressure (static)
Process connection Standard Max. process pressure
Thread ANSI B1.20.1 75 bar (1088 psi)
Flange ASME B16.5 Depending on flange pressure stage

150, 300 or 600 psi
Permitted flow velocity depending on the immersion length

The highest flow velocity tolerated by the thermometer diminishes with increasing immersion length exposed
to the stream of the fluid. In addition it is dependent on the diameter of the thermometer tip, on the kind of
measuring medium, on the process temperature and on the process pressure. The following figures exemplify
the maximum permitted flow velocities in water and superheated steam at a process pressure of 4 MPa
(40 bar = 580 PSI).
a0010219
Maximum flow velocity

--------------- Thermowell ∅ D1 = 35 mm (1.38 in), ∅ Q1 = 25 mm (0.98 in), ∅ Q2 = 18 mm (0.71 in)
- - - - - - - - Thermowell ∅ D1 = 30 mm (1.18 in), ∅ Q1 = 20 mm (0.8 in), ∅ Q2 = 14 mm (0.55 in)
A Medium water at T = 50 °C (122 °F) U Immersion length thermowell, material 1.4401 (316)
B Medium superheated steam at T = 400 °C (752 °F) v Flow velocity
! Note!
Information on the thermowell dimensions ∅ Q1, ∅ Q2, ∅ D1, ∅ Df and U, → ä 10.
Shock and vibration resistance

4g / 2 to 150 Hz as per IEC 60068-2-6
4 Endress+Hauser
TR66
Accuracy RTD corresponding to IEC 60751
Class max. Tolerances Temperature range Characteristics

(°C)
RTD max. error type TF - range: -50 to +400 °C
Cl. A ± (0.15 + 0.002 · |t|1)) -50 °C to +250 °C
Cl. AA, ± (0.1 + 0.0017 · |t|1)) 0 °C to +150 °C

former 1/3
Cl. B
Cl. B ± (0.3 + 0.005 · |t|1)) -50 °C to +400 °C
RTD max. error type WW - range: -200 to +600 °C
Cl. A ± (0.15 + 0.002 · |t|1)) -200 °C to +600 °C
Cl. AA, ± (0.1 + 0.0017 · |t|1)) 0 °C to +250 °C

former
1/3 Cl. B
Cl. B ± (0.3 + 0.005 · |t|1)) -200 °C to +600 °C
a0008588-en
1) |t| = absolute value °C
! Note!
For measurement errors in °F, calculate using equations above in °C, then multiply the outcome by 1.8.
Response time Tests in water at 0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s), according to IEC 60751; 10 K temperature step change. Measuring probe
Pt100, TF/WW:
∅ Q1 thermowell Response time ∅ Q2 tapered tip
20 mm (0.79 in) t50 34 s 14 mm (0.55 in)

t90 105 s
25 mm (0.98 in) t50 37 s 18 mm (0.71 in)

t90 115 s
! Note!
Response time for the RTD insert without transmitter.
Insulation resistance Insulation resistance ≥100 MΩ at ambient temperature.

Insulation resistance between each terminal and the sheath is measured with a voltage of 100 V DC.
Self heating RTD elements are passive resistances that are measured using an external current. This measurement current
causes a self heating in the RTD element itself which in turn creates an additional measurement error. In
addition to the measurement current the size of the measurement error is also affected by the temperature
conductivity and flow velocity of the process. This self heating error is negligible when an Endress+Hauser
iTEMP® temperature transmitter (very small measurement current) is connected.
Endress+Hauser 5
TR66
Calibration specifications The manufacturer provides comparison temperature calibration from -80 to +600 °C (-110 °F to 1112 °F) on
the International Temperature Scale (ITS90). Calibrations are traceable to national and international standards.
The calibration report is referenced to the serial number of the thermometer. Only the measuring insert is
calibrated.
Insert: Ø 6 mm (0.24 in) Minimum insertion length (IL) in mm (inch)
Temperature range without head transmitter with head transmitter
-80 °C to -40 °C (-110 °F to -40 °F) 200 (7.87)
-40 °C to 0 °C (-40 °F to 32 °F) 160 (6.3)
0 °C to 250 °C (32 °F to 480 °F) 120 (4.72) 150 (5.91)
250 °C to 550 °C (480 °F to 1020 °F) 300 (11.81)
550 °C to 650 °C (1020 °F to 1202 °F) 400 (15.75)
Material Extension neck and thermowell

The temperatures for continuous operation specified in the following table are only intended as reference values
for use of the various materials in air and without any significant compressive load. The maximum operation
temperatures are reduced considerably in some cases where abnormal conditions such as high mechanical load
occur or in aggressive media.
Material Short form Recommended max. Properties

name temperature for
continuous use in air
AISI 316L/ 650 °C (1200 °F)1) • Austenitic, stainless steel
1.4404 X2CrNiMo17-12-2 • High corrosion resistance in general
1.4435 X2CrNiMo18-14-3 • Particularly high corrosion resistance in chlorine-based and acidic, non-oxidizing
atmospheres through the addition of molybdenum (e.g. phosphoric and sulfuric acids, acetic
and tartaric acids with a low concentration)
• Increased resistance to intergranular corrosion and pitting
• Compared to 1.4404, 1.4435 has even higher corrosion resistance and a lower delta ferrite
content
AISI 316Ti/ X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2 700 °C (1292)1) • Properties comparable to AISI316L

1.4571 • Addition of titanium means increased resistance to intergranular corrosion even after welding
• Broad range of uses in the chemical, petrochemical and oil industries as well as in coal
chemistry
• Can only be polished to a limited extent, titanium streaks can form
1) Can be used to a limited extent up to 800 °C (1472 °F) for low compressive loads and in non-corrosive media. Please contact your Endress+Hauser sales team
for further information.
Transmitter specifications
TMT180 TMT181 TMT182 TMT84 PA / TMT85 FF

PCP PCP HART®
Pt100 Pt100, TC, Ω, mV Pt100, TC, Ω, mV Pt100, TC, Ω, mV
Measurement accuracy 0.2 °C (0.36 °F), optional 0.2 °C (0.36 °F) or 0.08% 0.1 °C (0.18 °F)
0.1 °C (0.18 °F) or 0.08%
% is related to the adjusted measurement range (the larger value applies)
Sensor current Ι ≤ 0.6 mA Ι ≤ 0.2 mA Ι ≤ 0.3 mA
Galvanic isolation (input/output) - Û = 2 kV AC
6 Endress+Hauser
TR66
System components
Family of temperature Thermometers fitted with iTEMP® transmitters are an installation ready complete solution to improve
transmitters temperature measurement by increasing accuracy and reliability, when compared to direct wired sensors, as
well as reducing both wiring and maintenance costs.
PC programmable head transmitter TMT180 and TMT181

They offer a high degree of flexibility, thereby supporting universal application with low inventory storage. The
iTEMP® transmitters can be configured quickly and easily at a PC. Endress+Hauser offers the ReadWin® 2000
configuration software for this purpose. This software can be downloaded free of charge at
www.readwin2000.com. More information can be found in the Technical Information (see
"Documentation" section).
HART® TMT182 head transmitter

HART® communication is all about easy, reliable data access and getting additional information about the
measurement point more inexpensively. iTEMP® transmitters integrate seamlessly into your existing control
system and provide painless access to numerous diagnostic information.
Configuration with a hand-held (Field Xpert SFX100 or DXR375) or a PC with configuration program
(FieldCare, ReadWin® 2000) or configure with AMS or PDM. Details see Technical Information (see chapter

®
iTEMP TMT18x • Material: Housing (PC), Potting (PUR)
• Terminals: Cable up to max. max. ≤ 2.5 mm2 / 16 AWG (secure screws) or
with wire end ferrules
• Eyelets for easy connection of a HART®-handheld terminal with alligator
clips
R09-TMT182ZZ-06-06-xx-en-001
PROFIBUS® PA TMT84 head transmitter

Universally programmable head transmitter with PROFIBUS® PA communication. Converting various input
signals into a digital output signal. High accuracy over the complete ambient temperature range. Swift and easy
operation, visualization and maintenance using a PC directly from the control panel, e. g. using operating
software such as FieldCare, Simatic PDM or AMS.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ TMT85 head transmitter

Universally programmable head transmitter with FOUNDATION fieldbus™ communication. Converting
various input signals into a digital output signal. High accuracy over the complete ambient temperature range.
Swift and easy operation, visualization and maintenance using a PC directly from the control panel, e. g. using
operating software such as ControlCare from Endress+Hauser or the NI Configurator from National
Instruments.
Endress+Hauser 7
TR66
iTEMP® TMT84 and TMT85 • Spring range L ≥ 5 mm (0.2"), see Pos. A

• Fixing elements for pluggable measured value display, see Pos. B
• Interface for contacting measured value display, see Pos. C
• Material (RoHS-compliant)
Housing: PC
Potting: PU
• Terminals:
Screw terminals (cable up to max. ≤ 2.5 mm2 / 16 AWG)
or spring terminals (e. g. from 0.25 mm2 to 0.75 mm2/ 24 AWG to 18 AWG
for flexible wires with wire-end ferrules with plastic ferrule)
a0007301-en
Pluggable display TID10 as option • Displays the actual measured value and the measurement point identification
• Displays fault events in inverse color with channel ident and diagnostics code
• DIP-switches on the rear for hardware set-up, e. g. PROFIBUS® PA bus
address
! Note!
Display is only available with suitable terminal head with display window, e.g.
TA30
a0009955
Terminal head Internal geometry according to DIN 43729, form B. It is compliant with EN 50014/18 and EN 50281-1-1
standards (EEx-d certification for explosion proof type of protection).
! Note!
In the XP version, the thermometer is available without a cable gland or fieldbus connector.
All dimensions in mm (inch).
TA21H Specification
• Protection class: IP66 to IP68

• Max. temperature: 100 °C (212 °F) rubber
• Material: aluminum alloy; rubber seal under the cover
• Double threaded cable entry:
½" NPT, ¾" NPT, M20 or G½"
• Extension neck / thermowell connection:
M24x1.5, G½" or ½" NPT
• Head color: blue
• Cap color: grey
• Weight: 600 g (21.16 oz)
a0010194
8 Endress+Hauser
TR66
TA30H Specification

½" NPT, ¾" NPT, M20x1.5, only thread G½"; plug: M12x1 PA,
7/8" FF
• Weight: 640 g (22.6 oz)
a0009832
TA30H with display window in cover Specification

½" NPT, ¾" NPT, M20x1.5, only thread G½";
plug: M12x1 PA, 7/8" FF
• Weight: 860 g (30.33 oz)
• Head transmitter optionally available with TID10 display
a0009831
Maximum ambient temperatures for cable glands and fieldbus connectors
Type Temperature range

Cable gland ½" NPT, M20x1.5 (non Ex) -40 to +100 °C (-40 to +212 °F)
Cable gland M20x1.5 (for dust ignition-proof area) -20 to +95 °C (-4 to +203 °F)
Fieldbus connector (M12x1 PA, 7/8" FF) -40 to +105 °C (-40 to +221 °F)
Endress+Hauser 9
TR66
Thermowell All dimensions in mm (inches).
a0010230
Dimensions of the Omnigrad S TR66
1 Insert with mounted terminal block IL Insertion length = U + T + N + 41 mm (1.61 in)

2 Insert with head transmitter mounted N Extension neck length
3 Flying leads T Thermowell lag
∅ ID Insert diameter U Immersion length
A Thermowell length
∅ D1 Thermowell diameter at the thermometer connection ∅ Df Thermowell internal hole

∅ Q1 Thermowell external diameter at the flange or ∅ Q2 Thermowell tip external diameter
thread connection
The thermowell is the component of the RTD assembly that must tolerate most of the mechanical stress
transmitted by the process. It is made from a round bar and supplied in different materials and dimensions,
according to the chemical/physical characteristics of the process: corrosion, temperature, pressure and speed
of the fluid.
The thermowell consists of three parts:
• The lag, usually with a cylindrical shape and standard diameters of 30 or 35 mm (1.18 or 1.38 in) and lengths
of 70/100 mm (2.76/3.94 in), represents the external part of the thermowell and is connected with the
terminal head by means of a neck (usually a nipple, type N or nipple-union-nipple, type NUN).
• The immersed part (identified as U), with a conical or cylindrical shape is situated next to the process
connection in direct contact with the process fluid. The standard diameter of the area below the fitting is 20
or 25 mm (0.79 or 0.98 in).
• The threaded or flanged process connection is the part inserted between the lag and the immersed part and
guarantees the mechanical and hydraulic sealing of the assembly and plant.
The surface of the wetted part of the thermowell is available with a surface roughness rating of Ra = 1.6 μm as
standard (other surface versions available on request).
" Caution!
The maximum total length A of the thermowell (maximum drilling limit) is 1200 mm (47.3 in). Higher lengths
are available only on request.
10 Endress+Hauser
TR66
Weight From 1.5 to 5.5 kg (3.3 to 12.1 lbs) for standard options.
Process connection The standard process connections are threaded or flanged. When the process connection is threaded, the
connection material is the same as that of the thermowell.
Standard material flange: SS 316/1.4401or ASTM A105/St 52.3 U.
On request, it is possible to select different materials, finishings and connections.
Type and dimension of the process connections (ASME B16.5, ANSI B1.20.1). All dimensions in mm (inch).
Type Ød ØD ØL No. of f b Ø D1 A A1
holes
Flange 1” ANSI 150 RF SO1) 107.9 15.7 14.2 - - -

(4.25) (0.62) 1.6 (0.56)
(0.06)
1” ANSI 300 RF SO 50.8 (2) 17.5 - - -
19.1 (0.69)
1” ANSI 600 RF SO 124 (4.9) 6.4 - - -
(0.75)
(0.25)
4
1½” ANSI 150 RF SO 127 (5) 15.7 17.5 - - -
(0.62) 1.6 (0.69)
(0.06)
1½” ANSI 300 RF SO 73 (2.9) 20.6 - - -
155.4 22.4 (0.81)
1½” ANSI 600 RF SO (6.1) (0.85) 6.4 - - -
(0.25)
2” ANSI 300 RF SO 1.6 22.4 - - -

92.1 165.1 19.1 (0.06) (0.88)
8
2” ANSI 600 RF SO (3.6) (6.5) (0.75) 6.4 25.4 - - -
(0.25) (1)
≥ 21.4
a0010224-en
Thread ¾" NPT - - - - - - 19.9 8.1
(0.84) (0.78) (0.32)
1" NPT - - - - - - ≥ 26.7 20.2 8.6

(1.1) (0.79) (0.34)
1) RF SO: Raised Face Slip On flange (flat flange with sealing face).
Further information you can find in the Technical Information ’Flanges’ (TI432F/00).
Spare parts Measuring probe (Pt100):

• TPR100 for general purpose and intrinsically safe model
• TPR300 for explosion-proof model
Both of the probes are made in mineral insulated cable (MgO), with a sheath in 316L/1.4401 stainless steel.
The insertion length (IL) of the insert can be chosen within a standard range from 50 to 1000 mm (1.97 to
39.4 in), see "Caution" on Page 9. Inserts with a insertion length IL > 1000 mm (39.4 in) can be supplied after
a technical verification of the specific application by a Endress+Hauser service organization.
When replacing the insert it is necessary to refer to the following table to obtain the correct insertion length IL
(applicable only to thermowells with standard bottom thickness). It is calculated by adding the total thermowell
length (immersion lenght U + lag T) to the extension neck length (N) used.
Insert model Ø Extension Extension neck length N Insertion length IL

neck type
N 69 mm (2.71 in)
TPR100 / TPR300 6 mm (0.24 in) N 109 mm (4.3 in) IL = U+T+ N + 41 mm (1.61 in)
NUN 148 mm (5.8 in)
Endress+Hauser 11
TR66
Wiring
Wiring diagrams Type of sensor connection
Head mounted transmitter TMT18x (single input)
T09-TH1112xx-04-xx-XX-ae-000
Head mounted transmitter TMT84 and TMT85 (dual input)
a0008848-en
Terminal block mounted
a0008591-en
12 Endress+Hauser
TR66
Installation conditions
Orientation No restrictions.
Installation instructions
a0010222-en
Installation examples
A - B: In pipes with a small cross section the thermowell tip should reach or extend slightly past the center line of the pipe
(= U).
C - D: Angled installation.
The immersion length of the thermometer influences the accuracy. If the immersion length is too small then
errors in the measurement are caused by heat conduction via the process connection and the container wall.
If installing into a pipe then the immersion length must be at least half of the pipe diameter.
For best installation follow the rule: h ~ d; U > D/2 + h. As far as corrosion is concerned, the base material for
parts in contact with the fluid is able to withstand the most common corrosive agents up to the highest
temperatures. For further information on specific applications, contact a Endress+Hauser service organization.
! Note!
When operating in small nominal bore pipes it must be guaranteed that the thermowell tip is long enough to
go over the pipe centre line (see figure above, A and B). A further solution could be an angled (tilted) installation
(see figure above, C and D). When determining the immersion length all thermometer parameters and the
process to be measured must be taken into account (e.g. flow velocity, process pressure → ä 4).
The counterparts for process connections and gaskets, when required, are not supplied with the sensor and
must be purchased separately.
Endress+Hauser 13
TR66
Extension neck length The extension neck is the part between the thermowell connection and the terminal head. The connection
situated in the upper part of the neck allows for orientation of the terminal head. The neck is constituted by a
tube assembled to hydraulic hardware (nipples or joints) that is suitable to allow the adjustment of the sensor
to the thermowell. In addition to the standard versions listed below, it is also possible to order the extension
neck by specifying the desired length (see “Product structure” at the end of this document):
Neck version Material Neck length N Thread Thread length C
69 mm (2.72 in)
109 mm (4.3 in)
SS 316 or A 105 ½" NPT M 8 mm (0.31 in)
NUN 148 mm (5.83 in)
a0010216
As illustrated in the following figure, the extension neck length may influence the temperature in the terminal
head. It is necessary that this temperature is kept within the limit values defined in the chapter "Operating
conditions".
a0010513-en
Heating of the terminal head consequent to the process temperature.

Temperature in terminal head = ambient temperature 20 °C (68 °F) + ΔT
14 Endress+Hauser
TR66

CE Mark The device meets the legal requirements of the EC directives if applicable. Endress+Hauser confirms that the
device has been successfully tested by applying the CE mark.
Hazardous area approvals For further details on the available Ex versions (ATEX, CSA, FM, etc.), please contact your nearest
Endress+Hauser sales organization. All relevant data for hazardous areas can be found in separate Ex
documentation. If required, please request copies.
Other standards and • IEC 60529:

guidelines Degrees of protection by housing (IP-Code).
• IEC 61010-1:
Safety requirements for electrical measurement, control and laboratory instrumentation.
• IEC 60751:
Industrial platinum resistance thermometer
• EN 50014/18:
Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres - General requirements/flameproof enclosure ’d’
• EN 50281-1-1:
Electrical apparatus protected by enclosures
• IEC 61326-1:
PED approval The thermometer complies with paragraph 3.3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive (97/23/CE) and is not
marked separately.
Material certification The material certificate 3.1 (according to standard EN 10204) can be requested separately. The "short form"
certificate includes a simplified declaration with no enclosures of documents related to the materials used in
the construction of the single sensor and guarantees the traceability of the materials through the identification
number of the thermometer. The data related to the origin of the materials can subsequently be requested by
the client if necessary.
Test on thermowell Thermowell pressure tests are carried out in accordance with the specifications in the DIN 43772
standard.With regards to thermowells with tapered or reduced tips that do not comply with this standard these
aretested using the pressure of corresponding straight thermowells. Tests according to other specifications can
be carried out on request.
Test report and calibration For the tests and calibration, the "Acceptance report" comprises a declaration of conformity with the primary
points as per IEC 60751.
The "Factory calibration" is carried out according to an internal procedure in a laboratory of Endress+Hauser
accredited by the European Accreditation Organization (EA) to ISO/IEC 17025. A calibration which is
performed according to EA guidelines (SIT or DKD calibration) may be requested separately. The calibration is
performed on the replaceable insert of the thermometer. In the case of thermometers without a replaceable
insert, the entire thermometer - from the process connection to the tip of the thermometer - is calibrated.
Endress+Hauser 15
TR66
Product structure This information provides an overview of the order options available. The information is not exhaustive,
however, and may not be fully up to date. More detailed information is available from your local
Endress+Hauser representative.
RTD thermometer TR66
Approval:
A Non-hazardous area
C ATEX II 1/2 GD EEx ia IIC
E ATEX II 2 GD EEx d IIC
H ATEX II 3 GD EEx nA II
K TIIS Ex ia IIC T4
L TIIS Ex ia IIC T6
M ATEX II 1/2 GD EEx d IIC
Head:
A TA21H Alu, IP66
B TA30H Alu, IP66/68
C TA30H Alu, IP66/68 + Display
Cable Entry:
A 1x ½" NPT
B 2x ½" NPT
C 1x ¾" NPT
D 2x ¾" NPT
E 1x M20x1.5
F 2x M20x1.5
Neck Length N; Material; Fitting:

B 69 mm; 316; N ½" NPT M
C 109 mm; 316; N ½"NPT M
E 148 mm; 316; N ½" NPT M
F 69 mm; A105; N ½" NPT M
G 109 mm; A105; N ½" NPT M
J 148 mm; A105; N ½" NPT M
Y ..... mm, as specified
Thermowell Material:
B 316Ti
C 316
D 316L
Extension T; D1; Df; Q1; Q2:

1 70 mm; 30 mm; 7 mm; 20 mm; 14 mm
2 75 mm; 35 mm; 7 mm; 24 mm; 14 mm
6 100 mm; 35 mm; 8 mm; 25 mm; 18 mm
9 .... mm, as specified
Immersion length U:
X .... mm
Y .... mm, as specified
Process Connection:
CA Flange 1" ANSI 150 RF SO; A105
CB Flange 1" ANSI 150 RF SO; B16.5;JPI; 316
CC Flange 1" ANSI 300 RF SO; A105
CD Flange 1" ANSI 300 RF SO; B16.5;JPI; 316
CE Flange 1" ANSI 600 RF SO; A105
CF Flange 1" ANSI 600 RF SO; 316
CG Flange 1½" ANSI 150 RF SO; A105
CH Flange 1½" ANSI 150 RF SO; B 16.5; JPI; 316
CJ Flange 1½" ANSI 300 RF SO; A105
CK Flange 1½" ANSI 300 RF SO; B 16.5; JPI; 316
CL Flange 1½" ANSI 600 RF SO; A105
CM Flange 1½" ANSI 600 RF SO; 316
CQ Flange 2" ANSI 300 RF SO; A105
CS Flange 2" ANSI 600 RF SO; A105
16 Endress+Hauser
TR66
Process Connection:
CT Flange 2" ANSI 600 RF SO; 316
CV Flange 2" ANSI 300 RF SO; 316
JA Flange 10K25A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
JB Flange 10K40A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
JC Flange 10K50A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
JD Flange 20K25A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
JE Flange 20K40A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
JF Flange 20K50A RF, JIS B 2220, 316
YY Special version, to be specified
11 Thread ¾" NPT-M
22 Thread 1" NPT-M
44 Thread R ¾", JIS B 0203, 316
Head Transmitter; Range:

B TMT84 PA
C Terminal block
D TMT85 FF
F Flying leads
G TMT181 (PCP); temp. range to be specified
H TMT182 (HART, SIL2); temp. range to be specified
RTD; wire; meas. range; class: validity:

A 1x Pt100 WW; 3; -200/600 °C; A: -200/600 °C
B 2x Pt100 WW; 3; -200/600 °C; A: -200/600 °C
C 1x Pt100 WW; 4; -200/600 °C; A: -200/600 °C
F 2x Pt100 WW; 3; -200/600 °C; 1/3B: 0/250 °C
G 1x Pt100 WW; 4; -200/600 °C; 1/3B: 0/250 °C
2 1x Pt100 TF; 3; -50/400 °C; A: -50/250 °C
3 1x Pt100 TF; 4; -50/400 °C; A: -50/250 °C
6 1x Pt100 TF; 3; -50/400 °C; 1/3B: 0/150 °C
7 1x Pt100 TF; 4; -50/400 °C; 1/3B: 0/150 °C
Additional option:
0 Not needed
TR66- ← Order code (complete)
Documentation
Technical Information:
• RTD Insert for Temperature Sensor Omniset TPR100 (TI268t/02/en)
• Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® PCP TMT181 (TI070r/09/en)
• Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® Pt TMT180 (TI088r/09/en)
• Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® HART® TMT182 (TI078r/09/en)
• Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® TMT84 PA (TI138r/09/en)
• Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® TMT85 FF (TI134r/09/en)
Hazardous area supplementary documentation:
• Omnigrad TRxx RTD Thermometer ATEX II1GD or II 1/2GD (XA072r/09/a3)
• Omnigrad S TR/TC 6x Thermometer ATEX II1/2, 2GD or II2G EEx d IIC T5, T6 (XA014t/02/a3)
Application example Technical Information:

• Field display RIA261 (TI083r/09/en)
• Active barrier with power supply RN221N (TI073R/09/en)
Endress+Hauser 17
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.1.5 Flow Meter for Energy Meter
9
Order code
50076536 MAGPHANT 1 ST
DTI200-A14C1A
010 Pipe Diameter: A1 DN 25-2000 / 1"-80" (steel)

020 Process Connection: 4 Welding nipple DN40-2000, 316L,
316Ti
030 Cable Entry: C Thread NPT 1/2"
040 Approval: 1 Non-hazardous area
050 Accessory: A Basic version
Technical
Information
Electromagnetic
TI 036D/06/en
No. 50078457
Flow Monitor
magphant
Monitoring and measurement Universal application

• Flow monitoring with selectable limit • One compact flow monitor for all
values (relay output) applications
• Flow measurement via 4...20 mA • Mounted in
current output – Steel piping from DN 25
– Plastic piping from DN 15
Safe operation
• Reliable monitoring (4 mA) even with Simple operation
empty piping • Switchpoint setting via rotary switch
• EMC tested according to IEC • Local potentiometer setting of full-
• Measuring system self-monitoring scale value
• Integrated testing to check correct • Can be set-up before installation
functioning of the electronics
Endress + Hauser
Nothing beats know-how
Magphant Measuring Areas of application
Flow information is often required to tion on flow in your piping. The electro-
System ensure a process is running correctly magnetic principle used determines the
and that preset limit values are not flow velocity of the conductive liquid at
exceeded. The Magphant flow monitor the tip of the sensor.
reliably provides the necessary informa-
Cooling circuit of
ventilation/exhaust
systems, cooling air
blowers, ventilators
Flow measurement
On/off switching
according to flow rate
Monitoring
cooling
systems
Monitoring
cooling
systems
Dry run protection

Cooling control for
for pumps
pumps
ti036y20
Application examples
Areas of application: Applications:
Process plant construction – Dry run protection for pumps

– Flow monitoring
– On/off switching according to flowrate
– Control of cooling systems for pumps,
turbines, compressors, heat
exchangers
Chemical industry – Flow monitoring
– Monitoring pump function
Energy production – Monitoring coolant to bearings for
turbines/generators in power plants
– Cooling circuits for transformers
Water treatment – Status indication of valves in
water distribution systems
– Blockage indication in pipes
Beverage industry – Filtration control
– Monitoring cleaning procedures
Dairy industry – Cooling systems in refrigeration plants
Metal production and processing – Detecting breakdown of cooling sy-
stems for bearings and transmissions
Farming and horticulture – Control and monitoring of
irrigation systems
2
Function Measuring principle
In accordance with Faraday’s law of induced voltage is proportional to the
electromagnetic induction, a voltage is flow velocity and is fed to the amplifier
induced in a conductor that is moved by a pair of electrodes.
through a magnetic field. In the electro- Microprocessor-controlled electronics,
magnetic principle of measurement the with a stable zero-point, convert the
flowing and electrically conductive fluid voltage into an analogue 4...20-mA
represents the moving conductor. The output signal.
Exciter coil
Magnetic lines of
force
B
Sensor
Magnetic
Ue core
L
Electrodes
ti036y08
Design Measuring system design
A construction overview of the Magphant measuring system is shown in the diagram
below.
Housing cover can be unscrewed.

After opening the cover, operating and display
elements as well as the terminal block are easily
accessible.
Cable gland
PG 16 / M20 x 1.5 / PVC cable gland
1
/2" NPT / G1/2" PG 16
Power supply 20...30 V DC

Signal cable
Electronics housing
Ground terminal Weld stub

DN 25
Weld stub
≥DN 40
(mounting length indicated)
Union nut
M30 x 2
with clamp ring
Union nut and
adapter for
Sensor sleeve Magphant installation
in plastic piping
Electrodes
ti036y04
Measuring system design
3
Mounting Instructions Orientation in the piping
Non-recommended
The Magphant is best mounted in verti- mounting orienta-
cal piping. tion
If the piping runs horizontally, the Mag- Preferred mounting Possible
orientation air bubbles
phant is to be mounted to the side.
This mounting procedure ensures that
the electrodes are always immersed in
flowing fluid.
45°
Caution!
Possible build-up
Never weld the weld stub to the pipe of solids
with the Magphant in place.
ti036y05
Recommended inlet and outlet
pipe sections: 5...10 x DN
Mounting in steel piping
Weld stub
The Magphant is mounted using the
weld stub supplied. Two different versi-
ons are available, depending on nomi-
nal diameter:
Weld stub for DN 25

For DN 25 piping, the weld stub has the
appropriate radius to match the diame-
ter.
Opening in the piping: ∅ = 23 mm
Place the weld stub on the opening
ti036y07
and weld it at right angles to the axis of
the piping.
Weld stub for ≥DN 40

For DN 40...300 piping, the weld stub
has a graduated scale to ensure that
the stub can be correctly positioned for
mounting.
Opening in the piping: ∅ = 30 mm
Insert the weld stub into the opening,
with the marking (according to the nomi-
nal diameter) flush against the outer wall
of the piping and weld it at right angles
to the axis of the piping.
ti036y11
Mounting in plastic piping

Adapter piece for plastic piping
For mounting in plastic piping,
Magphant is delivered with an adapter
piece and a plastic union nut, with
which Magphant can be mounted in
a T-fitting (DN 15...DN 50) or a plastic
weld stub (≥DN 65).
The T-fittings or plastic weld stubs can

be obtained from Georg Fischer (+GF+).
ti036y19
4
The T-fittings are available in PVC-U,
PP and PVDF.
The weld stubs are available in PVC-U,

PP and PE and must be adapted
according to the diagram opposite and
the given diameter. The length L can be
calculated from the following formula:
L = 40 - S - E
S = wall thickness of the pipe
E = can be taken from the table below:
Pipe outside diameter E

65 6.9
75 8.3
110 11.4
125 14.4
140 17.7
160 17.7
200 12.0
225 10.0
250 10.0
280 10.0
315 10.0
355 10.0
400 10.0
450 5.0
500 5.0
630 5.0
The total length (68 mm) must also be

observed.
ti036y21
Hole in the pipe: Ø = 40 mm
Operational safety
• Comprehensive self-monitoring of the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
measuring system assures high safe- according to CE (EN 50081-1-2 and
ty. Any error messages that occur EN 50082-1-2).
(process errors, instrument system • Protection type IP 66 is standard
errors) are immediately signalled via (DIN 40050).
the current and relay outputs. • Magphant fulfils the EU directives for
• The Magphant measuring system low-voltage and EMC and bears the
fulfils all general requirements for CE mark.
Electrical Connection
Current output
The Magphant has an analogue output
Current output 4...20 mA which is proportional to the flow.
Load RL = 750 Ω max.
The 4...20-mA output signal can be
75 V DC / 0.5 A used for other systems such as a PLCs,
Relay output
60 V AC / 0.4 A
controllers, etc.
Power supply 20...30 V DC
Relay output
Terminal block The Magphant also has a dry change-
Fuse 160 mA slow blow
over contact which is especially
suitable for monitoring purposes.
Exceeding the range of set limit values
(min./max. fail-safe) is indicated via this
relay output.
Warning!
Do not install, wire up or dismantle the
instrument when the power supply is
switched on.
Power supply Ground terminals Signal cable
cable for cable shields
ti036y02
Note connection polarity and operating voltage.
5
Operation
Setting limit value Red LED
as percentage of the for limit value or error
set full-scale value indication
Green LED
Test mode for full-scale setting
Potentiometer for
setting the full-scale
Time constant, Relay function, Min./max. fail-safe

current output and de-energising of relay
relay latch time on error and limit value
or on limit value only
ti036y09
Operator settings can be noted on the operating and display surfaces.
Operating and display
surfaces
Technical Data Dimensions and weight
Nominal H H
Diameter
for mounting in for mounting in
steel piping plastic piping
25 237.0
40 234.0
50 234.0
80 230.0 see page
100 227.0 4 and 5
150 220.5
Note!
200 214.5
Dimensions of the weld stub see page 4 250 207.5
≥300 201.5
ti036y01
Weight: 1.2 kg
Dimensions and weight
6
Power supply 24 V DC (20...30 V DC)
Power consumption <2.5 W
Outputs • Current output 4...20 mA, active

The measuring system can measure flow in both directions,
i.e. bidirectionally.
The current output is always positive. The relay responds
to both flow directions.
• Relay output
Potential-free change-over contact 60 V AC/0.4 A
75 V DC/0.5 A
Ambient temperature -20...60 °C
Process temperature -20...120 °C (weld stub 1.4435 with clamp ring)

-20...100 °C (weld stub St.37 with clamp ring and
NBR gasket)
Pressure 16 bar at 25 °C; 10 bar at 120 °C
Full scale value 1...5 m/s (infinitely variable)
Accuracy ±2% o.r. at measuring electrode with local calibration

at flow velocities >1 m/s
Reproducibility ±2% o.r.
Conductivity ≥20 µS/cm
Interference immunity acc. to CE EN 50081-1-2 und EN 50082-1-2
Protection type IP 66 / NEMA 4X / Type 4X
Materials
Sensor Sensor tip: PVDF, Viton O-ring
Electrodes: 1.4435/316L
Sensor sleeve:
• 1.4435/316L with 1.4571/316Ti clamp ring
for 1.4435/316L weld stub
• 1.4435/316L with clamp ring and NBR gasket
for St.37/A570 weld stub
Housing Die-cast aluminium, epoxy powder coated
Weld stub 1.4435/316L

(for steel piping) St.37/A570
Adapter piece 1.4435/316L (with 2 Viton O-rings)

(for plastic piping)
Plastic union nut PVC

(for plastic piping)
Approvals CENELEC:
VDE 0165 manufacturers certificate for Zone 2
SEV: Ex nV/W IIC T4...T6, Ex Zone 2
FM: NI Cl I Div. 2 Groups ABCD; DIP/II, III/1/EFG. NEMA 4X
CSA: Class I Div. 2, Groups A, B, C and D;
Class II E, F and G, Class III; Type 4X
Thermal data and temperature classes for Ex Zone 2

IEC 758 Tfluid (see above) Tambient
T1 100 °C/120 °C 60 °C
T2 100 °C/120 °C 60 °C
T3 100 °C/120 °C 60 °C
T4 100 °C/120 °C 60 °C
T5 95 °C/ 95 °C 60 °C
T6 80 °C/ 80 °C 40 °C
7
Product Structure Version / Sensor gasket
A1 Union nut for DN 25...2000 (1"...80")
(only for weld on nipple)
A2 For plastic pipes DN 15...1000 (1/2"...40")
(only for adapter for plastic pipes)
99 other
Mounting Nipples / Sensor gasket

1 Weld on nipple DN 25, St.37 / A570
compression ferrule with NBR gasket
2 Weld on nipple DN 40...2000, St.37 / A570
compression ferrule with NBR gasket
3 Weld on nipple DN 25, 1.4435 / 316L
compression ferrule 1.4571 / 316Ti
4 Weld on nipple DN 40...2000, 1.4435 / 316L
compression ferrule 1.4571 / 316Ti
5 Adapter for plastic pipes, 1.4435 / 316L
compression ferrule NBR gasket
9 other
Cable glands
A PG16 cable glands
B M20x1.5 threads for cable glands
C 1/2" NPT threads for cable glands
D G1/2" threads for cable glands
9 other
Approvals
1 Version for non-hazardous areas
2 VDE 0165 Certificate of Conformity
3 SEV, Ex Zone 2, Ex n approval
4 FM, NI Cl I Div. 2 Gp ABCD
5 CSA, NI Cl I Div. 2 Gp ABCD
9 other
Options
A Standard version
9 other
DTI 200 - ⇐ Order code
Supplementary Special Documentation Magphant (SD 016D/06/e)

Operating Manual Magphant (BA 025D/06/e)
Documentation
Subject to modification
Endress+Hauser
GmbH+Co.
Instruments International
P.O. Box 2222
D-79574 Weil am Rhein
Germany
Tel. (07621) 975-02
Tx 773926
Fax (07621) 975345
Endress + Hauser
Nothing beats know-how
08.93
TI 036D/06/en/06.97
CV4.2
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.1.6 Energy Meter
10
Order code
71113209 EngyCal RH33 1 ST

RH33-AA1A+AAD2E1E2P3

020 Power Supply: 1 100-230V (AC: -15%/+10%,50/60 Hz)
030 Medium: A Water
500 >Operation Language Display: AA English
530 >Communication: D2 Modbus RTU RS485
540 >>Application Package: E1 T-Sensor-Matching via CvD
E2 Tarif function, 2 counter
620 >>Accessory Enclosed: P3 Panel mounting set
TI00151K/09/EN/02.13 Products Solutions Services
71241091
EngyCal® RH33
BTU meter
Custody transfer BTU meter for recording and
billing the heat/cold quantity given off by water,
water/glycol mixtures or other liquids
Transparent energy consumption helps you save on

energy costs
Application
Recording and billing the quantities of heat and cold in:
• Heating circuits
• Cooling circuits
• Combined heating and cooling circuits
Typical application areas in industry, long-distance heat networks and building auto-
mation.
Your benefits
• Verified and certified reliability and accuracy
• Standard models are suitable for connecting and supplying all common volume flow
transmitters and temperature measuring points
• Detailed data logging of current and counter values and of error messages, off-limit
conditions and changes to operating parameters
• Industry-compliant compact housing for field or wall mounting, panel mounting or
top-hat rail mounting
• Deficit counter for transparency in case of error or alarm
• Custody transfer logbook enables versatile device configuration in the field
• Tariff counter for requirements-based billing
• Calibrated, electronically paired temperature sensors ensure the highest accuracy
and enable replacement of individual temperature sensors even for certified devices
in the field (without reapproval!)
• Remote readout via Ethernet and fieldbuses
EngyCal® RH33

Measuring principle The EngyCal® RH33 BTU meter is used to measure the heat and cold in systems with liquid heat trans-
fer fluids. It is easy to install and read. Thanks to its verified long-term stability and high-precision
measurements, the device helps optimize processes and control costs in the process. Comprehensive
data analysis options in the Field Data Manager software MS20 (see accessories) identify potential
areas for cost reduction.
Measuring system
Twarm
q
Tcold
a0013618-en
Measuring system with EngyCal ® RH33, 2x paired temperature sensors and flow sensor
Functions Energy calculation

EngyCal® RH33 calculates the thermal energy of water, glycol/water mixtures or other liquids such as
thermal oils in accordance with EN1434.
Calculation basis: IAWPS-IF97
Calculated values:
• Power
• Volume
• Density
• Enthalpy & enthalpy differential
• DP flow compensation
• Mass
• Temperature differential
Counters
Volume, mass, energy, deficit
Optional: tariff1, tariff2 or separate heat/cold energy, balance energy
Fault mode / deficit counter

The fault mode of the EngyCal® RH33 can be defined freely (no further calculation or calculation with
error value). Thanks to the defined fault mode and the separate deficit counter, the device guarantees
transparency for energy calculation and documentation for billing.
For the case of further calculation with an error value, the total calculated energy during the error con-
dition is counted on a deficit counter.
In this case, the output continues to supply the calculated energy value. If values are communicated via
buses, these are given the value "invalid". Optionally, an alarm relay can be switched.
User-defined heat transfer media

Heat transfer media in cooling circuits usually consist of glycol-water mixtures. Mixtures for the fol-
lowing glycols are already predefined in the EngyCal®:
• Ethylene-glycol
• Antifrogen N
• Glykosol N
• Propylene glycol
For these glycol-water mixtures it is possible to enter the glycol concentration for accurate calculations.
If other heat transfer media are used (e.g. thermal oils, cooling agents), the liquid data must be pro-
grammed into the device. Tables are available for this purpose in which the user can enter the density
2 Endress+Hauser
EngyCal® RH33
and thermal capacity (max. 10 support points). For devices with the "DP Flow Measurement" option,
another table with two support points is available for entering the viscosity data.
The values between or outside the support points are determined by interpolation or extrapolation.
Temperature sensor matching in the device

The temperature sensors are paired internally in the EngyCal® RH33 by storing the sensor character-
istic curves via Callendar-van-Dusen coefficients. The Callendar-van-Dusen coefficients are deter-
mined by calibrating the temperature sensor.
The internal alignment function makes it possible to use unpaired sensors, and to replace one sensor
independently of the second sensor while maintaining or improving accuracy levels (compared to using
paired sensors).
Compensation of differential pressure flow measurement

The flow calculation according to the differential pressure method is a special form of flow measure-
ment. Volume or mass flow values measured according to the DP method require a specific correction.
The iterative solution of the calculation equations listed there allow the best possible accuracy (ca. 0.6
– 1 %) to be attained for DP flow measurements.
Compensation of flow measurement for throttle methods (orifice plate, nozzle).
The measurement (orifice plate, nozzle, Venturi pipe) is carried out according to ISO5167. Flow mea-
surements according to the dynamic pressure method are determined according to the relationship
between the differential pressure and flow.
Data logging and logbook

Event logbook:
The EngyCal RH33® BTU meter has a logbook for measured values and a logbook for events.
In the event logbook, all parameter changes, off-limit conditions, alarms and other events are docu-
mented with timestamp such that they are tamper-proof. At minimum, the last 1600 events are stored
in non-volatile memory.
The data logging allows process values and calculated values, as well as counters, to be stored in freely
definable intervals. Predefined analyses (Day, Month, Year, Billing dates) support the transparency of
the process and ensure a quick overview of all consumption values.
All entries into the event logbook and the logged data can be read out automatically via the visualiza-
tion software (Field Data Manager Software) and backed up in an SQL database so that it is tamper-
proof.
For fast and easy-to-understand analysis in case of service, an internal diagnostic memory with
occurred error messages is also available.
Analysis No. of analyses
Interval (1min) Approx. 700
Day 260 days
Month/year/billing date 17 years
Events At least 1600 (depending on the length of the message text)
Approval for custody transfer and custody transfer logbook

The device is equipped with a custody transfer switch, which disables configuration ranges that are rel-
evant for custody transfer.
The custody transfer switch is located inside the device. The housing is lead-sealed.
The switch is enabled before delivery if the device is ordered with approval for custody transfer. Fol-
lowing this, it is possible to reconfigure relevant device settings three times. All changes to the param-
eters are logged in the custody transfer logbook and time-stamped.
The switch can only be reset by the manufacturer.
Thus the seamless documentation enables versatile commissioning and parameter configuration of
the computer in the field (without loss of custody transfer approval).
Limit value monitoring

Three limits can be assigned as desired the following measured and calculated values:
Volume flow, temperature, pressure, mass flow, power (heat flow), density, enthalpy, operating vol-
ume, heat and tariff 1, tariff 2
Endress+Hauser 3
EngyCal® RH33
In case of violation of the defined limits, an entry is made into the event logbook. In addition, relays
can be switched and the off-limit condition can be indicated in the display. Limits are also visible via
the integrated Web server.
Bidirectional measurement (optional)

EngyCal® RH33 enables bidirectional measurement, i.e. the combined measurement of heat and cold,
for example when charging/discharging a heat accumulator, including calculation of the quantities of
heat. The bidirectional measurement can be flow-dependent or temperature-dependent.
This option cannot be combined with the tariff function.
A digital input can be used to detect the flow direction.
Tariff counters (optional)

The tariff counters enable analysis and recording of the energy on an additional counter.
Two types of tariff counter are available: A defined tariff can be activated by an event or via the digital
inputs. If the defined event occurs, the calculated energy is counted at this tariff.
Tariff counters enable, for example, invoicing on specific billing dates (due date invoicing), require-
ments-based billing (daytime/nighttime tariff) and analysis of counters when reaching set points, e.g.
power-dependent.
Various tariff models are available for selection in the device, e.g. Energy; Power, warm; Power, cold;
Time.
The standard counters continue running at the same time, e.g. they are not affected by the activation
of the tariff counters.
This option cannot be combined with the bidirectional measurement function.
Real time clock (RTC)

The device has a real time clock that can be synchronized via a free digital input or using the Field Data
Manager software MS20.
The real time clock continues running even in case of a power failure, the device documents power on
and off; the clock switches automatically or (optionally) manually from daylight saving to standard
time.
Display
To display measured values, counters and calculated values, 6 groups are available. Each group can be
assigned up to 3 values or meter readings as desired.
Analyzing the stored data - Field Data Manager software MS20

The Field Data Manager Software allows the stored measured values, alarms and events, and the
device configuration to be read out from the device (automatically) so that they are tamper-proof and
stored securely in an SQL database. The software offers centralized data management with a variety of
visualization functions. Using an integrated system service, analyses and reports can be created,
printed and stored fully automatically. Security is provided by the FDA-compliant audit trail of the soft-
ware and the extensive user management. Simultaneous access and analysis of data from various
workstations or users is supported (client-server architecture).
4 Endress+Hauser
EngyCal® RH33
Input
Current/pulse input This input can be used either as a current input for 0/4 to 20 mA signals (not if the approval for custody
transfer option has been selected) or as a pulse/frequency input.
The input is galvanically isolated (500 V testing voltage towards all other inputs and outputs).
Cycle time
The cycle time is 250 ms or 500 ms respectively when using one or two RTD inputs.
Reaction time
In the case of analog signals, the reaction time is the time between the change at the input and the
time when the output signal is equivalent to 90% of the full scale value. The reaction time is lengthened
by 250 ms if an RTD with 3-wire measurement is connected.
Input Output Reaction time [ms]
Current Current ≤ 600
Current Relay/digital output ≤ 600
RTD Current/ relay/digital output ≤ 600
Cable open circuit detection Current/ relay/digital output ≤ 600
Cable open circuit detection, RTD Current/ relay/digital output ≤ 1100
Pulse input Pulse output ≤ 600
Current input
Measuring range: 0/4 to 20 mA + 10 % over range
Accuracy: 0.1 % of full scale value
Temperature drift: 0.01 %/K (0.0056 %/°F) of the full scale value
Loading capacity: Max. 50 mA, max. 2.5 V
Input impedance (load): 50 Ω
HART® signals Not affected
A/D converter resolution: 20 bit
Pulse/frequency input
The pulse/frequency input can be configured for different frequency ranges:
• Pulses and frequencies up to 12.5 kHz
• Pulses and frequencies up to 25 Hz (filters out bounce contacts, max. bounce time: 5 ms)
Minimum pulse width:
Range up to 12.5 kHz 40 μs

Range up to 25 Hz 20 ms
Maximum permissible contact bounce time:
Range up to 25 Hz 5 ms
Pulse input for active voltage pulses and contact sensors as per EN 1434-2, Class IB and IC:
Non-conductive state ≤1V

Conductive state ≥2V
No-load supply voltage: 3 V to 6 V
Current limiting resistance in the power supply

(pull-up at input): 50 kΩ to 2 MΩ
Maximum permissible input voltage: 30 V (for active voltage pulses)
Endress+Hauser 5
EngyCal® RH33
Pulse input for contact sensors as per EN 1434-2, Class ID and IE:
Low-level ≤ 1.2 mA
High-level ≥ 2.1 mA
No-load supply voltage: 7 V to 9 V
Current limiting resistance in the power supply 562 Ωto 1 kΩ

(pull-up at input):
Not suitable for active input voltages.
Current/pulse input:
Low-level ≤ 8 mA
High-level ≥ 13 mA
Accuracy during frequency measurement:
Basic accuracy: 0.01 % of measured value
Temperature drift: 0.01 % of measured value over entire temperature range
Pulse output of the flow RH33 setting Electrical connection Remark

sensor
Mechanical contact Pulse ID/IE up to25 Hz "Pulse IB/IC+U" up to 25 Hz can

also be used. The current through
the contact is lower then (approx.
0.05 mA instead of 9 mA).
Advantage: less load;
disadvantage: lower interference
resistance.
A0015354
A Sensor
B RH33
Open Collector (NPN) Pulse ID/IE up to 25 Hz "Pulse IB/IC+U" can also be used.
or up to 12.5 kHz The current through the contact is
lower then (approx. 0.05 mA
instead of 9 mA). Advantage: less
load; disadvantage: lower
interference resistance.
A0015355
A Sensor
B RH33
Active voltage Pulse IB/IC+U The switching threshold is

between 1 V and 2 V
A0015356
A Sensor
B RH33
6 Endress+Hauser
EngyCal® RH33
Pulse output of the flow RH33 setting Electrical connection Remark

sensor
Active current Pulse I The switching threshold is

between 8 mA and 13 mA
A0015357
A Sensor
B RH33
Namur sensor (as per Pulse ID/IE up to 25 Hz No monitoring for short circuit is
EN60947-5-6) or up to 12.5 kHz carried out.
A0015359
A Sensor
B RH33
2 x current/RTD input These inputs can be used either as current inputs (0/4 to 20 mA; not if the approval for custody trans-
fer option has been selected) or as resistance temperature detector (RTD = resistance thermometer)
inputs. It is also possible to configure one input as a current input and the other as an RTD input.
The two inputs are galvanically connected but galvanically isolated from the other inputs and outputs
(testing voltage: 500 V).
Current input
Measuring range: 0/4 to 20 mA + 10 % over range
A/D converter resolution: 24 bit

®
HART signals are not affected.
RTD input
Pt100, Pt500 and Pt1000 resistance temperature detectors can be connected to this input.
Endress+Hauser resistance temperature detectors, type TR10, are optionally available - see ordering
information.
Measuring ranges:
Pt100_exact: -200 °C to 300 °C (-328 to 572 °F)

Pt100_wide: -200 °C to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F)
Pt500: -200 °C to 300 °C (-328 to 572 °F)
Pt1000: -200 °C to 300 °C (-328 to 572 °F)
Connection method: 2-, 3- or 4-wire connection
Accuracy: 4-wire:
0.06% of measuring range
3-wire:
0.06% of measuring range + 0.8 K (1.44 °F)
Temperature drift: 0.01 %/K (0.0056 %/°F) of the measuring range
Endress+Hauser 7
EngyCal® RH33
Delta T measurement (differential measurement

between 0.03 °C (0.054 °F)
both RTD inputs):
Characteristic curves: DIN EN 60751:2008 IPTS-90
Max. cable resistance: 40 Ω
Cable open circuit detection: Outside the measuring range
Digital inputs Two digital inputs are available for switching the following functions.
Digital input 1 Digital input 2
Activate tariff counter 1 Activate tariff counter 2

Time synchronization Change flow direction
Lock device (Block set up) Time synchronization
Lock device (Block set up)
Input level:
To IEC 61131-2 type 3:
Logical "0" (corresponds to -3 to +5 V), activation with logical "1" (corresponds to +11 to +30 V)
Input current:
Max. 3.2 mA
Input voltage:
Max. 30 V (steady-state, without destroying the input)
8 Endress+Hauser
EngyCal® RH33
Output
Current/pulse output This output can be used either as a 0/4 to 20 mA current output or as a voltage pulse output. The out-
(option) put is galvanically isolated (500 V testing voltage towards all other inputs and outputs).
Current output
Output range: 0/4 to 20 mA + 10 % over range
Load: 0 to 600 Ω (as per IEC 61131-2)
Inductive load: Max. 10 mH
Capacitance load: Max. 10 μF
Ripple: Max. 12 mVpp on 600 Ω for frequencies < 50 kHz
D/A converter resolution: 14 bit
Pulse output
Frequency: Max. 12.5 kHz
Pulse width: Min. 40 μs
Voltage level: Low: 0 to 2 V

High: 15 to 20 V
Maximum output current: 22 mA
Short-circuit proof
2 x relay output The relays are designed as NO contacts. The output is galvanically isolated (1500 V testing voltage
towards all other inputs and outputs).
Max. relay switching capacity: AC: 250 V, 3 A

DC: 30 V, 3 A
Minimum contact load: 10 V, 1 mA
Min. switching cycles: >105
2 x digital output, open col- The two digital inputs are galvanically isolated from one another and from all the other inputs and out-
lector (option) puts (testing voltage: 500 V). The digital outputs can be used as status or pulse outputs.
Frequency: Max. 1 kHz
Pulse width: Min. 500 μs
Current: Max. 120 mA
Voltage: Max. 30 V
Voltage drop: Max. 2 V in conductive state
Maximum load resistance: 10 kΩ

For higher values, the switching edges are flattened.
Endress+Hauser 9
EngyCal® RH33
Auxiliary voltage output The auxiliary voltage output can be used to power the transmitter or control the digital inputs. The aux-
(transmitter power supply) iliary voltage is short-circuit proof and galvanically isolated (500 V testing voltage towards all other
inputs and outputs).
Output voltage: 24 V DC ±15% (not stabilized)
Output current: Max. 70 mA

®
HART signals are not affected.
Terminal assignment
Electrical connection
A0022341
Terminal assignment of the EngyCal® RH33
Supply voltage • Low-voltage power unit: 100 to 230 V AC (-15% / +10%) 50/60 Hz
• Extra-low voltage power unit:
24 V DC (-50% / +75%)
24 V AC (±50%) 50/60 Hz
An overload protection unit (rated current ≤ 10 A) is required for the power cable.
Power consumption 15 VA
10 Endress+Hauser
EngyCal® RH33
Communication interfaces
A USB interface (with CDI protocol), and optionally Ethernet, are used to configure the device and read
out the values. ModBus and M-Bus are optionally available as communication interfaces.
None of the interfaces has a modifying effect on the device in accordance with PTB Requirement PTB-
A 50.1.
USB device Connection: Type B socket
Specification: USB 2.0
Speed: Full speed (max. 12 MBit/sec)
Max. cable length: 3 m (9.8 ft.)
Ethernet TCP/IP The Ethernet interface is optional, and cannot be combined with other optional interfaces. It is galvan-
ically isolated (testing voltage: 500 V). A standard patch cable (e.g. CAT5E) can be used to connect the
Ethernet interface. A special cable gland is available for this purpose which allows users to guide pre-
terminated cables through the housing. Via the Ethernet interface, the device can be connected to
office equipment using a hub or a switch.
Standard: 10/100 Base-T/TX (IEEE 802.3)
Socket: RJ-45
Max. cable length: 100 m (328 ft.)
Web server
When the device is connected via Ethernet, the display values can also be read out via the Internet
using a web server.
Data can be read out via the web server in HTML or XML format.
RS485 Connection 3-pin plug-in terminal
Transmission protocol RTU
Transmission rate 2400/4800/9600/19200/38400
Parity Choose from None, Even, Odd
Modbus TCP The Modbus TCP interface is optional, and cannot be ordered with other optional interfaces. It is used
to connect the device to higher-order systems to transmit all measured values and process values. The
Modbus TCP interface is physically identical to the Ethernet interface.
Modbus RTU The Modbus RTU (RS-485) interface is optional, and cannot be ordered with other optional interfaces.
It is galvanically isolated (testing voltage: 500 V) and used to connect the device to higher-order sys-
tems to transmit all measured values and process values. It is connected via a 3-pin plug-in terminal.
M-Bus The M-Bus (Meter Bus) interface is optional, and cannot be ordered with other optional interfaces. It
is galvanically isolated (testing voltage: 500 V) and used to connect the device to higher-order systems
to transmit all measured values and process values. It is connected via a 3-pin plug-in terminal.
Endress+Hauser 11
EngyCal® RH33
Reference operating condi- • Power supply 230 V AC ± 10%; 50 Hz ± 0.5 Hz
tions • Warm-up time > 2 h
• Ambient temperature 25 °C ± 5 K (77 ± 9 °F)
• Humidity 39% ± 10% RH
Arithmetic unit Medium Variable Range
Temperature measuring range 0 to 350 °C (32 to 662 °F)
Temperature differential range ΔT 0 to 350 K (0 to 630 °F)
Measuring range approved for custody 0 to 300 °C (32 to 572 °F)

transfer ΔT: 3 to 297 K (5.4 to 534.6 °F)
Water
Accuracy 3 to 20 K (5.4 to 36 °F) < 0.7% of the measured
value
20 to 300 K (36 to 540 °F) < 0.2% of the mea-
sured value
Accuracy acc. to EN1434/OIML75 ± (0.5 + ΔΘ min/ΔΘ) %
Water/glycol Glycol concentration 0-60 %
Temperature measuring range -40 to 350 °C (-40 to 662 °F)
Maximum temperature differential 0 to 390 K (0 to 702 °F)

range ΔT
Accuracy (0 - 40 % glycol) 3 to 20 K (5.4 to 36 °F) < 0.9% of the measured

value
20 to 300 K (36 to 540 °F) < 0.4% of the mea-
sured value
Liquids Temperature measuring range -200 to 600 °C (-328 to 1112 °F)
Maximum temperature differential 0 to 390 K (0 to 702 °F)

range ΔT
Error limit for ΔT see water
Measurement and calculation interval 500 ms
Installation
Installation instructions Mounting location

Wall/pipe mounting, panel or top-hat rail as per IEC 607151)
Orientation
The orientation is only determined by the legibility of the display.
Environment
Ambient temperature range -20 to +60 °C (-4 to +140 °F)
Storage temperature -30 to +70 °C (-22 to 158 °F)
Climate class As per IEC 60 654-1 Class B2, as per EN 1434 ambient class C
1) According to UL approval panel or surface mountable only.
12 Endress+Hauser
EngyCal® RH33
Humidity Maximum relative humidity 80 % for temperatures up to 31 °C (87.8 °F), decreasing linearly to 50 %
relative humidity at 40 °C (104 °F).
Electr. safety As per IEC 61010-1, UL61010-1 and CAN C22.2 No 1010-1.
• Protection class II
• Overvoltage category II
• Pollution degree 2
• Overload protection ≤ 10 A
• Operating altitude: up to 2000 m (6560 ft) above MSL
Degree of protection • Panel mounting: IP65 front panel, IP20 rear panel (not evaluated by UL)
• Top-hat rail: IP20
• Field housing: IP66, NEMA4x (for cable gland with double seal insert: IP65) (not evaluated by UL)
Electromagnetic compatibil- As per EN 1434-4, EN 61326 and Namur NE21

ity
Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions EngyCal® RH33
a0013438
BTU meter housing; dimensions in mm (in)
Weight Approx. 700 g (1.5 lbs)
Material Housing: fiber-glass reinforced plastic, Valox 553
Terminals Spring terminals, 2.5 mm2 (14 AWG); auxiliary voltage with plug-in screw terminal (AWG 30-12;
torque 0.5-0.6 Nm).
Endress+Hauser 13
EngyCal® RH33
Resistance temperature
detector TR10 (option)
a0015313
Optional resistance temperature detector TR10; dimensions in mm (dimensions in inches in brackets)

IL Insertion length
L Immersion length
More technical data on the resistance temperature detector TR10 can be found in the associated Tech-
nical Information, which you can download from www.de.endress.com/download.
Process connection of resis- Process connection Version Thread length TL in

tance temperature detector mm (in)
TR10 (option)
Cylindrical Conical
G G1/2" 15 (0.6)
NPT NPT1/2" 8 (0.32)
a0008620
14 Endress+Hauser
EngyCal® RH33
Human interface
Display elements • Display:
160 x 80 dot matrix LCD with white background, color switches to red in an alarm condition, active
display area 70 x 34 mm (2.76 x 1.34 ")
• LED status display:
Operation: 1 x green
Fault indication: 1 x red
a0013444
Display and operating elements of the BTU meter

1 LED green, "Operation"
2 LED red, "Fault indicator"
3 USB connection for configuration
4 Operating keys: -, +, E
5 160x80 DOT matrix display
Local operation 3 keys, "-", "+", "E".
Configuration interface USB interface, front-panel, optional Ethernet interface: configuration via PC with FieldCare Device
Setup configuration software.
Data logging Real time clock

• Drift: 15 min per year
• Power reserve: 1 week
Software • Field Data Manager software MS20: Visualization software and database for analyzing and eval-
uating the measuring data and calculated values, as well as tamper-proof data logging.
• FieldCare Device Setup: The device can be programmed using the FieldCare PC software. FieldCare
Device Setup is included in the scope of supply of the Commubox FXA291 or RXU10-G1 (see ‘Acces-
sories’) or can be downloaded at no charge from www.products.endress.com/fieldcare.
Endress+Hauser 15
EngyCal® RH33

Approval for custody transfer As per MID (EN1434 water/liquids) and OIML R75
CE mark The measuring system meets the legal requirements of the EU directives. Endress+Hauser confirms
successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
Other standards and guide- • IEC 60529:

lines Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
• IEC 61010-1: 2001 cor 2003
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use
• IEC 61326 series:
• NAMUR NE21, NE43
Association for Standards for Control and Regulation in the Chemical Industry
• IAWPS-IF 97
Internationally applicable and recognized calculation standard (since 1997) for steam and water.
Issued by the International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam (IAPWS).
• OIML R75
International construction and testing regulation for water energy managers by the Organisation
Internationale de Métrologie Légale.
• EN 1434
• EN ISO 5167
Measurement of fluid flow by means of pressure differential devices
CSA GP • CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 61010-1, 2nd Edition
UL approval • UL 61010-1, 2nd Edition
16 Endress+Hauser
EngyCal® RH33
Detailed ordering information is available from the following sources:
• In the Product Configurator on the Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com → Select country →
Instruments → Select device → Product page function: Configure this product
• From your Endress+Hauser Sales Center: www.endress.com/worldwide
Product Configurator - the tool for individual product configuration
• Up-to-the-minute configuration data
• Depending on the device: Direct input of information specific to measuring point, such as measuring
range or operating language
• Automatic verification of exclusion criteria
• Automatic creation of the order code and its breakdown in PDF or Excel output format
• Ability to order directly in the Endress+Hauser Online Shop
Accessories
Various accessories are available for the device, and these can be ordered with the device or at a later
stage from Endress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from your
local Endress+Hauser Sales Center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website:
www.endress.com
Device-specific accessories • Pipe mounting set

• DIN rail mounting set
• Panel mounting set
• Wall mounting set
• USB cable and FieldCare Device Setup calibration software incl. DTM library
– RXU10-G1
– FXA291
• Visualization software and Field Data Manager MS20, SQL-based database software
System components Overvoltage protection for sensors and devices:

• HAW569 surge arrester to screw into field housing, M20
• HAW562 surge arrester limiting high voltages on signal cables and components
Documentation
• Operating Instructions for 'EngyCal® RH33 BTU Meter' (BA00290K/09)
• Technical Information for 'Surge Arrester HAW562' (TI01012K/09)
• Technical Information for 'Surge Arrester HAW569' (TI01013K/09)
• Brochure 'System Components and Data Managers - Solutions for a Complete Measuring Point'
(FA00016K/09)
Endress+Hauser 17
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.2 PLC Catalogues

4.2.1 CPU
11
Technical Data
CompactLogix Controllers Specifications

CompactLogix 5370 Controller Catalog Numbers
1769-L16ER-BB1B, 1769-L18ER-BB1B, 1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L19ER-BB1B,
1769-L24ER-QB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1BK, 1769-L27ERM-
QBFC1B,1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L30ERMK, 1769-
L30ERMS, 1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L33ERMK, 1769-L33ERMS,
1769-L33ERMSK, 1769-L36ERM, 1769-L36ERMS, 1769-L37ERM, 1769-L37ERMK,
1769-L37ERMS, 1769-L37ERMSK, 1769-L38ERM, 1769-L38ERMK, 1769-L38ERMS,
1769-L38ERMSK
Armor CompactLogix and Armor Compact GuardLogix

Controller Catalog Numbers
1769-L33ERMO, 1769-L33ERMOS, 1769-L36ERMO, 1769-L36ERMOS, 1769-L37ERMO,
1769-L37ERMOS,1769-L38ERMO, 1769-L38ERMOS
1769 Packaged Controller Catalog Numbers
1769-L23-QBFC1B, 1769-L23E-QB1B, 1769-L23E-QBFC1B
1769 Modular Controller Catalog Numbers
1769-L31, 1769-L32C, 1769-L35CR, 1769-L32E, 1769-L32EK, 1769-L35E
1768 Controller Catalog Numbers
1768-L43, 1768-L43S, 1768-L45, 1768-L45S
Memory Card Catalog Numbers
1784-CF128, 1784-SD1, 1784-SD2
Topic Page
CompactLogix 5370 Controllers 6
Armor CompactLogix and Armor Compact GuardLogix Controllers 37
1769 Packaged CompactLogix Controllers with Embedded I/O 42
1769 Modular CompactLogix Controllers 53
1768 CompactLogix Controllers 57
Controller Memory Use 63
Controller Compatibility 64
Controller Connections 67
Determine Total Connection Use 69
CompactLogix Controller Accessories 70
Additional Resources 73
Environmental Specifications - 1769 CompactLogix™ Controllers and Compact GuardLogix® 5370 Controllers
Attribute 1769-L16ER-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QB1B, 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ERMS, 1769-L23-QBFC1B, 1769-L31,
1769-L18ER-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L33ERMS, 1769-L23E-QB1B, 1769-L32C,
1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1BK, 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L33ERMSK, 1769-L23E-QBFC1B 1769-L35CR,
1769-L19ER-BB1B 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 1769-L30ERMK, 1769-L36ERMS, 1769-L32E,
1769-L33ER, 1769-L37ERMS, 1769-L32EK,
1769-L33ERM, 1769-L38ERMS, 1769-L35E
1769-L33ERMK, 1769-L37ERMSK,
1769-L36ERM, 1769-L38ERMSK
1769-L37ERM,
1769-L37ERMK,
1769-L38ERM,
1769-L38ERMK
Temperature, operating -20…+60 °C 0…60 °C
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold), (-4…+140 °F) (32…140 °F)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na, Operating Thermal
Shock)
Temperature, storage -40…+85 °C
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Unpackaged (-40…+185 °F)
Nonoperating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Unpackaged
Nonoperating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na, Unpackaged
Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
Temperature, surrounding air, max 60 °C (140 °F)
Relative humidity 5…95% noncondensing
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Unpackaged Damp
Heat)
Vibration 2 g @ 10…500 Hz(1) 5 g @ 10…500 Hz 5 g @ 10…500 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating)
Shock, operating 30 g(1) 20 g - DIN rail 20 g - DIN rail
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock) 30 g - Panel 30 g - Panel
Shock, nonoperating 50 g(1), (2) 30 g - DIN rail 30 g - DIN rail
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock) 40 g - Panel 40 g - Panel
Emissions IEC 61000-6-4
CISPR 11
ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges 4 kV contact 6 kV contact discharges
IEC 61000-4-2 8 kV air discharges discharges 8 kV air discharges
8 kV air discharges
2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-TD005L-EN-P - May 2018

Environmental Specifications - 1769 CompactLogix™ Controllers and Compact GuardLogix® 5370 Controllers (continued)
Attribute 1769-L16ER-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QB1B, 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ERMS, 1769-L23-QBFC1B, 1769-L31,
1769-L18ER-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L33ERMS, 1769-L23E-QB1B, 1769-L32C,
1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1BK, 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L33ERMSK, 1769-L23E-QBFC1B 1769-L35CR,
1769-L19ER-BB1B 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 1769-L30ERMK, 1769-L36ERMS, 1769-L32E,
1769-L33ER, 1769-L37ERMS, 1769-L32EK,
1769-L33ERM, 1769-L38ERMS, 1769-L35E
1769-L33ERMK, 1769-L37ERMSK,
1769-L36ERM, 1769-L38ERMSK
1769-L37ERM,
1769-L37ERMK,
1769-L38ERM,
1769-L38ERMK
Radiated RF immunity 10V/m with 1 kHz sine-wave 80% AM from 10V/m with 1 kHz sine-wave 80% AM from 10V/m with 200 Hz 1769-L31, 1769-L32C,
IEC 61000-4-3 80…2000 MHz 80…2000 MHz 50% Pulse 100% AM 1769-L35CR
10V/m with 200 Hz 50% Pulse 100% AM @ 900 MHz 10V/m with 200 Hz 50% Pulse 100% AM @ at 900 MHz 10V/m with 1 kHz sine-
10V/m with 200 Hz 50% Pulse 100% AM @ 900 MHz 10V/m with 200 Hz wave 80% AM from
1890 MHz 10V/m with 200 Hz 50% Pulse 100% AM @ 50% Pulse 100% AM 80…2000 MHz
10V/m with 1 kHz sine-wave 80% AM from 1890 MHz at 1890 MHz 10V/m with
2000…2700 MHz 3V/m with 1 kHz sine-wave 80% AM from 10V/m with 1 kHz 200 Hz 50% Pulse 100%
2000…2700 MHz sine-wave 80% AM AM @ 900 MHz
from 80…2000 MHz 10V/m with
10V/m with 1 kHz 200 Hz 50% Pulse 100%
sine-wave 80% AM AM @ 1890 MHz
from 2000…2700
MHz 1769-L32E, 1769-L35E
10V/m with 1 kHz sine-
wave 80% AM from
80…2000 MHz
10V/m with
200 Hz 50% Pulse 100%
AM @ 900 MHz
10V/m with
200 Hz 50% Pulse 100%
AM @ 1890 MHz
3V/m with 1 kHz sine-
wave 80% AM from
2000…2700 MHz
EFT/B immunity ±3 kV at 5 kHz on power ports ±3 kV at 5 kHz on ±3 kV at 5 kHz on ±2 kV at 5 kHz on 1769-L31, 1769-L32C,
IEC 61000-4-4 ±3 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports communication communication power ports 1769-L35CR
±3 kV at 5 kHz on communication ports ports ports ±2 kV at 5 kHz on ±2 kV at 5 kHz on
±4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports communication ports
Protective Earth ±2 kV at 5 kHz on
(PE) communication 1769-L32E, 1769-L35E
ports
±3 kV at 5 kHz on power
ports
±3 kV at 5 kHz on
communication ports
Surge transient immunity ±1 kV line-line (DM) ±1 kV line-line (DM) and ±2 kV line-earth (CM) on communication ±1 kV line-line (DM) 1769-L31
IEC 61000-4-5 and ±2 kV line-earth ±2 kV line-earth (CM) on ports and ±2 kV line-earth Channel 0: ±2 kV line-
(CM) on power ports power ports (CM) on power ports earth (CM) on shielded
±1 kV line-line (DM) ±1 kV line-line (DM) and ±1 kV line-line (DM) ports
and ±2 kV line-earth ±2 kV line-earth (CM) on and ±2 kV line-earth Channel 1: ±1 kV line-
(CM) on signal ports signal ports (CM) on signal ports earth (CM) on shielded
±2 kV line-earth (CM) ±2 kV line-earth (CM) on ±2 kV line-earth ports
on communication shielded ports (CM) on shielded
ports ±2 kV line-earth (CM) on ports 1769-L32C, 1769-L35CR,
communication ports ±2 kV line-earth 1769-L32E, 1769-L35E
(CM) on ±2 kV line-earth (CM)
communication on communication ports
ports
Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine-wave 80% AM from 150 kHz…80 MHz
IEC 61000-4-6
(1) If you are mounting a CompactLogix™ 5370 L1 controller on an EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (1.38 x 0.59 in.) DIN rail, you must first adhere a bumper on the back of the controller. Failure to install the bumper before mounting the
controller causes the system to fail to meet this specification. For more information, see the CompactLogix 5370 Controllers User Manual, publication 1769-UM021.
(2) If you are mounting a CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller on an EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (1.38 x 0.59 in.) DIN rail, the Shock, nonoperating specification = 30 g.
Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-TD005L-EN-P - May 2018 3

During development, safety and standard have the same rules. The following are allowed:
• Multiple programmers
• Online editing
• Forcing
Once the project is tested and ready for final validation, you apply the safety application signature and safety-lock the
application. This process sets the safety task to a SIL 3 integrity level. The Compact GuardLogix enforces the SIL 3
integrity level. When safety memory is locked and protected, the safety logic cannot be modified and all safety functions
operate with SIL 3 integrity. On the standard side of the Compact GuardLogix controller, all functions operate like a
regular Logix controller. Thus online editing, forcing, and other activities are all allowed.
Standard logic and external devices, like HMIs or other controllers, can read safety memory with this level of integration.
This level of integration removes the need to condition safety memory for use elsewhere. The result is easy systemwide
integration and the ability to display safety status on displays or marquees. Use Guard I/O modules for field device ™
connectivity. For safety interlocking between Compact GuardLogix controllers, use Ethernet or ControlNet™ networks.
Multiple Compact GuardLogix controllers can share safety data for zone to zone interlocking, or one Compact
GuardLogix controller can use remote distributed safety I/O between different cells/areas.
Features - CompactLogix 5370 Controllers and Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controllers
Feature 1769-L16ER-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QB1B, 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L30ERMS, 1769-L33ERMS,
1769-L18ER-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L30ERMK, 1769-L33ERMSK, 1769-L36ERMS,
1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1BK 1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L37ERMOS, 1769-L37ERMS,
1769-L19ER-BB1B 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 1769-L33ERMK, 1769-L36ERM, 1769-L37ERMSK, 1769-L38ERMS,
1769-L37ERM, 1769-L37ERMK, 1769-L38ERMSK
1769-L38ERM,
1769-L38ERMK
Controller tasks: • 32 tasks
• Continuous • 100 programs/task
• Periodic
Built-in communication ports • Two Ethernet ports - CompactLogix 5370 controllers have two Ethernet ports to connect to an EtherNet/IP network. The ports carry the same network traffic as part
of the embedded switch of the controller. However, the controller uses only one IP address.
• One USB port (only for temporary connection)
Communication options EtherNet/IP • EtherNet/IP
• DeviceNet via 1769-SDN scanner
EtherNet/IP node, max • 1769-L16ER-BB1B: Up to 4nodes • 1769-L24ER-QB1B, • 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L30ERM, 769-L30ERMK, 1769-L30ERMS:
• 1769-L18ER-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B, Up to 16 nodes
1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1BK: Up to • 1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L33ERMK, 1769-L33ERMS, 1769-L33ERMSK:
1769-L19ER-BB1B: Up to 8 nodes 8 nodes Up to 32 nodes
• 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B: Up to 16 • 1769-L36ERM, 1769-L36ERMS: Up to 48 nodes
nodes • 1769-L37ERM, 1769-L37ERMK, 1769-L37ERMS, 1769-L37ERMSK:
Up to 64 nodes
• 1769-L38ERM, 1769-L38ERMK, 1769-L38ERMS, 1769-L38ERMSK:
Up to 80 nodes
Controller connections 256
Embedded I/O modules • 16 DC digital inputs All controllers: –
• 16 DC digital outputs • 16 DC digital inputs
• 16 DC digital outputs
Only 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B:
• 4 high-speed counter modules
• 4 high-speed counter module
outputs
• 4 universal analog inputs
• 2 analog output points
Sockets, max 32
Integrated Motion over an 1769-L18ERM-BB1B - 1 or 2 axes 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B - As many as 4 • 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L30ERMS - As many as 4 axes
EtherNet/IP network axes • 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L33ERMS - As many as 8 axes
• 1769-L36ERM, 1769-L36ERMS - As many as 16 axes
• 1769-L37ERM, 1769-L37ERMS - As many as 16 axes
• 1769-L38ERM and 1769-L38ERMS - As many as 16 axes

Features - CompactLogix 5370 Controllers and Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controllers

Feature 1769-L16ER-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QB1B, 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L30ERMS, 1769-L33ERMS,
1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1BK 1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L37ERMOS, 1769-L37ERMS,
1769-L19ER-BB1B 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 1769-L33ERMK, 1769-L36ERM, 1769-L37ERMSK, 1769-L38ERMS,
1769-L37ERM, 1769-L37ERMK, 1769-L38ERMSK
1769-L38ERM,
1769-L38ERMK
Programming languages • Relay ladder(1)
• Structured Text
• Function block
• SFC
Integrated safety – Yes
(1) The Compact GuardLogix 5370 controllers support only the relay ladder programming language in the safety task. The Compact GuardLogix 5370 controllers support all listed programming languages in the standard task.
Technical Specifications - CompactLogix 5370 Controllers and Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controllers
Attribute 1769-L16ER-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QB1B, 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L30ERMS, 1769-L33ERMS,
1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1BK 1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L37ERMS, 1769-L37ERMSK,
1769-L19ER-BB1B 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 1769-L33ERMK, 1769-L36ERM, 1769-L38ERMS, 1769-L38ERMSK
1769-L37ERM, 1769-L37ERMK,
1769-L38ERM, 1769-L38ERMK
User memory • 1769-L16ER: 384 KB • 1769-L24ER-QB1B, • 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ER-NSE, • 1769-L30ERMS: 1 MB standard +
• 1769-L18ER, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L30ERM: 1 MB 0.5 MB safety
1769-L18ERM: 512 KB 1769-L24ER-QBFC1BK: 750 KB • 1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, • 1769-L33ERMS, 1769-L33ERMSK:
• 1769-L19ER-BB1B: 1 MB • 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B: 1 MB 1769-L33ERM: 2 MB 2 MB standard + 1 MB safety
• 1769-L36ERM: 3 MB • 1769-L36ERMS: 3 MB standard +
• 1769-L37ERM, 1769-L37ERMK: 1.5 MB safety
4 MB • 1769-L37ERMS, 1769-L37ERMSK:
• 1769-L38ERM, 1769-L38ERMK: 4 MB standard + 1.5 MB safety
5 MB • 1769-L38ERMS, 1769-L38ERMSK:
5 MB standard + 1.5 MB safety
Optional nonvolatile memory 1784-SD1 card with 1 Gb of available memory (shipped with controller)
1784-SD2 card with 2 Gb of available memory (available for separate ordering)
Number of local expansion • 1769-L16ER-BB1B: 4 - 1769 Compact I/O™ modules • 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L30ERMK, 1769-
modules, max(1) 6 - 1734 POINT I/O™ modules L30ERMS, 1769-L30ERMSK:
• 1769-L18ER-BB1B, 8 -1769 Compact I/O™ modules
1769-L18ERM-BB1B, • 1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L33ERMK, 1769-L33ERMS, 1769-L33ERMSK:
1769-L19ER-BB1B: 16 -1769 Compact I/O modules
8 - 1734 POINT I/O™ modules • 1769-L36ERM, 1769-L36ERMS:
30 -1769 Compact I/O modules
Number of I/O module banks, – 1 3
max
Current draw @ 5V DC, 1A • 1769-L24ER-QB1B: 1.54 A 500 mA 850 mA
controller power Value rated at the following
ambient temperatures:
40 °C (104 °F), 55 °C (131 °F),
60 °C (140 °F).
• 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B: 1 A
Value rated at the following
40 °C (104 °F), 55 °C (131 °F),
60 °C (140 °F).
Current draw @ 24V DC, – • 1769-L24ER-QB1B: 0.95 A 225 mA 700 mA
controller power Value rated at the following
40 °C (104 °F), 55 °C (131 °F),
60 °C (140 °F).
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B: 0.8 A
Value rated at the following
40 °C (104 °F), 55 °C (131 °F),
60 °C (140 °F).

Technical Specifications - CompactLogix 5370 Controllers and Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controllers (continued)
1769-L37ERM, 1769-L37ERMK,
1769-L38ERM, 1769-L38ERMK
Current draw @ 24V DC, field 3 A - Combined total for all devices –
power, max that draw current from field power
connections
Input: 5 mA
Output: 500 mA
Power dissipation, max 11.5 W • 1769-L24ER-QB1B: 12 W 4.5 W 6.5 W
• 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B,
L27ERM-QBFC1B: 21 W
Isolation voltage 50V (continuous), Basic Insulation 30V (continuous), Basic Insulation Type, USB to system, Ethernet to system and 50V, Basic Insulation Type
Type Ethernet to Ethernet Tested at 500V AC for 60 s, System to
Tested at 500V AC for 60 s, System to Type tested at 500V AC for 60 s Communication ports.
Field
Short circuit protection, field Internal fuse, Non-replaceable –
power
Recommended external short User-provided –
circuit protection, field power 4…5 A @ 3.15…5.5 A2t fuse
Weight, approx 0.66 kg (1.5 lb) • 1769-L24ER-QB1B = 0.31 kg (0.68 lb) 0.54 kg (1.18 lb)
0.63 kg (1.39 lb)
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B =
0.9 kg (1.9 lb)
Module width 100.00 mm (3.94 in.) 1769-L24ER-QB1B = 55.00 mm (2.17 in.) 89.00 mm (3.50 in.)
115.00 mm (4.53 in.)
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B =
140 mm (5.51 in.)
Module location DIN rail mount DIN rail or panel mount
Panel-mounting screw torque — 1.1…1.8 N•m (10…16 lb•in) - use M4 or #8 screws
Embedded power supply 24V DC input, isolated 24V DC Input, isolated 1769-PA2, 1769-PB2, 1769-PA4, 1769-PB4
Power supply distance rating – • Controller and 1769-SDN: 4 4 (3 I/O modules between controller
• 1769 Compact I/O modules: 4…8, and power supply)
depending on module
Wire category(2) 1 - signal ports 2 - communication ports
1 - power ports
2 - communication ports
Wire type, Ethernet RJ45 connector according to IEC 60603-7, 2 or 4 pair Category 5e minimum cable according to TIA 568 B.1 or Category 5 cable according to ISO/IEC 24702
Wire type, power terminals, Copper –
and embedded I/O connections
Wire size, power terminals(3) 0.051…3.31 mm2 (30…12 AWG) 0.25…2.50 mm2 (22…14 AWG) solid –
solid or stranded copper wire rated at copper wire rated at 75 °C (167 °F), or
75 °C (167 °F), or greater, greater
1.2 mm (3/64 in.) insulation, max 1.2 mm (3/64 in.) insulation, max
Each terminal accepts 1 or 2 wires Each terminal accepts only 1 wire
Wire stripping length, 10 mm (0.39 in) 8 mm (0.31 in) –
power terminals(3)
Screw torque, power terminals 0.5…0.6 N•m (4.4…5.3 lb•in) 1.0…1.2 N•m (8.9…10.6 lb•in) –
(3)
Wire size, embedded I/O 0.205…1.31 mm2 (24…16 AWG) solid or stranded copper wire rated at –
connections 75 °C (167 °F), or greater
1.2 mm (3/64 in.) insulation, max or 90 °C (194 °F)
Each terminal accepts only 1 wire
Wire stripping length, 10 mm (0.39 in) –
embedded
I/O connections

Technical Specifications - CompactLogix 5370 Controllers and Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controllers (continued)
1769-L37ERM, 1769-L37ERMK,
1769-L38ERM, 1769-L38ERMK
North American temperature T4A T3C T5
code
IEC temperature code T4 T5
Enclosure type rating None (open-style)
(1) You can use up to the maximum number of local expansion modules with the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers that are listed. This condition applies if only the total current drawn by the embedded I/O and local expansion
modules does not exceed both the available POINTBus™ backplane current of 1 A and the field power current of 3 A. For more information on POINTBus™ backplane current and field-power current considerations when installing
local expansion modules, see page 12.
(2) Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing. See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 and the appropriate system-level installation manual.
(3) In regard to the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers, this specification applies to connecting wires to the power connector that is inserted in the controller. In regard to the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers, this specification applies
to connecting wires to power terminals built into the controller.
Real-time Clock Accuracy
This table lists the real-time clock accuracy specifications for the CompactLogix 5370 controllers.
Ambient Temperature Accuracy

0 °C (32 °F) -143…+42 s/mo
25 °C (77 °F) -78…+91 s/mo
40 °C (104 °F) -101…+73 s/mo
60 °C (140 °F) -204…-4.50 s/mo
Real-time Clock Hold-up Times
This table lists the typical real-time clock hold-up specifications for the CompactLogix 5370 controllers.
IMPORTANT The values in this table are typical and can vary with some CompactLogix 5370 control systems.
Ambient Temperature Holdup Time, Typical

0 °C (32 °F) 40 days
25 °C (77 °F) 35 days
40 °C (104 °F) 28 days
60 °C (140 °F) 16 days
The I/O module support for CompactLogix 5370 controller systems varies by controller.

I/O Module Support - CompactLogix 5370 L3 and Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controllers
The CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers offer local expansion modules that are installed across up to three banks of
modules. You must use 1769 Compact I/O modules with these controllers.
Remember the following when using I/O modules with the CompactLogix 5370 L3 and Compact GuardLogix 5370
controllers:
• The controller must be the leftmost module in the local bank of the system.
• The number of I/O modules that are supported in a controller system varies by controller catalog number.
Cat. No. Local 1769 Compact I/O Modules Supported, max

1769- L30ER 8
1769-L30ERM
1769-L30ERMS
1769-L30ER-NSE
1769-L33ER 16
1769-L33ERM
1769-L33ERMS
1769-L36ERM 30
1769-L36ERMS
1769-L37ERM
1768-L37ERMS
1769-L37ERMK
1768-L37ERMSK
1769-L38ERM
1769-L38ERMS
1769-L38ERMK
1769-L38ERMSK
• You can install I/O modules in as many as three banks, that is, the local bank and two additional banks.
• You can install as many as three I/O modules between the controller and power supply.
• You can install as many as eight I/O modules to the right of the power supply in the local bank.
• You can install as many as eight I/O modules on both the left and right sides of the power supply in additional
banks.
• You must consider the distance rating and current draw of the controller and all I/O modules when designing your
system.
• Systems with multiple banks can be installed vertically or horizontally.
• You must use expansion cables to connect banks in multi-bank systems.

• You must terminate the end of the last bank in a system.
Horizontal Orientation
Local Bank Additional Bank Additional Bank
1769-CRL1 Compact I/O Communication Bus End Cap

Expansion Cables
Local Bank
1769-CRR1 Compact I/O Communication Bus

Vertical Orientation
Expansion Cables
End Cap Additional Bank
Local I/O Performance of CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers
The requested packet interval (RPI) defines the frequency at which the controller sends data to and receives data from
I/O modules. In the programming software, you set an RPI rate for each I/O module in your system.
The CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers always attempt to scan an I/O module at the configured RPI rate. An I/O Task
Overlap minor fault occurs if there is not enough system bandwidth. This fault occurs if other, higher priority tasks
prevent the 1769 Compact I/O subsystem from completing before the next scheduled time for it to run again, which
consumes system bandwidth. Higher priority tasks that prevent the 1769 Compact I/O subsystem task from completing
before the next scheduled time for it to run again use up system bandwidth.
For individual I/O modules, a Module RPI Overlap minor fault occurs if there is at least one I/O module that cannot be
serviced within its RPI time.
The specific configuration parameters for a system determine the impact on actual RPI rates. These configuration factors
can impact the effective scan frequency for any individual module:
• Rates at which the RPI rates of other 1769 Compact I/O are set
• Number of other 1769 Compact I/O modules in the system
• Types of other 1769 Compact I/O modules in the system
• Application user task priorities

RPI Rate Guidelines

Type of Module Guidelines
1769 Compact I/O digital and analog The following guidelines apply:
(any mix) modules • 1…2 modules can be scanned in 0.5 ms.
• 3…4 modules can be scanned in 1 ms.
• 5…30 modules can be scanned in 2 ms.
• Some input modules have a fixed 8 ms filter, so selecting a faster RPI has no effect.
1769 Compact I/O specialty modules The following conditions apply:
• For every full-sized 1769-SDN module in the system, increase the RPI of every other module by 2 ms.
• For every 1769-HSC module in the system, increase the RPI of every other module by 1 ms.
• For every full-sized 1769-ASCII module system, increase the RPI of every other module by 1 ms.
For every 1769-SM2 module in the system, increase the RPI of other module by 2 ms. For example, the system includes four I/O modules that are configured
with an RPI = 1 ms and you add a 1769-SDN module to the system. You must increase the RPI value for all four I/O modules by 2 ms. Therefore, when the
1769-SDN module is added to the system, the four I/O modules use an RPI = 3 ms.
If, in the same system, you add a second 1769-SDN module, the RPI value of the four digital I/O modules is increased to 5 ms.
You can set individual RPI values of 1769 Compact I/O module higher than those values listed in the RPI Rate
Guidelines table. For example, if your application scans one or two modules, you do not have to use RPI values = 0.5 ms.
You can set the RPI to a higher value, such as 1.0 ms, if necessary. Remember, higher RPI values result in scanning the
data less frequently.
The RPI is asynchronous to the program scan. Other factors, such as program execution duration, affect I/O
throughput.
Certifications - CompactLogix 5370 Controllers and Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controllers
Certification(1) 1769-L16ER-BB1B, 1769-L18ER- 1769-L24ER-QB1B, 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L30ERMS, 1769-L33ERMS,
BB1B, 1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L30ERMK, 1769-L33ERMSK, 1769-L36ERMS,
1769-L19ER-BB1B 1769-L24ER-QBFC1BK, 1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L37ERMS, 1769-L37ERMSK,
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 1769-L33ERMK, 1769-L36ERM, 1769-L38ERMS, 1769-L38ERMSK
1769-L37ERM, 1769-L37ERMK,
1769-L38ERM, 1769-L38ERMK
c-UL-us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment, certified for US and Canada. See UL File E65584.
UL Listed for Class I, Division 2 Group A,B,C,D Hazardous Locations, certified for U.S. and Canada. See UL File E194810.
CE European Union 2004/108/EC EMC Directive, compliant with: European Union 2004/108/EC EMC
• EN 61326-1; Meas./Control/Lab., Industrial Requirements Directive, compliant with:
• EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity • EN 61326-1; Meas./Control/Lab.,
• EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions Industrial Requirements
• EN 61131-2; Programmable Controllers (Clause 8, Zone A & B) • EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
• EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
• EN 61131-2; Programmable Controllers
(Clause 8, Zone A & B)
• EN 60204-1; Electrical equipment of
machines
• EN ISO 13849-1; Safety-related parts of
control systems
• EN 62061; Functional safety of safety-
related control systems
European Union 2011/65/EU RoHS,
compliant with:
EN 50581; Technical documentation
RCM Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
• AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
Ex European Union 94/9/EC ATEX Directive, European Union 94/9/EC ATEX Directive, European Union 94/9/EC ATEX Directive, European Union 94/9/EC ATEX Directive,
compliant with: compliant with: compliant with: compliant with:
• EN 60079-15; Potentially Explosive • EN 60079-15; Potentially Explosive • EN 60079-15; Potentially Explosive • EN 60079-15; Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres, Protection "n" Atmospheres, Protection "n" Atmospheres, Protection "n" Atmospheres, Protection "n"
• EN 60079-0; General Requirements • EN 60079-0; General Requirements • EN 60079-0; General Requirements • EN 60079-0; General Requirements
• II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc • II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc • II 3 G Ex nA IIC T5 Gc X • II 3 G Ex nA IIC T5 Gc
• ITS12ATEX47611X • DEMKO12ATEX 1116807X • ITS09ATEX46118X • DEMKO 15ATEX1388X
TÜV — TÜV Certified for Functional Safety
Capable of SIL 3

Certifications - CompactLogix 5370 Controllers and Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controllers

Certification(1) 1769-L16ER-BB1B, 1769-L18ER- 1769-L24ER-QB1B, 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L30ERMS, 1769-L33ERMS,
BB1B, 1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L30ERMK, 1769-L33ERMSK, 1769-L36ERMS,
1769-L19ER-BB1B 1769-L24ER-QBFC1BK, 1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L37ERMS, 1769-L37ERMSK,
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 1769-L33ERMK, 1769-L36ERM, 1769-L38ERMS, 1769-L38ERMSK
1769-L37ERM, 1769-L37ERMK,
1769-L38ERM, 1769-L38ERMK
KC Korean Registration of Broadcasting and Communications Equipment, compliant with:
• Article 58-2 of Radio Waves Act, Clause 3
EAC Russian Customs Union TR CU 020/2011 EMC Technical Regulation
EtherNet/IP ODVA conformance tested to EtherNet/IP specifications.
(1) When marked. See the Product Certification link at http://www.ab.com for Declarations of Conformity, Certificates, and other certification details.
CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Minimum Spacing Requirements
50 mm
Top (2 in.)
50 mm 50 mm
1734 POINT I/O Module


Supply and I/O Module
1769-L18ER-BB1BB, or
1769-L18ERM-BB1B
(2 in.)
1769-L16ER-BB1B,
Embedded Power
(2 in.)
Controller with
End Cap
Side Side
Bottom 50 mm
(2 in.)
CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Minimum Spacing Requirements
50 mm
Top (2 in.)
50 mm 50 mm
CompactLogix 5370 L2
Supply and I/O Points
(2 in.) (2 in.)
Embedded Power
Compact I/O Module

Compact I/O Module
Compact I/O Module

Compact I/O Module
Controller with
End Cap
Side Side
Bottom 50 mm
(2 in.)

CompactLogix 5370 L3 and Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controllers Minimum Spacing Requirements
50 mm
Top (2 in.)
50 mm 50 mm
Compact GuardLogix 5370 L3
1769 Compact I/O Module
1769 Compact I/O Module

(2 in.) (2 in.)
CompactLogix 5370 L3 or
Power Supply
Controllers
End Cap
Side Side
Bottom 50 mm
(2 in.)
CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Dimensions
100 mm
100 mm 105 mm
105 mm
(3.94(3.94
in.) in.) (4.13(4.13
in.) in.)
144 mm
144 mm
(5.67(5.67
in.) in.)
130 mm
130 mm
(5.11(5.11
in.) in.)

Controller Connections
A CompactLogix system uses the connection types to establish communication links between devices:
• Controller-to-local I/O modules or local communication modules
• Controller-to-remote I/O or remote communication modules
• Controller-to-remote I/O (rack-optimized) modules
• Produced and consumed tags
• Messages
• Controller access by the programming software
• Controller access by RSLinx® Classic software for HMI or other applications
You indirectly determine the number of connections the controller uses by configuring the controller to communicate
with other devices in the system. The limit of connections can ultimately reside in the communication module you use
for the connection. If a message path routes through a communication module, the connection that is related to the
message also counts toward the connection limit of that communication module.
CompactLogix 5370 Controller Ethernet Node Limits and Connections
When designing a CompactLogix 5370 control system, you must consider the following:
• Maximum number of Ethernet nodes available for the project of your controller
• Connections
The controller that you select determines the number of Ethernet nodes available.
Cat. No. Ethernet Nodes Supported

1769-L16ER-BB1B 4
1769-L18ER-BB1B 8
1769-L18ERM-BB1B
1769-L19ER-BB1B
1769-L24ER-QB1B
8
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 16
1769-L30ER 16
1769-L30ERM
1769-L30ER-NSE
1769-L33ER 32
1769-L33ERM
1769-L36ERM 48
1769-L37ERM 65
80
All CompactLogix 5370 controllers support 256 CIP™ connections and 120 TCP/IP connections.

System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.2.2 DI, DO, AI & AO
12
Technical Data
1769 Compact I/O Modules Specifications

Catalog Numbers 1769 Series
Topic Page
Summary of Changes 2
I/O Module Overview 2
Place Compact I/O Modules 4
Digital I/O Modules 4
Analog I/O Modules 5
Specialty I/O Modules 5
Compact I/O Accessories 116
Compact I/O Mounting Dimensions 120
Wiring Systems 121
The 1769 Compact I/O™ modules can be used in the following applications:
• With a CompactLogix™ controller
• For expansion I/O in a MicroLogix™ 1500 controller assembly
• In an assembly with a 1769-ADN DeviceNet adapter
• In an assembly with a 1769-AENTR Ethernet adapter.
Unless connected to a MicroLogix 1500 base, each bank of I/O modules must include its own power supply.
Install the I/O modules on a panel with two mounting screws or on a DIN rail. The modules mechanically lock together
with a tongue-and-groove design and have an integrated communication bus that is connected from module to module by
a moveable bus connector.
Summary of Changes
This manual contains new and updated information. Changes throughout this revision are marked by change bars, as
shown to the right of this paragraph.
Topic Page
Updated information for Compact I/O modules applications 1
Updated specifications in Table 51 51
Updated description of 1769-ARM module 102
I/O Module Overview

Each I/O module includes a built-in removable terminal block with fingersafe cover for connections to I/O sensors and
actuators. The terminal block is behind a door at the front of the module. I/O wiring can be routed from beneath the
module to the I/O terminals.
• Once the modules are locked together, the system becomes a rugged assembly.
• Upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots guide the module during installation and secure the module within the
system.
• Removable terminal blocks help ease the wiring task.
• Self-lifting, field-wire pressure plates cut installation time.
• The patented bus connector with the lock function enables consistent and system communication.
• A color bar is provided on the front of the module.
• Digital and field circuits are optically isolated.
2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-TD006F-EN-P - September 2015

Available 1769 I/O Modules

I/O Type Cat. No. Page Cat. No. Page
AC digital 1769-IA8I 6 1769-OA8 57
1769-IA16 8 1769-OA16 60
1769-IM12 35
DC digital 1769-IG16 33 1769-OB8 63
1769-IQ16 37 1769-OB16 64
1769-IQ16F 39 1769-OB16P 67
1769-IQ32 41 1769-OB32 69
1769-IQ32T 43 1769-OB32T 72
1769-IQ6XOW4 45 1769-OG16 90
1769-OV16 92
1769-OV32T 94
Contact 1769-OW8 96 1769-OW16 100
1769-OW8I 98
Analog 1769-IF4 10 1769-OF2 74
1769-IF4I 13 1769-OF4 76
1769-IF4XOF2 16 1769-OF4CI 79
1769-IF4FXOF2F 19 1769-OF4VI 82
1769-IF8 24 1769-OF8C 85
1769-IF16C 28 1769-OF8V 87
1769-IF16V 30
1769-IR6 48
1769-IT6 53
Specialty 1769-ARM 102 1769-BOOLEAN 105
1769-ASCII 103 1769-HSC 109
Table 1 - Environmental Specifications - 1769 I/O Modules

Attribute 1769-IA8I, 1769-IA16, 1769-IM12, 1769-OA8, 1769-IG16, 1769-IQ32T, 1769-OB32T, 1769-OG16,
1769-OA16, 1769-IQ16, 1769-IQ16F, 1769-IQ32, 1769-OV32T
1769-IQ6XOW4, 1769-OB8, 1769-OB16, 1769-IF4I, 1769-IF8, 1769-IF16C, 1769-IF16V,
1769-OB16P, 1769-OB32, 1769-OV16, 1769-OW8, 1769-OF2, 1769-OF4CI, 1769-OF4VI, 1769-OF8C,
1769-OW8I, 1769-OW16 1769-OF8V, 1769-IF4FXOF2F
1769-IF4, 1769-IF4XOF2, 1769-IR6, 1769-IT6 1769-ASCII, 1769-BOOLEAN
1769-ARM, 1756-HSC
Temperature, operating 0…60 °C (32…140 °F) 0…60 °C (32…140 °F)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Nb, Operating Thermal Shock)
Temperature, storage -40…85 °C (-40…185 °F) -40…85 °C (-40…185 °F)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na, Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
Relative humidity 5…95% noncondensing 5…95% noncondensing
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat)
Vibration Operating: 5 g @ 10…500 Hz 5 g @ 10…500 Hz
IEC 60068-2-6 (Test Fc, Operating) Relay operating: 2 g
Shock, operating Panel mount 30 g Panel mount 30 g
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock) DIN rail mount 20 g DIN rail mount 20 g
Shock, relay operating Panel mount 7.5 g —
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock) DIN rail mount 5 g
Shock, nonoperating Panel mount 40 g Panel mount 40 g
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock) DIN rail mount 30 g DIN rail mount 30 g
Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-TD006F-EN-P - September 2015 3

Place Compact I/O Modules

You can DIN-rail or panel mount the controller and I/O modules. The number of local I/O modules that are supported
depends on the controller.
Controller Supports Location Considerations

1769-L24ER-QB1B 4 local modules Right side of the controller The additional modules are connected directly to the controller. There are no additional banks
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B of local I/O.
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
1769-L30ER 8 local modules 1 separate bank Standard 1769 power supplies power the additional banks and connect to the main rack by
1769-L30ERM using standard 1769 expansion cables.
1769-L30ER-NSE
1769-L33ER 16 local modules 2 separate banks
1769-L33ERM
1769-L36ERM 30 local modules 3 separate banks
1769-L23E-QB1B 2 local modules, V17 and earlier. Right side of the packaged The additional modules are connected directly to the packaged controller. There are no
1769-L23E-QBFC1B controller additional banks of local I/O.
1769-L23-QBFC1B
1769-L23E-QB1B 3 local modules, v18 and later.
1769-L35CR 30 local modules 3 separate banks Standard 1769 power supplies power the additional banks and connect to the main rack by
1769-L35E using standard 1769 expansion cables.
1769-L32C 16 local modules 3 separate banks
1769-L32E
1769-L31
1768-L43 16 local modules 3 separate banks As many as eight 1769 local modules can be attached to the 1768 backplane. The remaining
modules can be in one or two additional I/O banks.
1768-L45 30 local modules 3 separate banks Standard 1769 power supplies power the additional banks and connect to the main rack by
using standard 1769 expansion cables.
Each 1769 I/O module has a distance rating. In 1769 systems, the distance rating is the number of modules between the
specific module and the 1769 power supply. In a 1768 system, the distance rating is the number of modules between the
specific I/O module and the 1768 controller.
Digital I/O Modules

Choose digital I/O modules when you need these features.
Type Description
Input An input module responds to an input signal in the following manner:
• Input filtering limits the effect of voltage transients that contact bounce and/or electrical noise cause. If not filtered, voltage
transients could produce false data. All input modules use input filtering.
• Optical isolation shields logic circuits from possible damage due to electrical transients.
• Logic circuits process the signal.
• An input indicator turns on or off, which indicates the status of the corresponding input device.
Output An output module controls the output signal in the following manner:
• Logic circuits determine the output status.
• An output indicator displays the status of the output signal.
• Optical isolation separates module logic and bus circuits from field power.
• The output driver turns the corresponding output on or off.
Most output modules have built-in surge suppression to reduce the effects of high-voltage transients. Use an additional
suppression device if an output is being used to control inductive devices, such as relays, motor starters, solenoids, or
motors.

Additional suppression is especially important if your inductive device is in series with or parallel to hard contacts, such as
push buttons or selector switches. Add a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device. The suppression
device reduces the effects of voltage transients that are caused by interrupting the current to that device and to prolong the
life of the switch contacts.
Analog I/O Modules

Choose analog, thermocouple, or RTD modules for these features:
• Individually configurable channels
• Ability to enable and disable channels individually
• Onboard scaling
• Auto calibration of inputs
• Online configuration
• Selectable input filters
• Over-range and under-range detection and indication
• Selectable response to a broken input sensor
• Selectable power source
• Input modules offer both single-ended or differential inputs
• Ability to direct output device operation during an abnormal condition
• High accuracy ratings
The data can be configured on board each module as:

• Engineering Units in volts or milliamps.
• Scaled-for-PID.
• Percent of range.
• Raw/Proportional Data for maximum resolution.
Specialty I/O Modules

These specialty modules are available.
Cat. No. Description

1769-ARM Use a 1769-ARM address reserve module to reserve module slots. To use the 1769-ARM module, first you create an I/O configuration
and user program. Then you can remove and replace any module in the system with a 1769-ARM module after you inhibit the
removed module in the programming software.
1769-ASCII The 1769-ASCII module, a general-purpose two-channel ASCII interface, provides a flexible network interface to a wide variety of RS-
232, RS-485, and RS-422 ASCII devices. The module provides the communication connections to the ASCII device.
1769-BOOLEAN Use the 1769-BOOLEAN module in applications that require repeatability, such as material handling and packaging, when there is a
requirement to activate an output that is based on the transition of an input. If the Boolean expression is true, the output is directed
to the ON state. If the Boolean expression is false, the output channel is directed to the OFF state. There are four operators that you
can configure as OR, AND, XOR, or none.

1769-IF16C
Compact current analog input module
Simplified Input Circuit Diagram
VLOCAL VLOCAL VLOCAL VLOCAL
10 M
200 20 K M
+
u
IN+ l
Gain A/D
- t
249 i
0.1 μF p
l
COM e
20 K x
e
r
1769-IF16C Sensor/Transmitter Inputs
Sensor/ +
Transmitter -
Current IN0+
Supply IN1+
+ Signal IN2+
IN3+
IN4+
Current IN5+
IN6+
IN7+
+ Ground Signal
Com
Com
IN8+
IN9+
IN10+
IN11+
IN12+
IN13+
IN14+
The sensor power supply must be rated Class 2. IN15+
Table 25 - Technical Specifications - 1769-IF16C

Attribute 1769-IF16C
Inputs 16 single-ended
Input range 0…20 mA
4…20 mA
Full scale range(1) 0…21 mA
3.2…21 mA
Current draw @ 5.1V 190 mA
Current draw @ 24V 70 mA
Heat dissipation, max 4.0 W
Converter type Sigma Delta
Resolution (2) 16 bits (unipolar)
15 bits plus sign (bipolar)
Rated working voltage(3) 30V AC/30V DC

Table 25 - Technical Specifications - 1769-IF16C

Attribute 1769-IF16C
Common mode voltage range(4) ±10V DC max per channel
Common mode rejection > 60 dB @ 50 and 60 Hz with the 16 Hz filter selected
Input impedance 249 
Accuracy(5) ±0.5% full scale @ 25 °C (77 °F)
Accuracy drift with temperature ±0.0045% per °C
Nonlinearity ±0.03%
Repeatability(6) ±0.03%
Module error 1.25%
Overload at input terminals, max(7) ±28 mA continuous, ±7.6V DC
Isolation voltage 500V AC or 710V DC for 1 minute (qualification test), group to bus
30V AC/30V DC working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
Weight, approx 281 g (0.62 lb)
Dimensions (HxWxD), approx 118 x 35 x 87 mm (4.65 x 1.38 x 3.43 in.)
Height with mounting tabs 138 mm (5.43 in.)
Slot width 1
Module location DIN rail or panel mount
Power supply 1769-PA2, 1769-PB2, 1769-PA4, 1769-PB4
Power supply distance rating 8 modules
Terminal screw torque 0.68 Nm (6 lbin)
Retaining screw torque 0.46 Nm (4.1 lbin)
Wire size (22…14 AWG) solid
(22…16 AWG) stranded
Wire type Cu-90 °C (194 °F)
Replacement terminal block 1769-RTBN18 (1 per kit)
Replacement door label 1769-RL2 series B (2 per kit)
Replacement door 1769-RD (2 per kit)
Vendor ID code 1
Product type code 10
Product code 47
Input words 22
Output words 2
Configuration words 98
(1) The over- or under-range flag comes on when the normal operating range (over/under) is exceeded. The module continues to convert the analog input up to the maximum full scale range. The flag
automatically resets when within the normal operating range.
(2) Resolution is dependent upon your filter selection. The maximum resolution is achieved with either the 50 or 60 Hz filter selected.
(3) Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the input terminal, including the input signal and the value that floats above ground potential. For example, a 10V DC
input signal and 20V DC potential above ground at the input terminal.
(4) For proper operation, both the plus and minus input terminals must be within ±10V DC of analog common.
(5) Includes offset, gain, nonlinearity, and repeatability error terms.
(6) Repeatability is the ability of the input module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same input signal.
(7) Damage can occur to the input circuit if this value is exceeded.
Table 26 - Response Speed - 1769-IF16C

Filter Frequency Step Response Update per Input Pari Update per Module
16 Hz 1550 ms 200 ms 1600 ms
50 Hz 500 ms 70 ms 560 ms
60 Hz 420 ms 60 ms 480 ms
315 Hz 90 ms 15 ms 120 ms
1365 Hz 35 ms 5 ms 40 ms

1769-IQ16
Compact 24V DC sink/source input module
1769-IQ16
+DC (sinking)
-DC (sourcing)
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3 24V DC
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
DC
+DC (sinking) COM 1 +DC (sinking)
-DC (sourcing) -DC (sourcing)
IN 9
IN 8
IN 11
24V DC IN 10
IN 13
IN 12
IN 15
IN 14
DC
+DC (sinking) COM 2
-DC (sourcing)
Table 35 - Technical Specifications - 1769-IQ16
Attribute 1769-IQ16
Inputs 16 (8 points/group)
Voltage category 24V DC sink/source
Operating voltage range 10…30V DC @ 30 °C (86 °F)
10…26.4V DC @ 60 °C (140 °F)
Input delay, on 8 ms
Input delay, off 8 ms
Off-state voltage, max 5V DC
Off-state current, max 1.5 mA
On-state voltage, min 10V DC
On-state current, min 2 mA
Inrush current, max 250 mA
Input impedance, nom 3 k
Isolation voltage Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s, input point to bus
and group to group
75V DC working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
Slot width 1

Table 35 - Technical Specifications - 1769-IQ16

Attribute 1769-IQ16
IEC input compatibility Type 1+
Replacement door label 1769-RL1 (2 per kit)
Vendor ID code 1
Product type code 7
Product code 67
Table 36 - Certifications - 1769-IQ16

Certification(1) 1769-IQ16
c-UL C-UL certified (under CSA C22.2 No. 142)
UL 508 listed
Class I, Division 2 Group A,B,C,D Hazardous Locations (UL 1604, C-UL under CSA C22.2 No. 213)
CE CE compliant for all applicable directives
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
• AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Enclosure
(1) When marked. See the Product Certification link at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/certification/overview.page for Declarations of Conformity, Certificates, and other certification details.

Table 63 - Technical Specifications - 1769-OB8

Attribute 1769-OB8
Vendor ID code 1
Product type code 7
Product code 70
Enclosure type rating None (open style)
(1) To limit the effects of leakage current through solid-state outputs, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. Use a 5.6 k, 1/2 W resistor for transistor outputs, 24V DC operation.
(2) Use a 1N4004 diode reverse-wired across the load for transistor outputs switching 24V DC inductive loads.
Table 64 - Certifications - 1769-OB8

Certification(1) 1769-OB8
UL 508 listed
C-Tick C-Tick compliant for all applicable directives
Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
1769-OB16
Compact solid-state 24V DC source output module
1769-OB16
Simplified Output Circuit Diagram +VDC +DC
CR OUT 0
OUT 1 CR
+VDC CR OUT 2
OUT 3 CR
S OUT 4
10K OUT 5
G CR OUT 6
VCC OUT OUT 7 CR
15K CR OUT 8 24V DC (Source)
0.1 μF D OUT 9 CR
OUT 10
100pF OUT 11 CR
OUT 12
20K OUT 13 CR
DC COM OUT 14
OUT 15
DC COM
-DC

Table 65 - Technical Specifications - 1769-OB16

Attribute 1769-OB16
Outputs 16 (16 points/group)
Voltage category 24V DC source
Operating voltage range 20.4…26.4V DC
Output delay, on 0.1 ms
Output delay, off 1.0 ms
Off-state leakage current, max(1) 1.0 mA @ 26.4V DC
On-state current, min 1.0 mA
On-state voltage drop, max 1.0V DC @ 1 A
Current per point, max 0.5 A @ 60 °C (140 °F)
1.0 A @ 30 °C (86 °F)
Current per module, max 4.0 A @ 60 °C (140 °F)
8.0 A @ 30 °C (86 °F)
Surge current(2) 2.0 A for 10 ms, repeatable every 2 s
Isolation voltage Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V AC for 1 s or 1697V DC for 1 s, output point to bus
75V DC working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
Slot width 1
Vendor ID code 1
Product type code 7
Product code 71
(1) To limit the effects of leakage current through solid-state outputs, a loading resistor can be connected in parallel with your load. Use a 5.6 k, 1/2 W resistor for transistor outputs, 24V DC operation.
(2) Use a 1N4004 diode reverse-wired across the load for transistor outputs switching 24V DC inductive loads.

Temperature Derating - 1769-OB16

1769-OB16 Maximum Amperes per Point Versus Temperature
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
Maximum Amperes per Point
0.80
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
30˚C (86˚F) 40˚C (104˚F) 50˚C (122˚F) 60˚C (140˚F)
Ambient Temperature
1769-OB16 Maximum Amperes per Module Versus Temperature

8.00
7.50
Maximum Amperes per Module
7.00
6.50
6.00
5.50
5.00
4.50
4.00
30˚C (86˚F) 40˚C (104˚F) 50˚C (122˚F) 60˚C (140˚F)
Ambient Temperature
Table 66 - Certifications - 1769-OB16

Certification(1) 1769-OB16
UL 508 listed
C-Tick C-Tick compliant for all applicable directives

1769-OF8C
Compact current output analog module
1769-OF8C
ANLG Com
I out 0+
ANLG Com
I out 1+
ANLG Com
I out 2+
ANLG Com
Current I out 3+
ANLG Com
Earth Ground I out 4+

ANLG Com
External 24V DC Power + I out 5+
Supply (optional) ANLG Com
-
I out 6+
ANLG Com
I out 7+
DC NEUT
+24V DC
The external power supply must be rated Class 2, with a 24V DC range of
20.4…26.4V DC and 60 mA minimum. Series B and later modules support this option.
Table 82 - Technical Specifications - 1769-OF8C

Attribute 1769-OF8C
Outputs 8 single-ended
Output range 0…20 mA
4…20 mA
Full scale range(1) 0…21 mA
3.2…21 mA
Resolution 16 bits (unipolar)
0…20 mA: 15.91 bits, 0.323 A/bit
4…20 mA: 15.59 bits, 0.323A/bit
Bus current draw 5V DC, 145 mA
24V DC, 185 mA
Conversion rate (all channels), max 5 ms
Step response to 63%(2) < 2.9 ms
Resistive load on current output 0…500 (includes wire resistance)
Inductive load (current outputs), max 0.1 mH
Field calibration None required
Accuracy(3) ±0.35% full scale @ 25 °C (77 °F)
Accuracy drift with temperature ±0.0058% per °C
Output ripple(4) ±0.05% @ 0…50 kHz
Nonlinearity ±0.05%

Table 82 - Technical Specifications - 1769-OF8C

Attribute 1769-OF8C
Repeatability(5) ±0.05%
Module error ±0.55%
Offset error ±0.05%
Output impedance > 1 M
Open and short-circuit protection Yes
Short-circuit protection, max 21 mA
Output overvoltage protection Yes
Output response at system powerup and power down ±0.5V DC spike for < 5 ms
Rated working voltage(6) 30V AC/30V DC
Isolation voltage 500V AC or 710V DC for 1 min (qualification test), output group to bus
30V AC/30V DC working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
Slot width 1
Optional 24V DC Class 2 power supply voltage range(7) 20.4…26.4V DC
Vendor ID code 1
Product type code 10
Product code 40
Input words 11
Output words 9
Configuration words 64
(1) The over- or under-range flag comes on when the normal operating range (over/under) is exceeded. The module continues to convert the analog input up to the maximum full scale range. The flag
automatically resets when within the normal operating range.
(2) Step response is the time between when the D/A converter was instructed to go from minimum to full range until the device is at 63% of full range.
(3) Includes offset, gain, nonlinearity, and repeatability error terms.
(4) Output ripple is the amount that a fixed output varies with time, which assumes a constant load and temperature.
(5) Repeatability is the ability of the input module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same input signal.
(6) Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the input terminal, including the input signal and the value that floats above ground potential. For example, a 10V DC
input signal and 20V DC potential above ground at the input terminal.
(7) If the optional 24V DC Class 2 power supply is used, the 24V DC current draw from the bus is 0 mA.

System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.2.3 SM2
13
PowerFlex 1769-SM2
Compact I/O DSI/Modbus
Communications Module
Firmware Version 1.xxx
User Manual
Appendix A
Specifications
Appendix A presents the specifications for the module.
Topic Page
Communications A-1
Electrical A-1
Mechanical A-1
Environmental A-2
Regulatory Compliance A-2
DSI Cable Requirements A-2
Communications
Drive
Protocols DSI or Modbus RTU Master
Data Rates DSI Operation: 19200 bps
Modbus RTU Master Operation: 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400 bps
Electrical
Consumption
Module data only 350 mA @ 5Vdc and 0 mA @ 24Vdc supplied by the
(no Channel data) Compact I/O Power Supply
Power Supply 4 (the 1769-SM2 module cannot be more than 4 modules
Distance Rating away from the power supply)
Mechanical
Dimensions
Height 118 mm (4.65 inches)
Depth 87 mm (3.43 inches)
Width 35 mm (1.38 inches)
Weight 142g (5 oz.)
A-2 Specifications
Environmental
Temperature
Operating -10…50 °C (14…122 °F)
Storage -40…85 °C (-40…185 °F)
Relative Humidity -5…95% non-condensing
Atmosphere Important: The module must not be installed in an area
where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive
gas, vapors, or dust. If the module is not going to be installed
for a period of time, it must be stored in an area where it will
not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.
Shock
Operational 30g, 11 ms
Non-Operational 50g, 11 ms
Vibration
Operational 5g, 10 to 500 Hz
Non-Operational 5g, 5 to 2000 Hz
Regulatory Compliance
UL UL508C
cUL CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91
CE EN50081-2 and EN61000-6-2
CTick AS/NZS 2064
NOTE: In a domestic environment this product may cause radio

interference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be
required.
NOTE: To meet CE and CTick certification, a ferrite core (Fair-Rite p/n

2643102002) must be added to DSI communication cables longer than
10 m (33 ft.), and the core must be attached within 305 mm (12 in.) of
the 1769-SM2 module.
DSI Cable Requirements

The maximum cable distance between the 1769-SM2 module and
connected PowerFlex 4-Class drives is 10 m (32.8 ft.) when 8-conductor
cables are used in Single mode. The maximum cable distance when
2-conductor twisted-pair network wiring is used with RJ45 two-position
terminal blocks (AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P) in Single or Multi-Drive mode is
1219 m / 4000 ft. (standard RS-485 specifications).
The installer must follow common system wiring practices and route
cables away from sources of EMI.
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.2.4 PB2, PB4
14
Technical Data
CompactLogix Power Supplies Specifications
1768 CompactLogix Power Supplies Catalog

Numbers 1768-PA3, 1768-PB3
1769 Compact I/O Power Supplies Catalog Numbers

1769-PA2, 1769-PB2, 1769-PA4, 1769-PB4
Topic Page
1768 CompactLogix Power Supplies 3
1769 Compact I/O Power Supplies 7
Environmental Specifications - 1768 and 1769 Power Supplies

Attribute 1768-PA3, 1769-PB3
1769-PA2, 1769-PB2, 1769-PA4, 1769-PB4
Temperature, operating 0…60 °C (32…140 °F)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold),
Temperature, storage -40…85 °C (-40…185 °F)
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold),
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat),
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na, Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock)
IEC 60068-2-30 (Test Db, Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat)
Vibration 5 g @ 10…500 Hz
Shock, operating 30 g
IEC 60068-2-27 (Test Ea, Unpackaged Shock)
Shock, nonoperating 50 g
1769 Compact I/O Power Each 1769-L3x controller and additional bank of I/O modules requires a 1769
power supply. Place 1769 I/O modules to the left or right of the 1769 power
Supplies supply. As many as eight I/O modules can be placed on each side of the power
supply.
Each 1769 module also has a power supply distance rating (the number of
modules from the power supply). Each module must be located within its
distance rating. See the specifications for the module to determine its distance
rating.
Technical Specifications - 1769 Compact I/O Power Supplies

Attribute 1769-PA2 1769-PB2 1769-PA4 1769-PB4
Input voltage range 85…265V AC 19.2...31.2V DC 85…265V AC or 19.2...31.2V DC
170...265V AC,
switch selectable
Input voltage, nom 120V/220V AC 24V DC 120V/220V AC 24V DC
Power consumption 100 VA @ 120V AC 50 VA @ 24V DC 200 VA @ 120V AC 100 VA @ 24V DC
130 VA @ 240V AC 240 VA @ 240V AC

Power dissipation 8 W @ 60° C (140° F) 7.5 W @ 60° C (140° F) 18 W @ 60° C (140° F) 14.5 W @ 60° C (140° F)
Current capacity @ 5V 2.0 A 2.0 A 4.0 A 4.0 A
Current capacity @ 24V 0.8 A 0.8 A 2.0 A 2.0 A
Inrush current, max 25 A @ 132V AC 30 A @ 31.2V DC 25 A @ 132V AC 30 A @ 31.2V DC
Isolation voltage 265V (continuous), 75V (continuous), 265V (continuous), 75V (continuous),
reinforced insulation type reinforced insulation type reinforced insulation type reinforced insulation type
(IEC Class 1 grounding (IEC Class 1 grounding (IEC Class 1 grounding (IEC Class 1 grounding
required) required) required) required)
Routine tested @ Routine tested at Routine tested at Routine tested at
2596V DC for 1 s, AC 1697V DC for 1 s, DC 2596V DC for 1 s, AC 1697V DC for 1 s, DC
power input to system and power input to system power input to system power input to system
AC power input to 24V DC
user power
Fuse type Wickmann 19195-3.15A Wickmann 19193-6.3A Wickmann 19195-3.15A Wickmann 19193-6.3A
Littelfuse 02183.15MXP Littelfuse 021706.3MXP Littelfuse 02183.15MXP Littelfuse 021706.3MXP
Weight, approx. 525 g (1.16 lb) 630 g (1.39 lb)
Dimensions (HxWxD), approx. 118 x 70 x 87 mm (4.65 x 2.76 x 3.43 in.)
Mounting screw torque 1.16 Nzm (10 lbzin) - use M4 or #8 screws
Power supply distance rating 8
8 I/O modules can be connected on either side of the power supply for a maximum of 16 modules
Wire category(1) 1 - on power ports 2 - on power ports 1 - on power ports 2 - on power ports
Wire size 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) solid copper wire rated at 90 °C (194 °F) or greater, 1.2 mm (3/64 in.) insulation max
North American temperature code T3C
IEC temperature code — T4 — T4
(1) Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual. See the Industrial Automation Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1.
Publication 1769-TD008A-EN-P - January 2010 7

Certifications - 1769 Compact Power Supplies
Certification(1) 1769-PA2, 1769-PA4 1769-PB2, 1769-PB4
c-UL-us UL Listed for Class 1, Division 2 Group A,B,C,D Hazardous Locations, certified for U.S. and Canada. See UL File
E10314
CE European Union 2004/108/EC EMC Directive, compliant with:
• EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
• EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
C-Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act, compliant with:
AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
— European Union 94/9/EC ATEX Directive, compliant
with:
• EN 60079-15; Potentially Explosive Atmospheres,
Protection “n” (Zone 2)
• EN 60079-0; General Requirements (Zone 2)
(1)
When marked. See the Product Certification link at http://www.ab.com for Declarations of Conformity, Certificates, and other certification details.
8 Publication 1769-TD008A-EN-P - January 2010

System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.2.5 ECL
15
Installation Instructions
Original Instructions
Compact I/O End Caps/Terminators

Catalog Numbers 1769-ECL, 1769-ECLK, 1769-ECR, 1769-ECRK
Topic Page
1769-ECL Left End Cap and 1769-ECLK Left End Cap 5
1769-ECL and 1769-ECLK Dimensions 5
1769-ECR and 1769-ECRK Right End Cap 6
1769-ECR and 1769-ECRK Dimensions 7
Specifications 8
Environmental Specifications 8
Certifications 9
About the End Caps/Terminators

The 1769 Compact I/O™ controllers, such as the 1769-L32E, require end caps. A 1769-ECR
right end cap, a 1769-ECRK right end cap, a 1769-ECLK left end cap, or a1769-ECL left end
cap terminates the end of the communication bus. Use this guide to install either end cap.
1769-ECL Left End Cap and 1769-ECLK Left End Cap
1 2
1769-ECL and 1769-ECLK Dimensions

87 mm 15 mm
(3.43 in.) (0.59 in.)
118 mm
(4.6 in.)
Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-IN015E-EN-P - July 2019 5

Specifications
Attribute 1769-ECL, 1769-ECLK 1769-ECR, 1769-ECRK
Current draw at 5.1V DC 5 mA
Current draw at 24V DC 0 mA
Operating altitude 2000 m (6562 ft)
North American temp code T3C
IEC temp code — T4
Shipping weight, approx 130 g (0.286 lb)
Environmental Specifications
Attribute 1769-ECL, 1769-ECLK 1769-ECR, 1769-ECRK
Operating temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ad, Operating Cold)
0 > Ta > 60 °C (32 > Ta > 140 °F)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bd, Operating Dry Heat)
Nonoperating temperature
IEC 60068-2-1 (Test Ab, Unpackaged Nonoperating
Cold)
IEC 60068-2-2 (Test Bb, Unpackaged Nonoperating -40 > Ta > 85 °C (-40 > Ta > 185 °F)
Dry Heat)
IEC 60068-2-14 (Test Na, Unpackaged Nonoperating
Thermal Shock)
Vibration
5 g, 10…500 Hz
Operating shock
DIN rail mount: 20 g; Panel mount: 30 g
Nonoperating shock
DIN rail mount: 30 g; Panel mount: 40 g
Emissions
Group 1, Class A
CISPR 11
ESD immunity
8 kV air discharges
IEC 61000-4-2
10V/m with 1 kHz sine-wave 80% AM from 80…2700 MHz
Radiated RF immunity
10V/m with 200 Hz 50%Pulse 100% AM at 900 MHz
IEC 61000-4-3
10V/m with 200 Hz 50% Pulse 100% AM at 1890 MHz
8 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-IN015E-EN-P - July 2019

System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.2.6 CRR3
16
Installation Instructions
1769 Compact I/O Communication Bus

Expansion Cables
(Cat. No. 1769-CRR1, -CRR3, -CLL1, -CLL3, -CRL1, -CRL3)
Inside ...
For More Information .............................. 2
Hazardous Location Considerations ........ 3
Environnements dangereux ..................... 4
Overview ................................................ 4
Cable Types and Lengths ........................ 5
System Configurations ............................ 6
Installation .............................................. 7
Publication 1769-IN014B-EN-P - May 2002

1769 Compact I/O Communication Bus Expansion Cables 5
Cable Types and Lengths

Table 1
Catalog Number Cable Type Length(1)
1769-CLL1 Left bank-to-left bank expansion 1 ft. (305 mm)
1769-CLL3 Left bank-to-left bank expansion 3.28 ft. (1 m)
1769-CRR1 Right bank-to-right bank expansion 1 ft. (305 mm)
1769-CRR3 Right bank-to-right bank expansion 3.28 ft. (1 m)
1769-CRL1 Right bank-to-left bank expansion 1 ft. (305 mm)
1769-CRL3 Right bank-to-left bank expansion 3.28 ft. (1 m)
(1)
Approximate cable length is measured from end-to-end of the cable only.
15 mm 32 mm
(1.26 in.) 32 mm
(0.59 in.) (1.26 in.)
18 mm
(0.71 in.) 18 mm
(0.71 in.)
1769-CLLx 1769-CRRx 1769-CRLx
118 mm
(4.65 in.)
15 mm
(0.59 in.)
118 mm
(4.65 in.) 118 mm
(4.65 in.)

1769 Compact I/O Communication Bus Expansion Cables 9
5. If necessary, push the bus lever back slightly to clear the bus locking tab (3).
Use your fingers or a small screwdriver.
6. To allow communication between the module and the cable connector,

move the bus lever firmly to the left (4) until it clicks. Ensure that it is locked
firmly in place.
When attaching cables, it is very important that the bus

ATTENTION connectors are securely locked together to ensure proper
electrical connection.
!
Specifications
Approximate Shipping 3-foot cables: 350 g (0.77lbs.)
Weight (with carton) 1-foot cables: 300 g (0.66 lbs.)
Storage Temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
Operating Temperature 0°C to +60°C (32°F to +140°F)
Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Altitude 2000 meters (6561 feet)
Vibration Operating: 10 to 500 Hz, 5G, 0.030 inches maximum peak-to-peak
Relay Operation: 2G
Shock Operating: 30G panel mounted (20G DIN rail mounted)
Relay Operation: 7.5G panel mounted (5G DIN rail mounted)
Non-Operating: 40G panel mounted (30G DIN rail mounted)
Agency Certification C-UL certified (under CSA C22.2 No. 142)
UL 508 listed
CE compliant for all applicable directives
Hazardous Environment Class I, Division 2, Hazardous Location, Groups A, B, C, D
Class (UL 1604, C-UL under CSA C22.2 No. 213)

System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.2.7 HMI
17
Technical Data
PanelView Plus 7 Performance Terminals

Catalog Numbers 2711P-T7C22D9P, 2711P-T7C22D9P-B, 2711P-T7C22A9P, 2711P-T7C22A9P-B, 2711P-B7C22D9P, 2711P-B7C22D9P-B,
2711P-B7C22A9P, 2711P-B7C22A9P-B, 2711P-T9W22D9P, 2711P-T9W22D9-B, 2711P-T9W22A9P, 2711P-T9W22A9P-B, 2711P-T10C22D9P,
2711P-T10C22D9P-B, 2711P-T10C22A9P, 2711P-T10C22A9P-B, 2711P-B10C22D9P, 2711P-B10C22D9P-B, 2711P-B10C22A9P, 2711P-B10C22A9-B,
2711P-T12W22D9P, 2711P-T12W22D9P-B, 2711P-T12W22A9P, 2711P-T12W22A9P-B, 2711P-T15C22D9P, 2711P-T15C22D9P-B, 2711P-T15C22A9P,
2711P-T15C22A9P-B, 2711P-B15C22D9P, 2711P-B15C22D9P-B, 2711P-B15C22A9P, 2711P-B15C22A9P-B, 2711P-T19C22D9P, 2711P-T19C22D9P-B,
2711P-T19C22A9P, 2711P-T19C22A9P-B, 2711P-T9W22D9P-BSHK, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BSHK, 2711P-T7C22D9PK, 2711P-T9W22D9PK,
2711P-T10C22D9PK, 2711P-T12W22D9PK, 2711P-T15C22D9PK, 2711P-T19C22D9PK, 2711P-B15C22D9PK, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM001,
2711P-T12W22D9P-BM002, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM003, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM004, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM005, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM006,
2711P-T12W22D9P-BM007, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM008, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM009, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM010, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM011,
2711P-T12W22D9P-BM012, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM013, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM014, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM015, 2711P-T12W22D9P-BM016
Topic Page
Environmental Specifications 3
Resistance to Chemicals 4
Certifications 4
Technical Specifications 5
ArmorView Plus 7 Terminals 9
Accessories 13
HMI Software 15
The PanelView™ Plus 7 Performance terminals are operator

interface devices. They monitor and control devices that are
attached to ControlLogix® and CompactLogix™ 5370
controllers on an EtherNet/IP™ network. Animated graphic
and text displays provide operators a view into the operating
state of a machine or process. Operators interact with the
control system by using touch screen or keypad input.
The PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminals include these features and capabilities:
• FactoryTalk® View Machine Edition software, version 8.1, provides a familiar environment for creating HMI
applications
• Windows CE operating system with desktop access for configuration and third-party applications
• Connection to ControlLogix or CompactLogix 5370 controllers
• Ethernet communication that can support Device Level Ring (DLR), linear, or star network topologies
• Web browser, Microsoft® file viewers, text editor, PDF viewer, remote desktop connection, and media player on
the terminal desktop
• Conformal-coating available for all DC power, touch-only terminals, and the 15-in. DC power, keypad and touch
terminal
• Stainless steel, hygienic, brandless, DC-power, and conformal-coating are available for the 9-in. wide-screen,
touch-only units and the 12-in. wide-screen, touch-only units
• On-machine mounting available for the 12.1-in. wide-screen, touch-only terminal
Summary of Changes
This publication contains new and updated information as indicated in the following table.
Topic Pages
Added catalog numbers for the new SDHC cards. Throughout
2 Rockwell Automation Publication 2711P-TD009I-EN-P - January 2020

Environmental Specifications
This table lists environmental specifications for the PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminals and the ArmorView™ Plus 7
terminal (which includes a 12.1-in PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminal).
Attribute Value
6.5-in., 9-in., 10.4-in., 12.1-in., and 15-in. terminals
0…55 °C (32…131 °F)
19-in. terminals
Temperature, operating
0…50 °C (32…122 °F)
ArmorView Plus 7 terminal
0…45 °C (32…113 °F) ambient
Temperature, nonoperating -25…+70 °C (-13…+158 °F)(1)
Typical BTU measurements were taken at 25 °C (77 °F):
• 6.5-in. DC (touch, and touch with keypad), 51 BTU (typical)
• 6.5-in. AC (touch, and touch with keypad), 53 BTU (typical)
• 9-in. DC, 55 BTU (typical)
• 9-in. AC, 58 BTU (typical)
• 10.4-in. DC (touch, and touch with keypad), 51 BTU (typical)
Heat dissipation • 10.4-in. AC (touch, and touch with keypad), 56 BTU (typical)
• 12.1-in. DC, 60 BTU (typical)
• 12.1-in. AC, 67 BTU (typical)
• 15-in. DC (touch, and touch with keypad), 61 BTU (typical)
• 15-in. AC (touch, and touch with keypad), 68 BTU (typical)
• 19-in. DC, 114 BTU (typical)
• 19-in. AC, 119 BTU (typical)
Altitude, operating 2000 m (6562 ft)(1)
Relative humidity 5…95% without condensation(1)
6.5-in., 9-in., 10.4-in., 12.1-in. terminals, and 12.1-in. terminals in the ArmorView Plus 7 enclosure
0.012 pk-pk, 10…57 Hz
2 g peak at 57…500 Hz
Vibration
15-in. and 19-in. terminals
0.006 pk-pk, 10...57 Hz
1 g peak at 57...640 Hz
Shock, operating 15 g at 11 ms(2)
Shock, nonoperating 30 g at 11 ms(2)
Enclosure ratings NEMA and UL Type 12, 13, 4X, also rated IP66 as Classified by UL(3) (4)
For PanelView Plus 7 Performance conformal-coated PCBA level products with catalog numbers that end in K,
product meets or exceeds the following requirement:
Airborne contaminants • ANSI/ISA 71.04.2013 G3 environment
Tested in accordance with:
ASTM B845-97
(1) These values are the same for the ArmorView Plus 7 terminal.
(2) These values are the same for the ArmorView Plus 7 terminal when the VESA mount is used. When the arm mount coupling is used, the values are 5 g at 11 ms.
(3) For the ArmorView Plus 7 terminal, the enclosure ratings are 12, 13, 4, or 4X (see the ArmorView Plus 7 Installation Instructions, publication 2711P-IN013 for more detail) and IP66 as classified
by UL.
(4) The PanelView Plus 7 Performance Stainless Steel, Series B terminals are also rated IP69 as Classified by UL and tested for IP69K according to ISO 20653.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2711P-TD009I-EN-P - January 2020 3

Resistance to Chemicals
The outer surfaces of the terminal including the bezel, touch screen overlay, and panel gasket seal are tested for chemical
resistance. Some of the chemicals can cause discoloration, but they do not interfere with the operation of the terminal.
TIP For more information on chemical resistance of the product, go to

https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com and search the Knowledgebase for keywords ‘Chemical Resistance PanelView Plus’.
IMPORTANT Do not operate the terminal in direct sunlight. Direct exposure to ultraviolet light can discolor the touch screen.
Certifications
This table lists certifications for the PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminals.
Certification(1) Value
European Union 2014/35/EU EMC Directive, compliant with:
• EN 61000-6-2; Industrial Immunity
CE (EMC) • EN 61000-6-4; Industrial Emissions
CE (LVD)(2) European Union 2014/30/EU Low Voltage Directive, compliant with:

The PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminals hold these certifications:
c-UL-us Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Hazardous Locations (E10314) per standards ANSI / ISA
12.12.01 and CSA C22.2 No. 213. rated:
– Class I, Div 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Enclosure type ratings per UL50 and CSA C22.2 No. 94.2-07.
c-UL-us Enclosure ingress protection that is classified by UL per IEC 60529.
The ArmorView Plus 7 terminal holds the following certifications:
c-UL-us listed Industrial Control Equipment for US and Canada (E113724) per standards UL 61010-1, UL 61010-2-
201, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1, and CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-2-201.
Enclosure type ratings per UL50 and CSA C22.2 No. 94.2-07.
Enclosure ingress protection that is classified by UL per IEC 60529.
EtherNet/IP ODVA conformance that is tested to EtherNet/IP specifications
KCC Certificate of compliance
Stainless Steel Series B Terminals only, compliant with:
NSF • NSF/ANSI/3-A 14159-1; Hygiene Requirements for the Design of Meat and Poultry Processing Equipment
• NSF/ANSI 169; Special Purpose Food Equipment and Devices”
RCM • AS/NZS CISPR 11; Industrial Emissions
RoHS China RoHS, Turkey RoHS, European RoHS 2011/65/EU
EAC Certificate of compliance
(1) When marked. See the Product Certification link at rok.auto/certification for Declarations of Conformity, Certificates, and other certification details.
(2) This certification is not available for the ArmorView Plus 7 terminal.

Technical Specifications
The tables in this section provide technical specifications for the PanelView Plus 7 Performance terminals.
PanelView Plus 7 Performance 7-in and 9-in Terminals
6.5-in. Touch 9-in. Touch

6.5-in. Touch with Keypad
2711P--T7C22D9P, 2711P--T7C22D9P-B (1) 2711P-T9W22D9P, 2711P-T9W22D9P-B (1)
Attribute 2711P-B7C22D9P, 2711P-B7C22D9P-B (1)
2711P-T7C22A9P, 2711P-T7C22A9P-B 2711P-T9W22A9P, 2711P-T9W22A9P-B
2711P-B7C22A9P, 2711P-B7C22A9P-B
2711P-T7C22D9PK(2) 2711P-T9W22D9PK(2)
Operator input Touch Touch with keypad Touch
Conformal-coated Yes — Yes
Display type TFT Color
Display size, diagonal 6.5-in. 9-in. widescreen
Viewing area (W x H) 132 x 99 mm (5.2 x 3.9 in.) 196 x 118 mm (7.7 x 4.6 in.)
Display resolution 640 x 480 VGA, 18-bit color graphics 800 x 480 WVGA, 18-bit color graphics
Aspect ratio 4:3 5:3
2 (Nits)
Brightness, typical 300 cd/m
White light-emitting diode, solid state
Backlight life
Life: 50,000 h min at 40 °C (104 °F) to half-brightness, backlight is not replaceable
Analog resistive
Touch screen Actuation rating: 1 million presses
Operating force: 100 grams
Accuracy: ±2 minutes per month.
Battery (real-time
clock backup) Battery life: 4 years min at 25 °C (77 °F)
Replacement: CR2032 lithium coin cell
Memory:
• System • 1 GB RAM and 512 MB storage
• User • 80 MB, approx, nonvolatile storage for applications
Secure Digital (SD)
One SD card slot for external storage; supports cat. no. 1784-SDx and 1784-SDHCx cards
card slot
USB ports:
• Host • Two USB high-speed 2.0 host ports (type A) support removable flash drives for external storage
• Device • One high-speed 2.0 device port (type B) that will be functional in a future release
Operating system Windows CE with Extended Features and MS Office Viewers (includes FTP, VNC client server, ActiveX controls, PDF reader, third-party device support)
Ethernet ports Two 10/100Base-T, Auto MDI/MDI-X Ethernet ports that support Device Level Ring (DLR), linear, or star network topologies
Software FactoryTalk View Studio for Machine Edition, FactoryTalk ViewPoint, version 2.6 or later
Electrical
24V DC nom 24V DC nom 24V DC nom
Input voltage 100…240V AC 100…240V AC 100…240V AC
(18…30V DC) (18…30V DC) (18…30V DC)
50 W max 50 W max 50 W max
Power consumption 105VA 105VA 105VA
(2.1 A at 24V DC) (2.1 A at 24V DC) (2.1 A at 24V DC)
Supports (SELV) and Supports (SELV) and Supports (SELV) and
Power supply — — —
(PELV) 24V DC supplies(3) (PELV) 24V DC supplies(3) (PELV) 24V DC supplies(3)
Mechanical
Weight, approx 1.2 kg (2.65 lb) 1.47 kg (3.25 lb) 1.58 kg (3.48 lb)
Dimensions, approx 170 x 212 x 69.6 mm 179 x 285 x 69.6 mm 190 x 280 x 69.6 mm
(H x W x D) 6.69 x 8.35 x 2.74 in. 7.05 x 11.22 x 2.74 in. 7.48 x 11.02 x 2.74 in.
Cutout dimensions, 142 x 184 mm 142 x 237 mm 162 x 252 mm
approx (H x W) 5.59 x 7.24 in. 5.59 x 9.33 in. 6.38 x 9.92 in.
(1) Catalog numbers with a -B extension denote terminals that exclude the Allen-Bradley brand marking. Customers can put their own brand labels on these terminals.
(2) Catalog numbers that end with a K denote terminals that are conformal coated.
(3) DC-powered terminals support safety extra low voltage (SELV) and protective extra low voltage (PELV) 24V DC power supplies such as cat. nos. 1606-XLP95E, 1606-XLP100E, 2711P-RSACDIN.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2711P-TD009I-EN-P - January 2020 5

Product Dimensions
This section provides product dimensions. The PanelView Plus 7 Performance 10.4-inch touch and combination keypad
with touch devices are shown for illustrative purposes. Stainless steel terminals use different mounting clips, but the
dimensions are the same. All other terminal sizes look similar. Dimensions for the 12.1-in. ArmorView Plus 7 terminal
can be found on page 11.
PanelView Plus 7 Performance Terminal Dimensions - 10.4-in. Model
F1 F9
7 8 9
F2 F10 4 5 6
1 2 3
F3 F11
– 0 .
F4 F12
a a
F5 F13 Esc
F6 F14
F7 F15
F8 F16
b b
1 1 1 1 1
c d
6 6 6 c d 6 6
PanelView Plus 7 Performance Terminal Dimensions

Terminal Input Height (a) Width (b) Overall Depth (c) Mounted Depth (d)
Size Type mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.)
Key/touch 179 (7.05) 285 (11.22)
6.5-in.
Touch 170 (6.69) 212 (8.35)
9-in. Touch 190 (7.48) 280 (11.02)
Key/touch 252 (9.92) 385 (15.16)
10.4-in.
Touch 252 (9.92) 297 (11.69) 69.6 (2.74) 63.6 (2.50)
12.1-in. Touch 246 (9.69) 340 (13.39)
Key/touch 322 (12.68) 484 (19.06)
15-in.
Touch 318 (12.52) 381 (15.00)
19-in. Touch 411 (16.18) 485 (19.09)
TIP When mounted in a panel, the front of the bezel extends less than
6.36 mm (0.25 in.) from the front of the panel.

System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.2.8 Ethernet Switch
18
Industrial L2 / L3 Rackmount / Rail Ethernet Switch
JetNet 4510 / 4510-w

Industrial 10-port Managed Fast Ethernet Switch
7 10/100 Base TX and 3 RJ-45/SFP combo (10/100Base-TX,
Industrial
100Base-FX ) Intelligent
NMS
SFP ports support 100M Fiber with Digital Diagnostic Monitoring
''0WRPRQLWRUORQJGLVWDQFH¿EHUTXDOLW\ Rackmount
PoE Plus
Multiple Super Ring (recovery time <5ms), Rapid Dual Homing, Switch
Multiple Ring, Multiple Ring, ITU-T G.8032 ERPS and MSTP/RSTP Industrial
PoE Plus
VLAN, Private VLAN, QinQ, GVRP, QoS, IGMP Snooping V1/V2/
Switch
V3, Rate Control, Port Trunking, LACP, Online Multi-Port Mirroring
Industrial
32Gbps Non-Blocking, 8K MAC address table 12-24V
PoE Switch
Supports LLDP and Korenix NMS software for auto-topology
YLVXDOL]DWLRQDQGHI¿FLHQWJURXSPDQDJHPHQW Industrial
PoE Switch
Supports Modbus TCP/IP for Factory Automation
Rackmount
Supports console CLI , Web, SNMP V1/V2c/V3, RMON, HTTPS, L3/L2 Switch
SSH for remote management Gigabit

RoHS Managed
Advanced security feature supports IP Security, Port Security,
Switch
DHCP Server, IP and MAC Binding, 802.1x network access control
Managed
3 SFP SFP DDM
MSR
MSTP G.8032 (YHQW1RWL¿FDWLRQE\(PDLO6103WUDS6\VORJ'LJLWDO,QSXWDQG Ethernet
Combo < 5ms ERPS
Switch
Relay Output
LLDP & Entry-level
Korenix
Private Modbus/ o
-25~70 C Dual 10.5~60VDC power inputs
NMS VLAN, QinQ TCP Switch
IP31 rugged aluminum case
Wireless
Operating temperature -25~70oC for JetNet 4510, Outdoor AP
-40~75oC for JetNet 4510-w Embedded

PoE/Router
Computer
(LINUX)
Overview Industrial
Communication
Computer
JetNet 4510 is an industrial Managed Fast Ethernet In addition to cost savings, the flexible design of the (WIN/LINUX)
Switch, designed with 7 10/100TX and 3 10/100 RJ-45 / JetNet 4510 can adapt to the world's fastest Ring Ethernet/PoE/
Serial Board
100FX SFP combo ports. Technology by Korenix. It only takes 5ms to recover
Ethernet
The 3 combo ports offer flexibility for additional fiber from link failure, no matter how many nodes are inside I/O Server
connections by plugging different types of 100MM SFP a ring. Moreover the restoration time is zero. The
Media
modules, which can support 2KM in Multi-Mode or patented Multiple Super Ring provides most flexible Converter
120KM in Single-Mode. The combo ports make port ring topologies, such as shared link of multiple rings, or Serial Device
Server
FRPELQDWLRQHYHQHDVLHUVXFKDV5-SRUWVDQG¿EHU shared unit of multiple rings, making it the best possible.
ports, or 9 RJ ports and 1 fiber port. The standard 10 The Multiple Super Ring is highly compatible to Rapid SFP Module
port Fast Ethernet switch greatly reduces total cost by up Spanning Tree by the new Dual Homing plus design. Din Rail
Power Supply
WRIRU¿EHUXSOLQNQHWZRUN JetNet 4510 also enhances security designs, such as
SNMP V3, SSH, 802.1X, etc.
A Beijer Electronics Group Company www.korenix.com 240

3 Flexible Fast Ethernet Combo Ports
The JetNet 4510 is designed with three combo Fast The switch will automatically detect the priority of cable
Ethernet ports. Each combo port combines one Small connections for each combo port. Users are able to
Form factor Pluggable (SFP) socket for 100Mbps connect two 100Mbps SFP ports of JetNet 4510 as a
multimode or single mode SFP transceiver, as well as Fast Ethernet Fiber Redundant Ring topology and the
one RJ-45 copper port in 10Mbps full duplex, 100Mbps WKLUGFRPERSRUWDVD¿EHUXSOLQNSRUWRUDQDSSOLFDEOH
half /full duplex link mode. port.
100Mbps DDM SFP transceiver for High Quality Monitoring

The JetNet 4510 Series SFP socket supports diagnose optical cable transmission problem through
100Base-FX single-mode/multi-mode transceiver PDLQWHQDQFHDQGGHEXJJLQJRIWKHRSWLFDOVLJQDOTXDOLW\
with speed detection and independent indication. by DDM without the need of an extra optical cable
M o r e o v e r, i t s u p p o r t s D D M ( D i g i t a l D i a g n o s t i c analyzer as a result greatly saving time and system
Monitoring) type SFP transceivers allowing users to costs.
Comprehensive Redundant Solutions — Multiple Super Ring (MSRTM)

TM
The JetNet 4510 supports MSR (Multiple Super Ring) compromising the speed of the network.
TM
the next new generation of RSR (Rapid Super Ring) Ring The MSR also facilitates the JetNet 4510 to connect
technology. This new technologies is perfect for different with core management switch via standard Rapid
network redundancy applications and structures. The Spanning Tree Protocol or through multiple paths or
JetNet 4510 allows aggregating up to 5 Fast Ethernet nodes to increase the reliability by Rapid Dual Homing
TM TM
rings, including 1 Fiber ring for long distance data (RDH ) Technology. By integrating MSR and Link
TM
transmission. With the MSR technology, a node can be Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) the JetNet 4510
configured to multiple rings with the failover time in as can enhance the link availability and to increase the
little as 5ms and ZERO-second restore time. In addition, link capacity. Two or more Fast Ethernet connection are
users can extend the ring topology by adding hundreds bundled in order to increase the bandwidth and to create
of JetNet 4510 to meet the network needs without resilient and redundant links.
241 www.korenix.com A Beijer Electronics Group Company

Rapid Dual Homing (RDHTM) Technology

TM
Rapid Dual Homing (RDH ) replaces DualHoming II and Standbys by their link speed. The uplink with the
and can be used for ring coupling. While keeping easy highest speed is more likely to be the active path for
configuration and multiple redundancies, the failover data transmission. Link aggregation is also integrated Industrial
TM Intelligent
time is much faster (less than 50 ms) and the restore into RDH . An uplink can be a link or several links NMS
time is ZERO (seamless restoration). Uplinks can aggregated as a trunk, which provides better redundancy Rackmount
be auto detected and gathered into groups. In each and link capacity. PoE Plus
Switch
group, uplinks are sorted into Primary, Secondary,
Industrial
1-to1 n-to1 1-to-n n-to-n trunk PoE Plus
Switch
connection connection connection connection connection
Industrial
12-24V
PoE Switch
Industrial
PoE Switch
Rapid Rackmount
Dual Ethernet Ethernet L3/L2 Switch
Homing Gigabit
Managed
Switch
Managed
Ethernet
Switch
JetNet 4510
Entry-level
Switch
Wireless
Outdoor AP
Embedded
PoE/Router
Ring Computer
Ethernet Ethernet
Coupling (LINUX)
Industrial
Communication
Computer
(WIN/LINUX)
Ethernet/PoE/
JetNet 4510 Serial Board
Ethernet
I/O Server
Link Aggregation Control Protocol Media

Converter
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) allows you to Serial Device

Server
group multiple Ethernet ports in parallel to increase the
SFP Module
link bandwidth. The aggregated ports can be considered
one physical port, so that the bandwidth is higher than Din Rail
LACP Power Supply
just one single Ethernet port. The member ports of the
same trunk group can balance the loading and backup
with each other. The LACP feature is usually used when
you need higher bandwidth for the backbone network.
This is an inexpensive way for users to transfer much
more data. If the trunk port is also assigned as a ring technology. Now, there is no recovery time when failures
TM
port, it will become a TrunkRing , which means that occur. The JetNet 4510 provides a simple and easy way
the bandwidth of ring path has increased with port trunk to aggregate port bandwidth into Rapid Super Ring.

Various Network Control and Security Features
The JetNet 4510 provides various network control Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), Rate Control.
and security features. The Network Control feature The security can help users avoid hackers’ attack. The
allows users to optimize their industrial environment. features include DHCP Server, IP and MAC Binding,
The supported features include VLAN, Private VLAN, 802.1x Access Control, SSH, IP Access Table and Port
QinQ, IGMP Snooping, Quality of Service (QoS), Link Security.
LLDP and Korenix NMS for Auto Topology Visualization

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) was formally In industrial environments, most vendors provide their
ratified as IEEE 802.1AB-2005. LLDP is the Layer own discovering protocols, window utility or other tools
2 protocol that allows the network device/station to to manage their switches. The LLDP protocol fixes the
advertise connectivity & management information, the interoperability among them. With LLDP supported,
identity & major capabilities. If receives and establishes users can easily browse the network devices and
network management information on the local same establish the network management information schema
network. of the stations.
W i t h S N M P, L L D P a n d K o r e n i x Vi e w p r o t o c o l s
supported, JetNet 4510 series can be easily discovered,
their port and ring status can be displayed by Korenix
NMS, the Korenix designed Network Management
System or other NMS, which supports SNMP and LLDP.
The software can help administrators efficiently and
effectively manage the industrial network.
Port Security
Port Security is an enhanced security feature provided table. After enabling this, only the PC with the available
by JetNet 4510. Port Security is also known as, MAC address can access the network through the
“Port and MAC Binding”. Users can bind a specific VZLWFK7KHRWKHU3&VFDQ¶WHYHQSDVVWKHWUDI¿FWKURXJK
MAC address to a specific port, add the MAC the port.
and Port binding entry/entries to the port security
Network
Port 1
Port Security Table
Port VID Mac Address
Port 1 1 MAC B
PC A PC B PC C PC D
MAC A MAC B MAC C MAC D

(DV\WR&RQ¿JXUH1HWZRUN0DQDJHPHQW)HDWXUHV
The JetNet 4510 also provides users many advanced
management features. It can be configured smartly by Network
Korenix View, Korenix NMS, Web browser, SNMP, Telnet Industrial

Intelligent
and RS-232 console Command Line Interface (CLI). NMS
It provides Failure notification by E-mail, SNMP Trap, RS-232

Rackmount
System Log, Digital Input and Fault Relay. The JetNet PoE Plus
Switch
4510 also supports Built-In Watchdog Timer for system
JetView, Web, Industrial
recovering when detecting CPU failure. SNMP, Telnet PoE Plus
Switch
Industrial
12-24V
PoE Switch
Modbus TCP/IP for Factory Automation Network Enhancement
Industrial
PoE Switch
The Modbus TCP/IP protocol is supported in JetNet PRQLWRUIDFWRU\HTXLSPHQWZLWKMXVWDVLQJOH-HW1HW
Rackmount
4510 series for factory automation applications. It platform users can easily achieve enhanced monitoring L3/L2 Switch
HQDEOHV DGPLQLVWUDWRU WR FRQQHFW WR GDWD DFTXLVLWLRQ and maintenance of the entire factory.
Gigabit
(SCADA) system and read the switch's operating Managed
Switch
information using its own Modbus TCP/IP master
Managed
program for monitoring and maintaining switch’s status. Ethernet
With the supported Modbus TCP/IP, the JetNet 4510 Switch
series become an element of factory automation such Entry-level

Switch
as the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), Distributed
Wireless
Control System (DCS), and allow users to monitor/ Outdoor AP
PDLQWDLQIDFWRU\HTXLSPHQWRQWKH+0,+XPDQ0DFKLQH
Embedded
Interface) system, including production information PoE/Router
Computer
and communication status. Therefore, user does not (LINUX)
need to integrate multiple management platforms to Industrial

Communication
Computer
(WIN/LINUX)
A Built-in Watchdog Timer
Ethernet/PoE/
Serial Board
With a built-in Watchdog timer, the JetNet 4510 performs
Ethernet
a warm boot (restarting the switch) automatically Watchdog Timer I/O Server
when the switch system locks up. It saves the effort of 00:00:06
Media
Converter
maintenance for keeping network alive if the switch can
CPU Failure = 6 sec
recover by itself. Serial Device
=> Internal Reset Server
SFP Module
Din Rail
00:00:00
Power Supply
Brilliant Idea for Hazardous Environment Application

Robust Mechanical Design
Korenix JetNet 4510 has an outstanding outlook protection, light weight, rigid shell and excellent thermal
plus is rock solid with strong functionality. Using conductivity units, it can operate reliably under harsh
an aluminum extrusion case with IP 31 class of industrial environments.

JetNet 4510 Appearance
LEDs
LEDs
SFP 8-10,
Power, DI, DO, R.M.
RJ45 8-10
Reset
Console
SFP Socket
Din Rail Mounting
Din 35
(35mm)
Fast Ethernet Port 1-7

10/100 Base-TX
Power Input, Digital Input,

Digital Output
Dimension (Unit = mm)

6SHFL¿FDWLRQ
Technology Radius: Login by Radius account/password, Key for Radius
Standard: Server Authentication
IEEE 802.3 10Base-T Ethernet DHCP Server: Up to 255 IP address, support IP and MAC
IEEE 802.3u 100Base-TX Fast Ethernet Industrial
binding Intelligent
IEEE 802.3u 100Base-FX Fast Ethernet DHCP Option 82: 5HOD\WKH'+&3UHTXHVW NMS
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control and Back-pressure E-mail Warning: $XWRPDWLFZDUQLQJE\SUHGH¿QHGHYHQWV
Rackmount
IEEE 802.1p class of service System Log: Supports both Local mode and Server mode PoE Plus
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN and GVRP Modbus TCP/IP: Supports open protocol- Modbus TCP/IP Switch
IEEE 802.1QinQ with function code group 4 for factory automation application Industrial
IEEE 802.1D-2004 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Network Redundancy PoE Plus
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol(MSTP) Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol: IEEE802.1s MSTP, Switch
IEEE802.3ad LACP each MSTP instance can include one or more VLANs Industrial
IEEE802.1X Port_based Network Access Control Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol: IEEE802.1D-2004 Rapid 12-24V
IEEE802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. Compatible with Legacy STP and PoE Switch
Modbus TCP/IP IEEE802.1w Industrial
ITU-T G.8032 ERPS Multiple Super Ring(MSRTM): 2nd generation Korenix Ring PoE Switch
Performance Redundancy Technology. Failure recovery within 5ms.

Rackmount
Switch Technology: Rapid Dual Homing (RDHTM): Support multiple node to L3/L2 Switch
Store and Forward Technology with 32Gbps Switch Fabric QRGHPXOWLSOHSDWKWRRQHQRGHWRREWDLQPRUHÀH[LEOHDQG
System Throughput: 2.976Mpps/ 64bytes packet Gigabit
reliable architecture Managed
Transfer packet size: 64 bytes to 1522 bytes TrunkRingTM: Provides port aggregate function in ring Switch
(with VLAN Tag) path to get more bandwidth for higher throughput ring
Managed
MAC Address: 8K MAC architecture Ethernet
Packet Buffer: 1Mbits Multiple Ring: New generation of ring coupling technology Switch
Relay Alarm:Dry Relay output with 1A@24V ability without extra control port - TangentRing
Entry-level
Management Legacy Super Ring: Backward compatible in client mode Switch
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQCisco-Like CLI, Korenix View, Web browser ITU-T G.8032: 50ms failure Recovery Time, 50ms
with multiple languages, HTTPS, SSH; TFTP/Web Update Wireless
Restoration Time Outdoor AP
IRU¿UPZDUHDQGFRQ¿JXUDWLRQEDFNXSUHVWRUH'+&3&OLHQW Interface
Warm reboot, Reset to default, Admin password, Port Number of Ports: 10/100TX: 7 x RJ-45, Auto MDI/MDI-X, Embedded
PoE/Router
Speed/Duplex control, status, statistic, MAC address table Auto Negotiation Computer
display, Static MAC, Aging time 10/100TX: 3 x RJ-45, combo with SFP (LINUX)
SNMP: v1, v2c, v3, Traps and RMON1 100Base-FX: 3 x SFP with Hot Swappable
Industrial
LLDP: Link Layer Discovery Protocol to advertise system/ Cables: Communication
port identity and capability on the local network 10Base-T: 2-pair UTP/STP Cat. 3, 4, 5 cable (100m) Computer
SNMP MIB: MIB-II, Bridge MIB, VLAN MIB, SNMP MIB, (WIN/LINUX)
100 Base-TX: 2/4-pair UTP/STP Cat. 5 cable (100m)
RMON and Private MIB Diagnostic LED: Ethernet/PoE/
Port Trunk: Up to 5 Static Trunk and 802.3ad LACP 10/100 RJ-45: Link/Activity(Green), Full duplex/Collision Serial Board
VLAN: IEEE802.1Q VLAN, GVRP. Up to 256 VLAN groups (Yellow) Ethernet
Private VLAN: Direct client ports in isolated/community SFP: Link/Activity(Green) I/O Server
VLAN to promiscuous port in primary VLAN Unit: Power(Green), Digital Out(Red), Digital Input(Green),
Media
QinQ: Double VLAN Tag in an Ethernet frame R.M.(Green) Converter
Quality of Service:)RXUSULRULW\TXHXHVSHUSRUW RS232 Console: RJ-45 Connector, Pin3: TxD, Pin6: RxD,
IEEE802.1p COS and Layer 3 TOS/DiffServ Serial Device
Pin5:GND Server
IGMP Snooping: IGMP Snooping V1/V2/V3 for multicast Power: 2 sets of power Inputs
¿OWHULQJDQG,*034XHU\99 Digital Input: 2 sets of Digital Input SFP Module
Rate Control:,QJUHVV¿OWHULQJIRU%URDGFDVW0XOWLFDVW Logic Low (0): 0-10VDC/Logic High(1): 11-30VDC Din Rail
8QNQRZQ'$RU$OOSDFNHWVDQG(JUHVV¿OWHULQJIRU$OO Alarm: VHWVRI5HOD\RXWSXWVIRUSUHGH¿QHGHYHQWV Power Supply
packets Reset: Reset button is provided to restore default settings
NTP: Network Time Protocol to synchronize time from Power Requirements
internet or local PC System Power: 10.5~60V/-10.5~60V DC with Reverse
Embedded Watchdog: Embedded hardware watchdog Polarity Protection (JetNet 4510 / 4510-w)
timer to auto reset system when switch system failure Power Consumption: 11.5 Watts @ DC 48V
Port Mirroring: 2QOLQHWUDI¿FPRQLWRULQJRQPXOWLSOH Mechanical
selected ports Installation: DIN-Rail mount or Wall Mount
Port Security:$VVLJQDXWKRUL]HG0$&WRVSHFL¿FSRUW Case: IP31 protection, aluminum metal case
IP Security: IP security to prevent unauthorized access Dimension: 137mm(H) x 96mm (W) x 119mm (D)
802.1x: Port_based Network Access Control ( without DIN rail clip)
Weight: 0.915kg with package
Environmental EMS: EN55024, EN61000-6-2, IEC 61000-4-2,
O
Operating Temperature: -25 ~70 C (JetNet 4510), IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-4, IEC 61000-4-5,
O
-40 ~75 C (JetNet 4510-w) IEC 61000-4-6, IEC 61000-4-8, IEC 61000-4-9
Operating Humidity: 5% ~ 95% (non-condensing) Safety: UL 508
O O
Storage Temperature: -40 ~ 85 C (-40 ~ 185 F) Shock: IEC60068-2-27
Hi-Pot: 1.2KV for power Vibration: IEC60068-2-6
1KV for ports Free Fall: IEC60068-2-32
Regulatory Approvals MTBF: 249,683 Hours, MIL-HDBK-217F GB GB(MILITARY
EMI: CE/EN 61000-6-2 /-6-4, IEC 61000-6-2/-6-4, EN55022/ HANDBOOK)standard
CISPR 22, CISPR 16-1-2/-2-1/-2-3, FCC class A " Warranty: 5 years
Ordering Information
O
JetNet 4510 Industrial 10-Port Managed Fast Ethernet Switch, -25~70 C operating temperature
O
JetNet 4510f Industrial 10-Port Managed Fast Ethernet Fiber Switch, -10~70 C operating temperature
O
JetNet 4510-w Industrial 10-Port Managed Fast Ethernet Switch, -40~75 C operating temperature
Includes:
JetNet 4510 / 4510f / 4510-w (without SFP transceiver)
Wall mounting plate
Quick Installation Guide
Documentation CD-ROM
Console cable
Optional Accessories
100Base-FX SFP Transceiver
100Base-FX BIDI/WDM SFP Transceiver
100Base-FX SFP Transceiver with DDM
100Base-FX BIDI/WDM SFP Transceiver with DDM

System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.2.9 Fibre Trransreceiver
19
$FFHVVRULHV
3&03MALL&ORM0LUGGABLE
3&03MALL&ORM0LUGGABLE
3&0--
R
0XOWLPRGH0ESV.0)LEHU7UDQVFHLYHUFRPPHUFLDORSHUDWLQJ7HPSa &
:DYHOHQJWKQP 2SHUDWLRQ7HPSHUDWXUH
2 2
7[3RZHU &a &
2 2
G%P0LQaG%P0D[ 6WRUDJH7HPSHUDWXUH &a &
5[6HQVLWLYLW\G%P0D[ 2SHUDWLQJ+XPLGLW\
/LQNEXGJHWG%P
3&0-- W
0XOWLPRGH0ESV.0)LEHU7UDQVFHLYHUZLGHRSHUDWLQJ7HPSa R&
2 2
7[3RZHU &a &
2 2
/LQNEXGJHWG%P
3&03-
6LQJOHPRGH0ESV.0)LEHU7UDQVFHLYHU&RPPHUFLDORSHUDWLQJ7HPSa R&
$FFHVVRULHV
:DYHOHQJWKQP /LQNEXGJHWG%P
2 2
7[3RZHU 2SHUDWLRQ7HPSHUDWXUH &a &
2 2
3&03- W
6LQJOHPRGH0ESV.P)LEHU7UDQVFHLYHU:LGHRSHUDWLQJ7HPSa R&
2 2
7[3RZHU &a &
2 2
/LQNEXGJHWG%P

Downloaded from Elcodis.com electronic components distributor
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.2.10 UPS
20
AP160 N
online
UPS COMPACT
Rack–tower convertible 1-10 kVA
• LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (LAN) • INTERNET CENTERS (ISP/ASP/POP) • ELECTROMEDICAL DEVICES

• SERVERS • INDUSTRIAL PLCS • TELECOMMUNICATION DEVICES
• DATA CENTERS • EMERGENCY DEVICES (LIGHT, ALARM) • INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION
series
AP160 N
GTEC is proud to introduce the latest Rack-Tower covertible AP160N UPS, which can deliver clean, safe, and regulated
power supply to protect your mission critical equipment, so as to safe guard your valuable data from any abnormal power
disturbances, such as: power surges, power dips or power blackout.
AP160N is available with 1kVA; 2kVA; 3kVA; 6kVA and 10kVA range, its compact design allows AP160N to adapt within a
limited rack space but demanded for high power supply.
AP160N is fully DSP controlled designed for highest power density; reliability and power availability suitable all IT loads for
Servers and in Data Center.
COMMON FEATURES:
• Excellent Reliability
• High Power Density
• Flexible Settings
• Compact Solution
• Lower Power Consumption
• Long run time Model
• Rack-Tower Convertible
COMMON FEATURES
Excellent Reliability Compact Solution
• DSP technology fully controlled • Higher power performance in slim height for 19’’
• Rotary segment LCD display with easy access rack space
• Self monitoring and fault diagnosis • Internal batteries included, with easy replacement
• Standard battery connector for additional backup time
High Power Density
• Wide input voltage range Lower Power consumption
• 0,9 load PF increase the power availability • Very high efficiency
• Input power factor correction for the lowest current • Ecomode operation available for efficiency up to 97%
distortion • Lower heating dissipation
Flexible Settings Long run time Model

• Selectable configuration via LCD: online, • Dedicated solution available with super charger for
eco-mode and frequency converter mode (CVCF) long autonomy
• EPO connector for emergency power off • Using external batteries with large capacity with
dedicated battery pack
AP160 N
1kVA to 3kVA
1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 Flexible Settings
• Load segments (outlet) control
• Standard single dry contact port
programmable
AP160N, 1K/1KS/2K rear panel Compact Solution

• Slim 2U height for 19” rack space
1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8
Lower Power Auto-consumption

• High efficiency up to 90%
AP160N, 2KS rear panel

1 3 2 5 6 4 8 7
AP160N, 3K rear panel
1 3 2 5 6 4 8 7
menu:
• UPS Status
• Battery Capacity
• Load Level
AP160N, 3KS rear panel • Input/output Voltage
• Input/output Frequency
Description • Fault/Warnings
1 AC Output • Setting Mode
2 EPO / Dry-In Communication
3 Dry-Out Communication
4 Intelligent Slot
5 USB Slot
6 RS 232 Port
7 AC Input
8 Earth Terminal
AP160 N
6kVA to 10kVA
Intelligent Parallel Port RS232 usb Ext Battery

Slot (optional) Connector
Flexible Settings
• Redundant parallel 1+1 configuration
• Optional hot swappable PDU with
power segment outlets and mechanical
maintenance bypass switch
Compact Solution
• 3U package for the 6kVA version and
5U package for the 10kVA, with internal
batteries included
AC Output EPO Terminals Maintenance
Bypass • Dual inputs, with separated bypass
AP16N -10K PDU
Lower Power Auto-consumption
• Efficiency greater than 93%
menU: • UPS Status • Input/output Frequency

• Battery Capacity • Fault/Warnings
• Load Level • Setting Mode
• Input/output Voltage
INPUT SWITCHBOARD
INPUT SWITCHBOARD
POWERSUPPLY
OUTPUT SWITCHBOARD
OUTPUT SWITCHBOARD
LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
ETHERNETNETWORK
AP160N 6kVA to 10kVA UPS with optional parallel kit fitted
in parallel configuration, can meet most demanding power
requirement. Increase power availability and flexibility. LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
Parallel Redundancy feature provides economic power solution

for system integration. Furthermore, parallel redundancy feature
equally shares the load to maximize UPS performance, and more
secure UPS continuous operation.
Communication and Power Management Solutions

WinPower CD is packed with UPS, and can also be downloaded from the internet. It has the function to remote
monitor and control UPS, warning notifications through broadcast and mobile phone, multi-shutdown PCs, and
schedule UPS self-test. This unique software provides complete power protection for computer system during po-
wer failure. The software supports lots of O/S including Windows family, Linux, Sun Solaris 7/8/9, FreeBSD, IBM Aix
4.3x, 5.1x, and HP-UX 11.x. More than that, to offer increased benefits for our customers, we have also released
USB version MAC version on the internet.
INTERFACE OPTION:
SNMP CARD RELAY CARD/AS400 MODBUS INTERFACE
• Power flow display for monitoring UPS status • Multi-language versions: English, German, French,
• Scheduled system shutdown/restart Italian,Spanish, Portuguese and Chinese
• Scheduled UPS test • Selectable User Interface (Background)
• Warning notification via E-mail / Pager • UPS Parameter setting
• Warning notification via Broadcast • Record logs for analysis
• Password security protection • SNMP Network card allows management of UPS across
• Remote Monitor / Control via LAN LAN using any of the main network communication
protocols – TCP/IP and network interface via SNMP.
AP160 N
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model AP160N 1K 1KS* 2K 2KS* 3K 3KS* 6K 6KS* 10K 10KS*
Power Rating 1000VA/900W 2000VA/1800W 3000VA/2700W 6000VA/5400W 10000VA/9000W
INPUT
Rated Voltage 220Vac / 230Vac / 240Vac
Voltage Tolerance 120 ÷ 276 Vac
120Vac-276Vac
120Vac-276Vac (± 3 %) at 50% load
(± 3 %) at 50% load
Voltage Range 148Vac-276Vac (± 3 %) at 75% load
176Vac-276Vac
176Vac-276Vac (± 3 %) at 100% load
(± 3 %) at 100% load
IEC 320, C20
IEC 320, C14 Terminal
AC Input Connector 16A/ 250V Connectors
10A/ 250V socket block
socket
Frequency Range 45Hz÷55Hz / 54Hz÷66Hz
THDi% < 5% at full load
Power Factor > 0.99 (I/P220Vac, full RCD load)
Output
Rated Voltage 208Vac** / 220Vac / 230Vac / 240Vac
Voltage Regulation ± 1%
Rated Frequency AC mode 50/60 ± 0,2%
Crest Factor 3:1
Harmonic Distortion ≤ 2% THD ( Linear Load)
Output Waveform Pure Sinewave
Power factor 0,9
KS Version: KS Version:
8 x IEC 320, 2 x IEC 320, 4 x IEC 320,
C13 10A/ 250V C13 10A & C13 10A &
8 x IEC 320, C13 10A 250V
Output Connection and 1x IEC 320, 2 x IEC 320, 2 x IEC 320,
recepticles
C19 16A/ 250V C19 16A 250V C19 16A 250V
recepticles recepticles & recepticles &
output terminal output terminal
Battery
Type Sealed lead acid battery, maintenance free
Rating 12V/7.2Ah 36Vdc 12V/9AH 48Vdc 12V/9AH 72Vdc 12V/5AH 180Vdc 12V/9AH 240Vdc
Depending Depending Depending Depending Depending
Numbers of Batteries 3 on the 4 on the 6 on the 15 on the 20 on the
capacity capacity capacity capacity capacity
Backup Time (typical load) > 6 mins
of external
> 6 mins
of external
> 6 mins
of external
> 5 mins
of external
> 7 mins
of external
3 hours to batteries 3 hours to batteries 3 hours to batteries 3 hours to batteries 3 hours to batteries
Recharge Time 90% 90% 90% 90% 90%
General Characteristics
Transfer time 0ms
Dual Input to Bypass N/A YES
Parallel configuration N/A YES as optional
Efficiency (online mode) > 87% > 89% > 90% > 93%
Dimensions LxDxH (mm) 438x435x2U 438x608x3U 438x560x3U*** 438x560x5U***
Weight UPS case (kg) 15.3 9.1 30.5 12.3 33.2 13.5 46.5 18.0 82.5 32.5
Operating Temperature 0-40° C
Humidity 0-95% (non-condensing)
Noise Level (@ 1m) <45dB <50dB <55dB
WinPower Software supports: Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP/ME, Linux, Sun Solaris, IBM
Interface standard via Smart USB
Aix, Compaq True64, SGI IRIX, FreeBSD, HP-UX, and MAC
Interface for Intelligent Slot SNMP /AS400 Card / Modbus all optional
IEC 61000-4, IEC 62040-1, IEC 62040-2, IEC 62040-3, IEC 60950-1,
Compliance
IEC 62040-1, ETS 300019-2-2
* ks version are provided with battery extra charger
** Derate to 90% with 208Vac output voltage
*** Dimension is depth of casing, excluding cable gland & PDU
Note: product specifications are subject to change without further notice.
G-Tec Companies are also present worldwide with Business Partners in several countries.
G-Tec Asia Pacific Pte Ltd

60 Kaki Bukit Place, #03-05, Eunos Techpark II, Singapore 415979
Tel. +65 6555.5014 - Fax +65 6555.4105
info@gtec.com.sg
G-Tec Europe srl

Strada Marosticana, 81/13 - 36031 Povolaro (VI), Italia
Tel. +39 0444.361321 - Fax +39 0444.365191
info@gtec-power.eu
Rev. 31.12.2012
www.gtec-power.com
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
4.2.11 Battery
21
Global Battery Co. Ltd, South Korea
formerly known as Global & Yuasa Co. Ltd.
ES 9-12 AGM-VRLA
12V - 9Ah
INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATION
Nominal Voltage 12V
The most advanced technology of ROCKET, Valve Regulated Lead Acid
ba eries make them highly useful in a broad range of applica ons. The Capacity (20HR, 25°C) 9Ah
use of high-purity calcium alloy maximizes the longevity of ROCKET Length 151mm (5.94inch)
ba eries to ensure excellent performance in any circumstances. Width 65mm (2.56inch)
Dimension
Height 94mm (3.70inch)
ES Series are specially designed to provide be er cyclic life and are
Total Height 100mm (3.94inch)
ideally suited for areas prone to frequent power failures.
Approx Weight 2.8kg
The unique construc on coupled with the use of special sealing epoxies Design Life 10 Years
and long sealing paths of ROCKET series ensures that no electrolyte
leakage can occur from terminals or cases of any ROCKET Baterries. This
feature ensures safe & eﬃcient opera on of ROCKET ba eries in any
posi on. CHARACTERISTICS
20 hour rate 9Ah
Capacity 25°C 10 hour rate 8.2Ah
(77°F) 5 hour rate 7.7Ah
TECHNICAL FEATURES 1 hour rate 5.8Ah
Internal resistance (Fully charge, 25°C) 18m
 Non-Spillable Sealed Construc on
Self-discharge (20°C) 1 month Remaining Capacity:3%
 Absorp ve Glass Mat System (AGM System)
Discharge -20°C~60°C
 ABS (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene) container and cover Opera ng
Gas Recombina on Charge -10°C~60°C
 temperature range
 Maintenance-Free Opera on Storage -20°C~60°C
 Low Pressure Ven ng System Maximum discharge current 77°F(25°C) 135A(5 Sec.)
 Heavy - Duty Grids Short circuit current 450A
 Low Self-Discharge - Long Shelf Life Cycle Use 2.30 to 2.35VPC
Charge Methods (Constant Voltage
 Wide Opera ng Temperature Range Max. charging Current 3.6A
Charge 77°F(25°C) - Cyclic Use
Temp. compensa on - 30mV/°C
APPLICATIONS Charge Methods (Constant Voltage Standby Use 2.23-2.27VPC
Charge 77°F(25°C) - Standby Use Temp. compensa on - 20mV/°C
 UPS
 Telecom Communica on Equipments
 Fire Alarm & Security Systems
 Medical Instruments
 Emergency Ligh ng
 Computer Backup
THE BATTERY CONTAINER AND COVER ARE AVAILABLE BOTH
COMPLAINTS STANDARD IN ABS plas c and Flame Retardant (FR).

 JIS
 IEC 60896 PART 1 & 2
 BS6290-4,
 Eurobat Guide - HIGH Performance
www.rocketbatteries.net
Above information is subjec

t to change anytime . For more information contact enquries@r
ocketbatteries.net
Version : SG0901
Global Battery Co. Ltd, South Korea
formerly known as Global & Yuasa Co. Ltd.
ES 9-12 AGM-VRLA
12V - 9Ah
CONSTANT CURRENT DISCHARGE (Amperes) at 25°C
End Point
Volts/Cell 5min 10min 15min 30min 60min 3h 5h 10h 20h
1.60V 33.0 24.2 17.0 9.90 5.80 2.33 1.60 0.87 0.47
1.65V 32.1 23.6 16.5 9.79 5.75 2.29 1.56 0.86 0.46
1.70V 30.9 22.9 16.1 9.36 5.71 2.25 1.55 0.84 0.46
1.75V 30.3 22.1 14.6 8.91 5.66 2.20 1.54 0.82 0.45
1.80V 29.6 21.0 13.9 8.45 5.51 2.14 1.53 0.82 0.44
CONSTANT POWER DISCHARGE (Watts per cell) at 25°C

End Point
Volts/Cell 5min 10min 15min 30min 60min 3h 5h 10h 20h
1.60V 71.7 44.8 33.6 19.6 14.5 11.5 6.30 4.34 3.10
1.65V 68.3 44.3 33.1 19.1 14.2 11.2 6.23 4.29 3.04
1.70V 64.8 42.9 31.1 18.5 13.7 11 6.08 4.20 2.98
1.75V 61.4 41.1 30.2 17.6 12.9 10.7 5.94 4.08 2.92
1.80V 58.0 39.2 28.4 16.6 12.2 10.4 5.77 3.92 2.85
www.rocketbatteries.net
Above information is subjec

t to change anytime . For more information contact enquries@r
ocketbatteries.net
Version : SG0901
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
5. Data Points Schedule

5.1 Data Points Schedule ETS 01
22
I/O LIST - ETS-01
SIGNALS
S.N. TAG NO. DESCRIPTION
TYPE CH MODULE
1 Secondary Pump-01 Remote Status DI 0
2 Secondary Pump-01 Run Status DI 1
3 Secondary Pump-01 Fault Status DI 2
4 Primary Side Hex-01 FCV Remote Status DI 3
5 Primary Side Hex-01 FCV Local Status DI 4
6 Primary Side Hex-01 FCV Fault Status DI 5
DIGITAL INPUT-1 (16 CH)

7 Secondary Side Hex-01 MOV Remote Status DI 6
8 Secondary Side Hex-01 MOV Local Status DI 7
9 Secondary Side Hex-01 MOV Fault Status DI 8
10 Secondary Side Hex-01 MOV Open Status DI 9
11 Secondary Side Hex-01 MOV Close Status DI 10
12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15
1 Secondary Pump-01 Start/Stop Cmd DO 0
4 Secondary Side Hex-01 MOV Open Cmd DO 3
5 Secondary Side Hex-01 MOV Close Cmd DO 4
DIGITAL OUTPUT-1 (16 CH)

10 Spare DO 9
11 Spare DO 10
12 Spare DO 11
13 Spare DO 12
14 Spare DO 13
15 Spare DO 14
16 Spare DO 15
1 Secondary Pump-01 Speed Feedback AI 0
2 Primary Side Hex-01 FCV Position Feedback AI 1
ANALOG INPUT-1 (8 CH)

3 Primary Side PT in Supply Line AI 2
4 Primary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line AI 3
5 Spare AI 4
6 Spare AI 5
7 Spare AI 6
8 Spare AI 7

3 Secondary Side PT in Supply Line AI 2
4 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-ASPETAR NORTH AI 3
5 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-ASPETAR WEST AI 4
6 Secondary Side TT in Supply Line AI 5
7 Spare AI 6
8 Spare AI 7

3 Secondary Side PT in Return Line AI 2
4 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-ASPETAR EAST AI 3
5 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-FIFA 2022 ICONIC BUILDING AI 4
6 Secondary Side TT in Return Line AI 5
7 Spare AI 6
8 Spare AI 7
1 Secondary Pump-01 Speed Cmd AO 0
ANALOG OUTPUT-1 (8 CH)

4 Primary Side Hex-01 FCV Position Cmd AO 3
7 Spare AO 6
8 Spare AO 7
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
23
I/O LIST - ETS-02
SIGNALS
TYPE CH MODULE

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

10 Spare DO 9
11 Spare DO 10
12 Spare DO 11
13 Spare DO 12
14 Spare DO 13
15 Spare DO 14
16 Spare DO 15

10 Spare DO 9
11 Spare DO 10
12 Spare DO 11
13 Spare DO 12
14 Spare DO 13
15 Spare DO 14
16 Spare DO 15

7 Spare AI 6
8 Spare AI 7
2 Primary Side Hex-023FCV Position Feedback AI 1

4 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-SPORTS HALL
AI 3
5 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-EXISTING ACADEMY

AI 4
7 Spare AI 6
8 Spare AI 7

3 Secondary Side PT in Return Line AI 2
4 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-HAMAD AQUATIC CENTER 3
AI
5 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-SUPER CLUB
AI 4
6 Secondary Side TT in Return Line AI 5
7 Spare AI 6
8 Spare AI 7

5 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-AZIZIYA BOUTIQUE HOTEL
AI 4
6 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-FITNESS CENTER

AI 5
7 Spare AI 6
8 Spare AI 7

7 Spare AO 6
8 Spare AO 7

7 Spare AO 6
8 Spare AO 7
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
24
I/O LIST - ETS-03
SIGNALS
TYPE CH MODULE


12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

12 Spare DI 11
13 Spare DI 12
14 Spare DI 13
15 Spare DI 14
16 Spare DI 15

10 Spare DO 9
11 Spare DO 10
12 Spare DO 11
13 Spare DO 12
14 Spare DO 13
15 Spare DO 14
16 Spare DO 15

10 Spare DO 9
11 Spare DO 10
12 Spare DO 11
13 Spare DO 12
14 Spare DO 13
15 Spare DO 14
16 Spare DO 15

7 Spare AI 6
8 Spare AI 7

4 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-SPORTS HALL SHELL B AI 3
5 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-MOSQUE AI 4
7 Spare AI 6
8 Spare AI 7
1 Secondary Pump-04 Speed Feedback AO 0
2 Primary Side Hex-04 FCV Position Feedback AO 1

3 Secondary Side PT in Return Line AO 2
4 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-WOMEN'S SPORTS HALL AO 3
5 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-LADIES CLUB AO 4
6 Secondary Side TT in Return Line AO 5
7 Spare AO 6
8 Spare AO 7

Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-HAMAD AQUATIC CENTER
5 OLD AO 4
6 Secondary Side DPT across Supply and Return Line-TORCH TOWER AO 5
7 Spare AO 6
8 Spare AO 7

7 Spare AO 6
8 Spare AO 7

7 Spare AO 6
8 Spare AO 7
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
6. Typical Control Schedule
25
ETS - 1 ASPETAR NORTH, WEST, EAST EXPANSION AND FIFA 2022 ICONIC BUILDING
SOLUTIONS FOR CONTROL

& AUTOMATION W.L.L
P.O Box 37240, Doha, Qatar
Tel. +974 4038 6772 Mob : +974 33908602
Fax +974 4038 6773
Website: www.solutions-uae.com
ETS - 2 SPORTS HALL, EXISTING ACADEMY, HAMAD AQUATIC CENTER, SUPER CLIB AND AZIZIYA BOUTIQUE HOTEL

& AUTOMATION W.L.L
Tel. +974 4038 6772 Mob : +974 33908602
Fax +974 4038 6773
ETS - 2 ASPETAR SPORTS HALL, MOSQUE, WOMEN'S SPORTS HALL & LADIES CLUB

& AUTOMATION W.L.L
Tel. +974 4038 6772 Mob : +974 33908602
Fax +974 4038 6773
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
7. System Architecture
26
System Architecture
BTU Meter
PLC HMI
Ethernet Switch
RTD Flow
RTD
Meter
Energy Center
TT PT DPT ON-Off MOV Pump

Valve
Optical Fiber
Ethernet
Modbus
Hard wired
To other building
ETS-01 Aspire North, West, East Expansion and
South building
PLC
Ethernet Switch
HMI
BTU Meter
Optical Fiber
Ethernet
Modbus
Hard wired
RTD Flow
RTD
Meter
ON-Off Energy Center

TT PT DPT MOV Pump
Valve
ETS-02 Sports Hall Shell A , Existing Academy, Hamad Aquatic
Center New, Super Club, Aziziya Boutique Hotel and Fitness center
Ethernet Switch
BTU Meter PLC
HMI
Optical Fiber
Flow Ethernet
RTD RTD
Meter
Modbus
Hard wired
Energy Center
TT PT ON-Off Pump
DPT MOV
Valve
ETS-03 Sports Hall Shell B, Mosque, Women’s Sports Hall,
Ladies Club, Hamad Aquatic center Old and Torch Tower
Ethernet Switch
BTU Meter PLC HMI
Optical Fiber
Flow Ethernet
RTD RTD
Meter
Modbus
Hard wired
Energy Center
TT PT ON-Off Pump
DPT MOV
Valve
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
8. Country of Origin
27
Instrument List
Sr. No. Instrument Description Model Code & Description Quantity Make COO
1 Pressure Transmitter PMP51‐AA11JA1SGBRKJA1+PA 9 E&H Germany
2 Differential Pressure Transmitter PMD55‐AA21BA67LGBHG4A1A+AAPD 19 E&H Germany
3 DN25-2000mm Flow Meter DTI200-A14C1A 3 E&H Germany
4 RTD for BTU Meter TR66‐ABABDAX10C7A, Insertion Length : 300mm 2 E&H Germany
5 RTD for BTU Meter TR66‐ABABDAX10C7A, Insertion Length : 350mm 4 E&H Germany
6 Temperature Transmitter TR66‐ABABDAX10473, Insertion Length : 300mm 2 E&H Germany
7 Temperature Transmitter TR66‐ABABDAX10473, Insertion Length : 350mm 4 E&H Germany
8 Energy Calculator (BTU Meter) RH33‐AA1A+AAD2E1E2P3 3 E&H Germany
PLC List
Sr. No. Instrument Description Model Code & Description Quantity Make COO
1 CPU 1769-L33ER 1 Allen -Bradley Singapore
2 CPU 1769-L36ERM 2 Allen -Bradley Singapore
3 DI 1769-IQ16 15 Allen -Bradley Malaysia
4 DO 1769-OB16 5 Allen -Bradley Malaysia
5 AI 1769-IF16C 11 Allen -Bradley USA / Singapore
6 AO 1769-OF8C 6 Allen -Bradley USA / Singapore
7 SM2 1769-SM2 3 Allen -Bradley USA / Singapore
8 PB4 1769-PB4 3 Allen -Bradley Malaysia
9 PB2 1769-PB2 5 Allen -Bradley Malaysia
10 ECL 1769-ECL 3 Allen -Bradley Malaysia
11 CRR3 1769-CRR3 5 Allen -Bradley Malaysia
12 HMI 2711P-T7C22D9P 3 Allen -Bradley USA
13 Ethernet Switch JETNET 4510/4510-W 1 Korenix Taiwan
14 Fibre Trransreceiver SFP100SM30 2 Korenix Taiwan
15 UPS-2kVA AP160N-2KS 1 G-TEC China
16 Battery E912 1 Rocket Korea
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
9. Authorization Letter
28
Recognition
Rockwell Automation is pleased to announce
SOLUTIONS FZC
a Rockwell Automation Recognised System Integrator
for the Discipline Control
SOLUTIONS FZC is a member of the Rockwell Automation RcSI program and will benefit
from dedicated technical and project support from Rockwell Automation in the successful
execution of automation projects.
The community of Rockwell Automation Recognised System Integrators ensures that, through
loyal partnership between both parties, projects are executed according to industry standards.
RcSI’s are partners which have proven their loyalty to both customers and Rockwell
Automation over several years and provide domain expertise to the industry.
SOLUTIONS FZC has given repeatable proof on delivering quality projects in the industry
using Rockwell Automation technology.
Rockwell Automation
Klaus Schwarz
System Integrator Program Manager EMEA
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
10. Warranty Letters

(Sample)
29
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
11. Major Project List
30
PROJECT REFERENCES:
S No Project Name Scope of Work Hardware/Software Used Contact Person

Khalifa Stadium Energy Center  Instrument Supply / Installation Nisham Kassim - Galfar
Up-gradation & ETS Integration  PLC Supply / Installation (Sr. Instrumentation
Engineer)
 Engineering Documentation
1 Contractor: Galfar Al Misnad.  Cable Termination Rockwell system
Contact No: +974 70200542
 PLC / SCADA Programming & Commissioning
End User: Aspire Zone.   End User Training
 Instrument Supply / Installation

Wakara Stadium Energy Center
 PLC Supply / Installation Babu Sriramulu .N -AECOM
Contractor : Takyeef
 Engineering Documentation Siemens System (Sr. ELV Engineer)
2 Electromechanical
 Cable Termination
 PLC / SCADA Programming & Commissioning Contact No: +974 66463894
End User : Supreme Council
  End User Training

Nisham Kassim - Galfar
Al Bayt Stadium Energy Center  PLC Supply / Installation
(Sr. Instrumentation
(Ongoing Project)  Engineering Documentation
3 Rockwell system Engineer)
Contractor : Galfar Al Misnad  Cable Termination
End User : Supreme Council  PLC / SCADA Programming & Commissioning Contact No: +974 70200542

Al Rayyan Stadium Energy Center  PLC Supply / Installation Sachin Shinde - Trags
4
(Ongoing Project)  Engineering Documentation Siemens System (Sr. Project Engineer)
Contractor : Trags Engineering  Cable Termination
End User : Supreme Council  PLC / SCADA Programming & Commissioning Contact No: +974 31400303
ISF Camp District Cooling Plant  Instrument Supply / Installation

(Ongoing Project)  PLC Supply / Installation Hesham El Safty – Al Jaber
 Engineering Documentation (Sr. ICA Engineer)
5 Schneider System
Contractor : Al Jaber Aktor  Cable Laying & Termination
End User : ISF Qatar   End User Training
Brajesh Kumar - Marafeq
Barwa City District cooling Plant  PLC Supply / Installation
Up-gradation & ETS Integration (Sr. Automation & Control
Engineer)
6
Contractor : Qatari Diar
 Cable Laying & Termination Rockwell system
End User : Marafeq Qatar  Wireless Remote integration
Sanjay Ruley – Qatar Cool
Qatar Cool District Cooling Plant 3 , (Head of Production &
West Bay  PLC / SCADA Programming & Commissioning Distribution)
7 GE System
End User : Qatar Cool Contact No: +974 55831384
Gold nline Metro Project -CCP  PLC Supply / Installation

(Ongoing Project) Sukhnanadan - ALYSJ
(System Manager)
8  Cable laying / Termination Rockwell System
Contractor : ALYSJ
End User : Qrail   End User Training
Qatar Cool 11ETS
(Ongoing Project)  Instrument Installation Sanjay Ruley – Qatar Cool
 PLC Supply / Installation Rockwell / GE System
(Head of Production &
9  Engineering Documentation Distribution)
End User : Qatar Cool  Cable Termination
Brajesh Kumar - Marafeq

 PLC Supply / Installation (Sr. Automation & Control
11 ETS L&P Plot Foxhills
 Engineering Documentation Engineer)
10 Rockwell System
Ebd User: Marafeq Qatar  PLC / SCADA Programming & Commissioning
Contact No: +974 33807618
Lusail Stadium North and South ETS

Martin Thattil
(Ongoing Project)  PLC Supply / Installation (Sr. Automation Engineer)
11
Contractor: HBK Enginnering Services
 Engineering Documentation Siemens System
End User: Marafeq
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
12. Major Project Approvals
31
I .1 n 'I d.....-b..U1
~J~19 l'---'.J~
Supreme Committee
for Delivery 6 legacy
Docume nt Tran smit tal Form
Transmittal no.: SC-C08-EGC-TRN-ALB-KEO -17-00859 Date: 30/08/2017

Project: Design & Con struction of AI Wakrah Stadium & Precinct - Energy Centre
To: CC: I:8J with attachment o without attachment

Name : Mr.M ehrdad Mirzakashani Company name: KEO Internationa l Consultants
Designation: Project Director Address: P.O.Box. 18108, Doha-Qatar
Documents transmitted
o Contract 0 Invoice
o Report
---------------------------+~----------
0 Plan
o Specification I:8J Other (MAS)
Trans m itted f o r
I:8J Approval 0 Review and comments
o Information only
~----------------~~~-----
0 As requested
o For record s only 0 For action
51. No. Description Document ref. Rev. no. Format I No. of Stat us
no. Hard Soft cop ies (Code)
---
MATERIAL APPROVAL SUBMITIAL SC-C08-EGC-
1 FOR SCADA / PLC SYSTEM FOR ALB-MAS-EL- 01 Yes Yes 3
PROCESS MONITORING & CONTROL 00227
APPLICATION
Rema rks
-
Sender's Name: Pra vee n Mohan
Company : AI Ba lagh
Job title: Project
Directo r
Signature:
V
I f,
Date: 30.08.2017
Ack nowledgement of receipt (kindly acknowledge receipt and return this sheet to the sender)
Recipient's Name: Job title: Signature: Date:
Reference number : 5C-C08-EGC-TRN-ALB-KEO -17-00859

~
I Al a II d...-....Q..lJ1
~ J ,.J 1 9 ~l..W.oll
Suprem e Committee
for Delivery 6 l "gacy ,
TECHNICALDOCUMENT SUBMITTAL FORM

Document
SC-C08-EGC-ALB-MAS-EL-00227 Rev 01 Date: 27.08 .2017
No:
Material Approval Submittal for SCADA / PLC System
Title:
for Process Monitoring & Control Application
Project/Work
Design & Construction of AI Wakrah Stadium and Precinct - Energy Centre
Package:
Type of Submittal
o Sub-Contractor I Prequalification DDesign Calculation 0 0& M Manual
DTesting and Commissioning
[8JMaterials & Product Data DMock Up Report
Report
[8JCompany Profile 0 Method Statement 0 Others (pis. specify below)
0 Inspection &Test Plan (ITP)
SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION:
o CIVIL
STRuRuRAL I I ARCHIT~CTURAL I ELEC~RICAL I
MECH2NICAL DOTHER I
ECG Specs 2155-WK-000-G-SPC-001, Section-10
Specification Ref.: DCPro Specs SC-C08-EGC-ALB-SPE-EL-00004 Location/Use:
Drawing Ref.: C08-ALB-D-EGC-B-EL-AL-AZ-0080,6608,661 0,6611,7600

Energy Centre I for
BOQ Ref: N/A
Scad a System
Activity 10: CWAKECR13420
For Service Provider (Brief description of the service provided):
For Scada System
Note : Please use add itional sheets if necessary
/ Name:
Praveen Mohan
Position :
Project Director
Construction Supervision Review:
Contractor
AI Ba lagh
Signature:
Date
Received :
~
Date:
'Jpi'iN'rl-'
Note: Please use additional sheets , if necessary

~Level1 - Revise and ResubmitULevel 2 - No Objection with CommentsULevel 3 No ObjectionULevel 4 Review Not
Required
Name: Position : CSC Signature: Date:
Construction Management Recommendation: Date
Received:
Note: Please use additional sheets, if necessary

glevel1 - Revise and Resubmit DLevel 2 - No Objection with Comments DLevel 3 - No Objection DLevel4 = Review Not
Required
Name: Position : PM Signature: Date:
Engineer Final Feedback (WHEREVER APPLICABLE) Date
Received :
Note : Please use additional sheets, if necessary

!:JLevel1 • Revise and Resubmit DLevel2 No Objection with Comments ULevel 3 No Objection ULevel4 = Review Not
Required
Name: Position SC Signature: Date:
1
I !lpll~1
~Jfl19 f--uL...UaoJJ
Supreme Committee
for Delivery & Legacy
Material Approval Submittal
Material Approval Submittal for

SCADA I PLC System
for Process Monitoring & Control Application
Prepared for: Supreme Committee for Delivery & Legacy

Document Reference number: SC-COB-EGC-ALB-MAS-EL-00227, Rev.01
Prepared by:
AI Balagh Trading & Contract ing CO.W .L.L

P.O.Box: 5777, Doha Qa tar
Tel: +974 ·44667714/15 / 16
Fax : +974 - 44660040
Please note:
UNCONTROLLED VERSION WHEN PRINTED OR SAVED LOCALLY
SC-C08-EGC-AlB-MAS-E l -00227, Re v.01 2

I .1 0 11 Ci....-...b.1..1
~JJI9~J~
Supreme Committee
for Del ivery & Legacy
Approval sheet
Document owner :Bernardo Mercado
Signature: 7 /
I Date: 27/08/2017
/
Revision history
Revision Date Additions/modifications
00 17 Jul2017 Submission for Approval
01 27 Aug 2017 Re-Submission for Approval
CONTRACTOR: We have reviewed this document and completed the Document Review
Checklist accordingly.
Title Signature Date
V
Prepared by Bernardo Mercado MEP
I have prepared this document Project Director Z'f/ e/ I"!-
having identified SC (Takyeef E.M)
requirements.
Reviewed by Mohan Pandit MEP Design
Manager
~ )o.r)'2c I?
I have reviewed this document
for its accuracy and technical 1.
content, and to meet SC
requirements .
~~.
Checked by Muthurangan QA/QC Manager
I have checked this document
for its layout and format, and to J;I.{j - '1f1V
meet SC requirements.
Approved by Project Director
Praveen Mohan
~o\i '\PI
I have approved this document
for implementation. V
SC-C08-EGC-Al B-MAS-El-00227, Rev.Ol 3

/ '--!WI4-i>JJI
~Jplg !--OLili.oll AS'COM Imagine it.
Delivered.
Supreme Committee
for D«livery & Legacy
DEVIATION REQUEST FORM
Title: Material Approval Submittal for MAS Reference: SC-C04-EGC-ABL-MAS-I C-012 71

Endress +Hauser ultrasonic level
Revision 2
transmitter
Date: 29-0ctober-2018 PQ Reference: N/A
PM REMARKS
n accordance with SC letter Ref:SC-C04-CAG-LET-QSC-AEC-17-00164, dated 16 October 2017 regarding

Delegation of Authority:
The Engineers' Representative shall have the authority to perform the aforementioned duties for all
works, except for specific packages, for which the Engineer's Representative shall obtain the Engineer's
final approval.
D Any items (Mock-Ups, samples, materials and Contractor proposals} related to permanent and
visible finishes for Stadium, Precinct and Energy Centre.
1:81 Selection of alternative materials, specifications, suppliers, and vendor for Stadium, Precinct and
Energy Centre.
D Selection of major and/or critical Equipment for Stadium, Precinct and Energy Centre.
D Selection of any ICT integrated system for Stadium, Precinct and Energy Centre.
181 Other (See below for details}
The Contractor has proposed to use Endress + Hauser, Germany Ultrasonic Level Transmitter in Energy
Centre, which is in accordance with the Energy Centre Preferred Vendors List SI Code No. 16.
The Contractor has provided a compliance statement (refer to Section 01) from M/s. Endress + Hauser,
Germany advising that specified model FMU42 Series Ultrasonic level sensor is in line with the required
Specification and measuring range of up to 10 meters.
The PM has no objection to this proposed model, but as per delegated authority PM is required to seek
Engineer's Approval for such changes.
ENGINEER'S APPROVAL/REJECTION
Remarks I Further Information Required:
Approved: lf Rejected: D
Name: Eng. Jassim Telefat Signature:
Designation: Competition Venues Executive Director - Group B Date:
Reference No.: SC-C04-CAG-AEC-NOC-IC-00497

L........,J.D.114-..J.>Jjl
.....:....,jllgl!---'Ju..,.JJ
Supreme CommittM
(«Delivery & Legacy
AS'COM Louis Berger (fi}L&T
AL BALAGH .. L&T JOINT VENTURE
Main Construction Works for Al Rayyan Stadium and Precinct, Doha - State of Qatar
Material Approval Submittal
SECTION 1: to be filled out by the Contractor
MAS Number: ISC-C04-EGC-ABL-MAS-IC-01271 I D Stadium D Precinct 0 Energy Centre
ITP Number: NA I D D M M y y y y
Date Received:
~ ~ I 2 I a i1 8
Contra ct:
I TD0-15-TTC-0006 I Disc'.pl'.n~/ IELECTRICAL / INSTRUMENT
Subdisc1plme I New Submission D
Contractor/Supplier Name:
IM/S ABL/TRAGS ENGINEERING/ Solution for Control Automation I I Resubmission 0
EDRMS Ref . Material: I s I c I - I c I 0 I 4 I - I E IGlcl·IAlsl L I I Ml A
I
s I I 1 I c I I 0 I 1 I 2 I 1 I 1 I Revision No. [iliJ
Title:
Material Approval Submitta l for Ultrasonic Level Transmitter
Ref. Specification/BOQ:
SC-C04-EGC-ALB-SPE-IC-00069 - Control and Instrumentation Specification
.,.- ~
/~~
Drawing Reference (if any) : / . .
C04-ABL-D-EGC-B-IC-AL-AZ-6603 & C04-ABL-D-EGC-B-IC-AL-AZ-7600
I '
<o
Manufacturer/Location:
Endress + Hauser/ Germany
/ ,/ - \\J\....V
t..'-''--/"\ ~)-
s an ~ above r efe r eni
F~
Compliance Statement: The Contractor hereby confirm s that the materials subj ect to this Material Approval Subm ittal (MAS) complies with the Cq ntr aJ t requirem r
Specification(s) .
!>("" ~
Local Supplier: !If not a local supplier, please provide explanation below: \ \ l \; ~ ! ,/
0 Yes D No
v
I \ f r I~'
/
Sample Submitted: 0 Yes 0 No Samp le Reference No. NA

.. /
Sample t o be used in Mock-up? D Yes [2) No
Supplier from Vendor List? 0 Yes D No If Yes, w hich Vendor List? D Stadium & Precinct 0 Energy Centre
(SC· C04-CMN-RAM-l5T-AD-00001) (ANNEXURE 03 • LlST OF MANUFACTURERS· Revision 01)
Vendor List Code: I I SI No.I 16 I
If not a supplier from the Vendor List, please specify Pre-Qualification (PQ) submittal reference number: NA
I
PQ approved by Engineer? D Yes 0 No
Enclosures: 0 Specification Ref. I Clause No: SECTION 2
0 Manufacturer Ref erence Ref./ Clause No: SECTION 3
D Drawings (if applicable) Ref./ Clause No: NA
0 Commercial Registration Ref. / Clause No: SECTIONS
0 Trade License Ref./ Clause No: SECTIONS
0 Product Data Ref./ Clause No: SECTION 6
0 Catalogue (only if applicable) Ref./ Clause No: SECTION 6
0 ISO Certificate (if applicable) Ref./ Clause No: SECTION 8
0 Warranty/Guaran ty Ref. I Clause No: I SECTION9 I

D Method Statement (only if applicable) Ref./ Clause No: NA
0 Test Reports (if applicable) Ref./ Clause No: SECTION 7
0 Maintenance Data (if applicable) Ref. / Clause No: I SECTION 11 I

0 Compliance Checklist Ref. I Clause No: SECTION 1
0 GSAS Material Criteria Compliance Checklist Ref. / Clause No: I SECTION 14 I
D Others, as detailed in Contract Ref./ Clause No: NA
Comments from Contractor (include any document reference numbers for cross referencing):
Contractor's Responsible Manager: Contractor's QA/QC Manager:

Name: Signature: Name: Signature:
Designation Designation
Format Number:SC-C04-CA G-ABL-TMP-AD-00016 1of2 Rev-05,Dt:19.09.2017

',
t____,,LUI "-----.qJJ I
....:.... , ~19 , ........,ul..olo.,,JJ
St.lpr• m• Commit te•
fof-OelN.ry 6 L..giky
AS'COM Louis Berger f€ZJL&T
A L BALAGH - L&T JOINT VENTURE
SECTION 2: CSC/PM Review Date:
Above information given by the Contractor is complete: @Yes D No (See below comments)
CSC Comments:
Level 1, 2 or 3 Comments Dispositions Status/Remarks
The Body of construction as per the attached specification is

Corrosion - resistant CPVC body. The proposed Instrument's Noted and we confirm that sensor Body material will be made of PVDF (better
body is Aluminium. The contractor is requested to comply than CPVC} wh ich is of a highly corrsion-resistant material. However the
Level 1 Pending Engineer's Approval
with the Project Specifications. transmitter housing only will be made of Epoxy Coated Die Cast Aluminium
Revision 1 Comment : which is standard manufacturing practice.
Noted
Please note that the referred humid ity (50%) is a reference operating condt io n
Being the Instrument used in closed cell Water Tanks, the
(Le .value of humidity recorded during a test done in a controlled
chances of Humidity will be more than 50%. Hence the
envoironment). It is not the final threshold of the sensor.
Level 1 contractor can opt for an Instrument with higher range of Closed
The offered model has been installed in similar environments in various DCP /
Humidity instea d of the proposed one with 50%
ETS Station projects and chilled water application's, and has been working
Noted
satisfactorily.
The attached ISO certificate is an expired one . The contractor

Level 2 is requested to submit a valid certificate. Noted and Complied . Please refer section-8 in revised submittal Closed
Noted
CSC Recommendation
0 No objection D Revise and resubmit D Accepted for Information D Rejected
Use of the material(s) subject ta this Material Approval Submittal are strictly subject to the Engineer's final approval.
Date
Archibald Sigamony
/ 25-0ct-18
Mudasir Zehgeer
PM Comments:
Level 1, 2 or 3 Comments Dispositions Status/Remarks
Contractor to confirm compatibility to high TDS water qual ity.
Noted and confirm that proposed Ultrasonic level transmitter is
Level 1
independent of any properties or high/low TDS & suitable for this
t--- - ---t--- - - - -- - - - - - - ------- - - application. Confirmation mail from E+H is attached in the revised
Must be suitable for Ashghal TSE (ma x 20_~1.~~------- ~~bmittal_.- - - - - - -- ·
PM Recommendation
(Ki No Objection Revise and Resubmit D Accepted for Information D Rejected
Name and Designation of PM Authorised Person Date
A - l/C,t?'
u
SECTION 3: Engineer's Review
D A: Approved DB: Approved as Noted 0::: Revise and Resubmit D D: Accepted for Information Only D R: Rejected
Engineer's Comments:
Refer to Specification 01 00 DO-Section 01 33 00 'Submittal Procedures' far further details
IName:
Format Number:SC-C04-CAG-ABL-TMP-AD-00016 2 of 2 Rev-05,Dt:19. 09. 2017

WEST BAY DISTRICT – PLANT #3 Hyder Consulting Middle East Limited
accompanied with written support and shall be approved by Qatarcool at design

stage.
e. Standard products that do not meet the functional and technical requirements of the
specification are not acceptable.
f. The System Integrator shall provide dedicated in house qualified personnel having
experience on designing and commissioning of 2 or more District Cooling Plants with
similar or larger capacity through out the duration of this project.
g. The System Integrator shall be capable of offering an around the clock extended
service contract after completion of the warranty period.
h. The System Integrator shall be responsible for getting approved the SCADA system
Architecture from the Original Equipment Manufacturer. The Original Equipment
Manufacturer shall certify/Authorize the System Integrator to work on their supplied
SCADA Hardware and Software.
i. The Approved Qatar Cool System Integrators are detailed below.
• M/s Cimac (Schneider Electric).
• M/s Solutions FZC
• M/s Megatech
j. It is the responsibility of the Main contractor and system integrator to coordinate with
Qatar Cool to develop the Plant Control Philosophy at the stage of detailed designing.
k. The SCADA and BMS system architecture design shall be based on the SCADA
Process Automation Operation and Management Level Schematic Diagram Ref:
QCPR-00-8401 Sht 001.
1.6 Factory Acceptance Test (FAT):
a. Factory acceptance test Procedure to be submitted for review along with the
Technical submission for PLC Control Panel & SCADA.
b. Two sets of PLC Logic, HMI Screens and SCADA Graphics shall be submitted in soft
form for review and approval two months prior to FAT.
c. The PLC Logic program shall be thoroughly commented explaining each program
subroutines and the network with in it. The PLC Logic shall be made available during
the FAT with following attachments
• Hardware Configuration.
• Program structure.
• Variable Cross Reference List.
• Memory registers usage List.
• Network Nodes list for Remote I/O Nodes and Third part devices.
d. The functionality of the entire control system shall be proved by simulation during the
FAT to ensure minimum commission time at site.
e. FAT shall be carried out in presence of Client, Consultant and Contractor and the test
reports shall approved for the delivery clearance.
f. It’s the system integrators responsibility to carry out any requested modification in the
PLC, SCADA & HMI application program after FAT to meet the process requirements
and site conditions.
SCADA & Instrumentation Specifications Page 6 of 55 October 2013

Section 014-MQ000159-DOH-R-00 Revision 00
ALYSJ
j o i n t ve nt ure
QATAR INTEGRATED RAIL PROJECT

Doha Metro: Gold Line
BACS PLC System Configuration ( As Built )
Ras Bu Abboud Centralised Cooling Plant
M006-GDB-MEP-RPT -00764
PREPARATION BY CONTRACTOR:
Action Name Signature Role Company Date
Originator Rajeev Chandna f<~ Project Manager SCAQATAR 17-Jul-2019
Checker Sukhnandan Kumar (~ Systems Manager ALYSJ-JV
Reviewer Oguz Dayi ~/1 MEP Construction

Area Manager
ALYSJ-JV
Approval Oliver Kleebach J- LY IlL Project Director ALYSJ-JV

/o"' /IF
ENGINEER'S ASSISTANT (/
-
Engineer's
Samuel Adair McChesney Qatar Rail
Assistant
STATUS
A B c D E F
Approved
Fail/Not No Review
Approved with SONO NOWC
Approved Required
Comments
I Document Number: MOOG-GDB-MEP-RPT-00764 Rev 4 Page 1 of8 17-Jul-2019 I

Uncontrolled if printed, refer to EDMS for current version
ALYSJ
jo i nt venture
QATAR INTEGRATED RAIL PROJECT

Doha Metro: Gold Line
BACS Software Requirements Description (SRD) &
Report (As Built)
RAS BU ABBOUD CENTRALIZED COOLING PLANT
M006-GDB-MEP-RPT -00776
PREPARATION BY CONTRACTOR:
Action Name Signature Role Company Date
Originator Vasu Mohan Bhardwaj Rc~i~ Planning Manager SCA QATAR 15-Jul-2019
Checker Sukhnandan Kumar

1 ~;£A~
~
Systems Manager ALYSJ-JV 7)t:J1/I(
Reviewer Oguz Dayi
/b/1 MEP Construction
Area Manager
ALYSJ-JV
3/J/13
Approval Oliver Kleebach ~/_. u II
L/
Project Director ALYSJ-JV 3/) /'Jo19
ENGINEER'S ASSISTANT
Engineer's
Samuel Adair McChesney Qatar Rail
Assistant
STATUS
A B c D E F
Approved
Fail/Not No Review
Approved with SONO NOWC
Approved Required
Comments
Document Number: MOOG-GDB-MEP-RPT-00776 Rev 3 Page 1 of41 15-Jul-2019

Uncontroll&d if printed, refe:r to EDMSf or eurrent version
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
13. Other’s –If Any
32
System Integrator:
Rev: 00
Not Applicable

Project: Client

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Project: Client

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROJECT

Design & Build of ETS Room – Aspire Main Works

TECHNICAL SUBMITTAL - PLC & INSTRUMENTATION

SOLUTIONS FOR CONTROL AND AUTOMATION

5.3 Data Points Schedule ETS 03 ................................................................................................. 24

2. Specification & Compliance Statement

Related Sections and Parts

Digital Input,Analog Input

1.1.5 PRESUBMITTAL MEETING

(ix) parts list and spare parts recommendations as specified in Section 9.

(b) is in accurate calibration

(c) was placed in operation in his presence

(f) fully covered under the terms of the guarantee

1.1.8 MANUFACTURES EXPERIENCE

1.1.9 FACTORY INSPECTION

1.1.13 JOB CONDITIONS

(e) 2 years supply of expendable items, diskettes, toner cartridges etc.

1.2.11 Instrument Piping

1.2.14 Painting and Protective Coatings

1.2.16 Process Connections

1.3.3 Installation and Supervision

(a) facility identification (name, location, etc.)

(b) loop identification (name or function)

(c) equipment tag and serial numbers

(f) input values or settings

(g) expected outputs and tolerances

(h) actual readings

(i) explanations or special notes as applicable

(j) tester's certification with name and signature

1.3.7 Final Acceptance

1.3.8 Commissioning Assistance

1.3.9 Instruction and Training of The Owner's Personnel

1.3.10 Specialised Training Programme for Owner’s Personnel

Related Sections and Parts

BS 1646......................Symbolic representation for process measurement control functions and instrumentation.

Submittals shall generally be in accordance with Part 1 of this Section. Complied

2.1.4 Quality Assurance

Higher-level programming shall be in structured English statements Complied

Communication protocols shall be able to communication with PLC manufacturer‟s

7 Interfaces with external systems shall be on a read-only basis. Complied

Process Alarm Shall be

Report Generation is the part of

2.3.4 Visual Display Unit (VDU)

2.3.5 Logging / Alarm / Report Printers - Continuous Feed

(a) print speed : 160 characters per second

(a) print speed : text, 80 characters per second

2.3.7 Monochrome Printers (Laser)

2.3.8 Audible Alarm

(a) mimic displays

(a) critical alarm - an alarm that requires immediate operator action

(a) instantaneous value

2.4.6 VDU Mimic Displays

(b) maintenance related comments

2.4.10 Manually Corrected Data

2.4.12 Point Record

(a) point identity

2.4.14 Data Manipulation

2.5 REMOTE TERMINAL UNITS (RTU) FOR TELEMETRY APPLICATION

(a) 16 digital inputs

The RTU shall operate on a report by exception basis

(ii) Monitor status of system hardware and provide diagnostic information .

2.6.2 Input Modules

All software shall be suitably documented to include the following as a minimum: